LASER PRINTER
Operation Manual (for copier)
Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to gain
the maximum benefit from the product.
Before installing this product, be sure to read the installation
requirements and cautions sections of the "Operation manual for
printer operation and general information".
Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference
including this manual, the "Operation manual for printer
operation and general information" and operation manuals for
any optional equipment which has been installed.
cover1.p65 4/17/01, 9:50 AM1
cover1.p65 2/04/01, 19:172
1
INTRODUCTION
This manual describes only copier features. For operation procedures relating to both the basic printer and copier
features, refer to the “Operation manual (for printer operation and general information)”. General information required for
loading paper, adding toner, misfeed removal, and operation of peripheral devices are described in that manual.
Separate manuals are provided for the operation of network scanning and facsimile functions. Refer to the “Operation
manual (for scanner)” and “Operation manual (for facsimile )” for these descriptions.
copy-1_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:171
2
CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS (B/W scanner module/DSPF) . . . . 3
● Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
● Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
● Touch Panel (basic screen of copy mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
● Acceptable originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SETTING ORIGINALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
NORMAL COPYING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
● Copying from the automatic document feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
● Automatic two-sided copying from the automatic
document feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
● Copying from the document glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
● Automatic two-sided copying from the document glass . . . . . . . 14
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
● Automatic selection (auto image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
● Manual selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SPECIAL PAPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
● Common operation procedure for using the special functions . . 19
● Margin shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
● Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
● Dual page copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
● Pamphlet copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
● Job build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
● Multi shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
JOB PROGRAM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
● Storing a job program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
● Recalling a job program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
● Deleting a stored job program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
INTERRUPTING A PRINT OR COPY RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
MISFEED REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
● Misfeed in the scanner module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
● Copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
● Scanner module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
● Key operator program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
● Using the key operator programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
● Setting programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
copy-1_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:172
3
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
(B/W scanner module/DSPF)
Exterior
DSPF exit area
Scanned originals are deposited here.
Document feeding area cover (page 29)
Open to remove misfed originals in this area.
Original guides (page 7)
Adjust to the size of the originals.
Document feeder tray (page 7)
Set the originals here for automatic feeding.
Operation panel (next page)
Use for operation of copier, network scanner, and
facsimile features and for printer configuration
operations.
Document cover
Document scanning windows
Sheet type originals are scanned here.
Document glass
All originals which cannot be copied from the
document feeder tray must be copied here.
copy-1_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:173
4
Touch panel (next page)
The machine status, messages and touch keys are
displayed on the panel. When the machine is in the
standby state, the display will change if the [PRINT]
key, [IMAGE SEND] key or [COPY] key is pressed
to show the current status of these modes.
Mode select keys
Use to select the basic modes of the product.
[COPY] key
Press to select the copy mode and display the basic
screen of the copy mode. (next page)
Even when the machine is busy in another mode,
the basic copy mode screen will appear when the
[COPY] key is pressed. If this key is pressed and
held while the basic screen of the copy mode is
displayed, the total output count and the quantity of
toner remaining (percentage) will be displayed.
Numeric keys
Use to select the number of copies and to make
numerical entries for setting operations.
[C] key (clear key)
Press to clear a copy quantity entry. If this key is
pressed while the automatic document feeder is
being used, any originals in progress will be
automatically output.
[CA] key (clear all key)
Press to clear all selected settings and return the
machine to the initial settings for the currently
selected mode. Before starting a copy operation,
press the [CA] key first.
[ACC.#-C] key
If the auditing mode has been set, press this key to
close an open account after finishing a copy,
facsimile scanning or network scanning job. For
setting of the auditing mode, see page 7 of the Key
Operator’s Guide.
[#/P] key (page 26)
Press to select the job memory mode.
[START] key (page 10)
When the indicator is lit, copying, facsimile scanning
and network scanning jobs can be started. Press to
start copying.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Operation Panel
copy-1_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:174
5
Touch Panel (basic screen of copy mode)
When the copy mode key is pressed, this display screen will appear showing the basic copy mode selections.
(For the display screens for other modes, see the respective operation manuals for those modes.)
Message display
Basic status messages are displayed here.
[INTERRUPT] key display area
When interrupt copy is available, the [INTERRUPT]
key will be displayed here. When an interrupt copy
job is being run, a [CANCEL] key will be displayed
here to be used for canceling the interrupt copy job.
Copy quantity display
Displays the selected number of copies before the
[START] key is pressed or the number of completed
copies after the [START] key is pressed. A single
copy can be made when “0” displayed.
[2-SIDED COPY] key (page 9)
Touch to display the duplex copy mode setting
screen. A highlighted selection on the screen will
indicate the currently selected mode. The setting
screen can be closed by touching the [OK] key on
the setting screen whether or not a selection change
was made.
[OUTPUT] key (page 10)
Touch to display the output mode setting screen. A
highlighted selection on the screen will indicate the
currently selected mode. The setting screen can be
closed by touching the [OK] key on the setting screen
whether or not a selection change was made.
[SPECIAL MODES] key
Touch to display the special modes selection screen.
The functions that can be selected by touching this
key are described on page 19.
Paper size display
The display shows the location of the paper trays,
the size of the paper in the trays and the approximate
amount of paper loaded in each tray. The approximate
amount of paper in a tray is indicated by .
For changing the paper size in a tray refer to page 1-
16 of the “Operation manual (for printer operation
and general information)”.
Original size display
The original paper size will be displayed when originals
are placed on the document glass or in the document
feeder.
Exposure display and [EXPOSURE] key (page 15)
A touch of the [EXPOSURE] key will open the
exposure selection window. A highlighted key on the
exposure window indicates which exposure mode
(AUTO, TEXT, TEXT/PHOTO or PHOTO) is currently
selected. When an exposure mode other than AUTO
is selected, an exposure level scale will also appear
in the window.
Paper select display and [PAPER SELECT] key
(page 9)
Displays the selected paper size. When the auto
paper select mode has been selected, “AUTO” will
be displayed.
A touch of the [PAPER SELECT] key will open the
paper selection window. When a selection is made,
the selection window will close. To close the window
without making a selection touch the key again
Copy ratio display and [COPY RATIO] key
(page 17)
Displays the selected copy ratio.
Touch to display the reduction and enlargement copy
ratio selection screen.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
SPECIAL MODES
ORIGINAL
EXPOSURE
AUTO
100%
AUTO
PAPER SELECT
COPY RATIO
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
8
1
2
/
11
x
11 17
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
8
1
2
/
11
X
8
1
2
/
11
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
R
2.
1.
3.
4.
copy-1_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:175
6
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER
Originals set in the automatic document feeder will be automatically fed and copied sequentially.
The automatic document feeder will simultaneously scan both sides of originals when two-sided to one-sided or two-
sided to two-sided copying is being done.
Acceptable originals
A stack of up to 50 original sheets (30 original sheets*
1
for 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) or larger) of the same size paper can be
set in the document feeder tray provided the stack height is within the limit shown below.
A stack of up to 30 mixed size originals can be set if the width of the originals is the same and the stack height is within
the limit shown below. In this case, however, stapling and duplex will not function and some special functions may not
give the expected result.
*1 For paper heavier than 28 lbs. (105 g/m
2
), only a stack of up to 15 sheets can be set. Setting 16 or more sheets may
cause incorrect scanning of original and scanned image may become expanded compared with original itself.
Notes on use of the automatic document feeder
●
Use originals within the specified size and weight ranges. Use of originals out of the specified range may cause
an original misfeed.
●
Before loading originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips.
●
If originals have damp spots from correction fluid, ink or glue from pasteups, be sure they are dried before they
are fed. If not, the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled.
●
To prevent incorrect original size detection, original misfeeds or smudges on copies, use the following as a guide
for feeding originals.
Transparency film, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink
ribbon should not be fed through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be
damaged, crumpled or folded or have loosely pasted paper on them or cutouts in them. Originals with multiple
punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole punched paper may not feed correctly.
●
When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that the punched edge is at a position other than the
feed slot.
■■
■■
■ Size and weight of acceptable originals
■■
■■
■ Total amount of originals that can be
set in the document feeder tray
14 lbs. or
50g/m
2
2
2
34 lbs. or
128g/m
2
Original size:
(148 x 210 mm)
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
or A5
11" x 17"
or A3
(297 x 420 mm)
Weight (thickness):
g/m
... Weight of a sheet of paper of 1 m
3/16" or 5.0 mm
or less
1/4" or 6.5 mm
or less
Total aggregate thickness must not exceed 1/4" or
6.5 mm (for 14 to 21 lbs. or 50 to 80 g/m
2
paper).
Total aggregate thickness must not exceed 3/16" or
5.0 mm (for 21 to 34 lbs. or 80 to 128 g/m
2
paper).
Hole positions
Hole positions
Hole
positions
copy-1_Ep.P65 5/18/01, 11:39 AM6
7
SETTING ORIGINALS
■■
■■
■ When using the document glass
Open the document cover, place an original face
down on the document glass, and then gently
close the document cover.
Original size detector
NOTE
Do not place any objects under the original size
detector, because they may damage it or the original
size may not be detected properly.
●
Set an original by aligning its corner with the tip of the
scale ( ) mark at the left rear corner of the glass as
shown in the illustrations.
■■
■■
■ When using the automatic document
feeder
1
Ensure that there is no original on the document
glass.
2
Adjust the original guides to the size of the
originals.
3
Place the originals face down in the document
feeder tray.
Set the originals all the way
into the feed slot. Do not
exceed the maximum
height line marked on the
original guide.
or B4
Original scale
mark
Original scale
mark
8
1
2
/
x
11 or A4
8
1
2
/
x
11R or A4R
8
1
2
/
x
14
11x17 or A3
or B4
5
1
2
/
8
1
2
/
x
or A5
copy-1_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:177
8
■■
■■
■ Standard original setting orientation
Descriptions of functions that follow in this manual assume that originals are oriented as shown.
Document feeder tray Document glass
■■
■■
■ Automatic copy image rotation - rotation copying
If the orientation of the originals and copy paper are different, the original image will be automatically rotated 90°
and copied. (When an image is rotated, a message will be displayed.) When enlargement of originals larger than 8-
1/2" x 11" or A4 is selected, rotation cannot be done.
[Example]
●
This function operates in the auto paper select or auto image mode. (Rotation copying can be disabled
with a key operator program. See page 33.)
Orientation of original Orientation of paper Copy after rotation
Face down Face down
Place originals in the document feeder tray or on
the document glass so that the top of the original
is positioned to the rear side of the machine. If
not, staples will be incorrectly positioned and
some special features may not give the expected
result.
SETTING ORIGINALS
To p
To p
To p
Bottom
Bottom
Bottom
To p
Bottom
copy-1_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:178
9
NORMAL COPYING
This section describes the normal copying procedure.
Copying from the automatic document feeder
■■
■■
■ 1-sided copies of 1-sided originals
1
Place the originals in the document feeder tray.
(page 7)
2
Ensure that the 1-sided to 1-sided copy mode is
selected.
8
1
2
/
11
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
11 17
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
R
1.
2.
3.
4.
ORIGINAL
The one-sided to one-
sided mode is selected
when no icon for a two-
sided mode appears in the
dashed area on the display.
If the 1-sided to 1-sided
copy mode is already
selected, steps 3 to 5 are
not needed.
3
Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
4
Touch the [1-sided to 1-sided copy] key.
The [1-sided to 1-sided] key
will be highlighted.
5
Touch the [OK] key.
OK
0
6
Ensure that paper of the same size as the
originals is automatically selected. (✼Note)
COPY RATIO
AUTO
PAPER SELECT
100%
8
1
2
/
11
X
The selected tray will be
highlighted or the message
“LOAD xxxxxx PAPER.” will
appear. If the message ap-
pears, load paper in a pa-
per tray or the bypass tray
with paper of the required
size. Even if the message
above is displayed, copy-
ing can be performed onto
the currently selected pa-
per.
(✼Note) The following requirements must be satisfied.
●
Originals of a standard size (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2"
x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A3, B4, A4, A4R or A5)
are set and the auto paper select function is enabled.
TRANSPA
8
1
2
/
11
X
8
1
2
/
11
X
11 17
x
1.
2.
3.
PLAIN
PLAIN
If originals of a size other
than the sizes above are to
be copied, manually select
the desired paper size.
Original Copy
copy-1_Ep.P65 5/16/01, 3:17 PM9
10
When originals are placed in the document feeder tray, a
sort icon will appear on the touch panel and the sort
copy mode will be automatically selected. In this case,
copies will be delivered as shown in the upper illustration
to the left. For output in the group mode as shown in the
lower left illustration, the group mode must be selected
on the output setting screen.
7
Select the desired output mode (see below).
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
The sort mode is the default
mode. To select the group
mode, touch the [OUTPUT]
key, then touch the
[GROUP] key on the output
setting screen, and then
touch the [OK] key on the
setting screen.
8
Use the numeric keys to set the desired number
of copies.
Up to 999 can be set.
Use the [C] (clear) key to
cancel an entry if a mistake
has been made.
9
Press the [START] key.
If the [C] key is pressed
while originals are being
scanned, scanning will
stop. If copying had already
started, copying and
scanning will stop after the
original in progress is
output to the original exit
area. In these cases the
copy quantity will be reset
to “0”. If scanning has been
completed but copying is
still in progress, copying will
continue.
NOTE
The 1-sided to 1-sided copying mode is set as the default
in the initial settings. This setting can be changed by a key
operator program (initial status setting ).
NORMAL COPYING
Five sets of copiesOriginals
Five copies of each original
Originals
Output modes (sort mode and group mode)
[Example] Five sets of copies from three originals
● Sort copy
● Group copy
copy-1_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1710
11
Automatic two-sided copying from the automatic document
feeder
A duplex module must be installed for automatic 1-sided to 2-sided or 2-sided to 2-sided copying. A duplex module is
not needed for 2-sided to 1-sided copying.
1. Automatic two-sided copying from one-sided
originals
2. Automatic two-sided copying from two-sided
originals
3. Automatic one-sided copying from two-sided
originals
1
Place the originals in the document feeder tray.
(page 7)
2
Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
3
Select the desired duplex copy mode.
BIN
CH
The illustration to the left
shows the screen
displayed when a duplex
module is installed.
Original
Copy
NORMAL COPYING
4
Touch the [OK] key.
BINDING
CHANGE
OK
Follow step 6 on page 9 to step 9 on page 10.
The image to be copied onto the second side of 2-sided
copies can be inverted so that the resultant 2-sided copies
are in the correct orientation for binding at the top. For top
binding, touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key on the 2-sided
copy selection screen.
copy-1_Ep.P65 5/16/01, 3:18 PM11
12
Copying from the document glass
When copying originals which cannot be fed from the automatic document feeder such as thick originals, open the
document cover and copy the originals from the document glass
■■
■■
■ 1-sided copies of 1-sided originals
1
Set an original on the document glass. (page 7)
Original size detector
●
Set an original by aligning its corner with the tip of the
scale (
) mark at the left rear corner of the glass as shown
in the illustrations.
2
Ensure that the 1-sided to 1-sided copy mode is
selected.
ORIGINAL
8
1
2
/
11
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
11 17
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
R
1.
2.
3.
4.
The one-sided to one-
sided mode is selected
when no icon for a two-
sided mode appears in the
dashed area on the display.
If the 1-sided to 1-sided
copy mode is already
selected, steps 3 to 5 are
not needed.
3
Ensure that paper of the same size as the original
is automatically selected. (✼Note)
COPY RATIO
AUTO
PAPER SELECT
100%
8
1
2
/
11
X
The selected tray will be
highlighted or the message
“LOAD xxxxxx PAPER.” will
appear. If the message
appears, load paper in a
paper tray or the bypass tray
with paper of the required
size. Even if the message
above is displayed,
copying can be performed
onto the currently selected
paper.
(✼Note) The following conditions must be satisfied.
●
Originals of a standard size (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2"
x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A3, B4, A4, A4R or A5)
are set and the auto paper select function is enabled.
TRANSPA
8
1
2
/
11
X
8
1
2
/
11
X
11 17
x
1.
2.
3.
PLAIN
PLAIN
If originals of a size other
than the sizes above are to
be copied, manually select
the desired paper size.
Original Copy
NORMAL COPYING
or B4
Original scale
mark
Original scale
mark
8
1
2
/
x
11 or A4
8
1
2
/
x
11R or A4R
8
1
2
/
x
14
11x17 or A3
or B4
5
1
2
/
8
1
2
/
x
or A5
copy-1_Ep.P65 5/16/01, 3:19 PM12
13
4
Select the desired output mode (see below).
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
When a document is
detected on the document
glass, the group mode will
be automatically selected.
To select sort copy, touch
the [OUTPUT] key, then
touch the [SORT] key on the
displayed screen, and then
touch the [OK] key.
NOTE
If you touch the [SORT] or [GROUP] key, its corresponding
icon will appear on the touch panel. To change the
selection, touch the icon to return the display to the output
setting screen.
5
Use the numeric keys to set the desired number
of copies.
Up to 999 can be set.
Use the [C] (clear) key to
cancel an entry if a mistake
has been made.
NORMAL COPYING
When originals are placed in the document feeder tray, a
sort icon will appear on the touch panel and the sort
copy mode will be automatically selected. In this case,
copies will be delivered as shown in the upper illustration
to the left. For output in the group mode as shown in the
lower left illustration, the group mode must be selected
on the output setting screen.
Output mode (sort copy and group copy)
[Example] Five sets of copies from three originals
●●
●●
●
Sort copy
Five sets of copiesOriginals
6
Press the [START] key.
Replace the original with
the next original and press
the [START] key. Repeat
this operation until all
originals have been
scanned.
If sort was selected in step
4, go to the next step.
7
Touch the [READ-END] key.
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].
READ-END
●●
●●
●
Group copy
Five copies of each original
Originals
copy-1_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1713
14
Automatic two-sided copying from the document glass
A duplex module must be installed for automatic 1-sided to 2-sided or 2-sided to 2-sided copying. A duplex module is
not needed for 2-sided to 1-sided copying.
1
Place an original on the document glass.
(page 7)
2
Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
3
Touch the [1-sided to 2-sided copy] key.
Original Copy
NORMAL COPYING
The image to be copied onto the second side of 2-sided
copies can be inverted so that the resultant 2-sided copies
are in the correct orientation for binding at the top. For top
binding, touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key on the 2-sided
copy selection screen.
4
Touch the [OK] key.
BINDING
CHANGE
OK
Follow step 3 on page 12 to step 7 on page 13.
copy-1_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1714
15
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENTS
Select the exposure mode to be consistent with the type of originals to be copied. The selections are AUTO, TEXT,
TEXT/PHOTO and PHOTO.
■■
■■
■ Automatic exposure adjustment
0
AUTO
EXPOSURE
The automatic exposure
mode is the default initial
setting for this machine. In
this mode, the
characteristics of an
original being copied are
“read” by the exposure
system, and exposure
adjustments are made
automatically. To select an
exposure mode more
suitable for originals to be
copied or to adjust the
exposure manually, follow
the procedure below.
■■
■■
■ Exposure mode selection and manual
exposure adjustment
1
Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.
8
1
/
11
X
AUTO
0
AUTO
EXPOSURE
2
Select [TEXT], [TEXT/PHOTO] or [PHOTO] based
on the original to be copied.
PHOTO
TEXT
TEXT
/
PHOTO
NOTE
Exposure mode selection
TEXT: This mode is useful for producing dark
text copies with minimum background.
TEXT/PHOTO: This provides the best balance for copying
an original which contains both text and
photos. This mode is also useful for
copying printed photographs.
PHOTO: This mode provides the best copies of
photographs with fine details.
3
Adjust the exposure level.
1
3
5
Touch the key to make
darker copies. Touch the
key to make lighter
copies.
NOTE
Exposure levels in the text mode
1 to 2: Dark originals such as newspaper
3: Normal density originals
4 to 5: Originals written with pencils or light color
characters
After adjusting the exposure, follow any of the copying
procedures.
To return to the automatic exposure mode, touch the
[EXPOSURE] key and select [AUTO]. The automatic
exposure level can be adjusted using a key operator
program. (page 33)
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1715
16
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
Reduction and enlargement ratios can be selected either automatically or manually as described in this section.
●
Automatic selection will enlarge or reduce images based upon the original size and copy paper size to give the best
possible fit of the image to the copy paper.
●
Manual selections can be made in the range of 25% to 400%. There are three preset reduction ratios (25%, 64% and
77%) and three preset enlargement ratios (121%, 129% and 400%) available for the inch system. There are four
preset reduction ratios (25%, 70%, 81%, 86%) and four preset enlargement ratios (115%, 122%, 141%, 400%)
available for the AB system.
Automatic selection (auto image)
The reduction or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically based on the original size and the selected pape
size
1
Place the original in the document feeder tray
or on the document glass. (page 7)
The detected original size will be displayed.
Automatic selection can be used only for 11" x 17", 8-
1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
size originals and copy paper in the inch system and
A3, B4, A4, A4R or A5 in the AB system.
2
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then select
the desired paper size.
TRANSPA
8
1
2
/
11
X
8
1
2
/
11
X
11 17
x
1.
2.
3.
PLAIN
PLAIN
When the desired paper
size key is touched, the
paper size will be
highlighted and the paper
size setting window will be
closed.
If paper of the desired size
is not loaded in any tray,
load paper of the required
size in a paper tray and
enter the paper size.
3
Touch the [AUTO IMAGE] key.
8
2
1
AUTO
COPY RATIO
PAPER SELEC
AUTO
IMAGE
The [AUTO IMAGE] key will
be highlighted and the best
reduction or enlargement
ratio for the original size
and the selected paper
size will be selected and
displayed in the copy ratio
display.
NOTE
If the message “ROTATE ORIGINAL FROM
TO ” is
displayed, change the orientation of the original as
indicated in the message. When the message above is
displayed, copying can be done without changing the
orientation, but the image will not fit the paper correctly.
4
Make all other desired settings such as exposure
or the number of copies, and press the [START]
key.
When copying from the
document glass in the sort
mode, touch the [READ-
END] key after all originals
have been scanned. (step
7 on page 13)
To cancel the auto image mode, touch the [AUTO IMAGE]
key again to clear the highlighted display.
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1716
17
Manual selection
1
Place the original in the document feeder tray
or on the document glass. (page 7)
NOTE
When the document feeder is being used, the available
copy ratio range is 25% to 200%.
2
Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.
100%
COPY RATIO
The preset copy ratio keys
for reduction and
enlargement, the keys for
[ZOOM] and the [100%] key
will be displayed.
3
Select the desired copy ratio by touching a fixed
copy ratio key for reduction or enlargement and
touch the [OK] key. Use the and keys to
make fine adjustments as needed.
OK
AUT
IMAG
10400
%
25
%
121
%
129
%
64
%
77
%
100
ZOOM
%
11 17
x
11 17
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
8
1
2
/
14
x
11 17
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
11 17
x
8
1
2
/
14
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
8
1
2
/
14
x
8
1
2
/
11
x
5
1
2
/
8
1
2
/
x
5
1
2
/
8
1
2
/
x
If the message “IMAGE IS
LARGER THAN THE COPY
PAPER.” appears, image
loss will occur. In this case
either continue with image
loss or change the copy
paper size or copy ratio.
4
Ensure that the desired paper size has been
automatically selected based on the selected
copy ratio or select another size as needed.
P PER SELECT
COPY RATIO
77%
If another size paper is
selected, the auto paper
select display will be
cleared.
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
5
Make all other desired settings such as exposure
or the number of copies and press the [START]
key.
When copying from the
document glass in the sort
mode, touch the [READ-
END] key after all originals
have been scanned. (step
7 on page 13)
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1717
18
SPECIAL PAPERS
If a bypass tray and a duplex module, a duplex module/bypass tray or a multi purpose drawer*
1
is installed, special
papers can be fed. These include transparency film, postcards, labels, envelopes*
2
, and plain paper.
*1 The upper tray of a stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer or a stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer is equivalent to
the multi purpose drawer.
*2 Envelopes can be set in the multi purpose drawer and in the upper tray of a stand/paper drawer.
1
Place the original in the document feeder tray
or on the document glass. (page 7)
2
Load the special paper in the bypass tray or in
the multi purpose drawer.
For the paper loading instructions see “Loading paper
in the bypass tray” (page 5-3) of the “Operation manual
(for printer operation and general information)” or
“Loading paper in the multi purpose drawer” (page
1-21) of the “Operation manual (for printer operation
and general information)”.
3
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then select
the bypass tray or the multi purpose drawer.
1.
2.
3.
4
COLOR
BYPASS
4
Make all other desired settings such as exposure
or the number of copies, and press the [START]
key.
When copying from the
document glass in the sort
mode, touch the [READ-
END] key after all originals
have been scanned. (step
7 on page 13)
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1718
19
SPECIAL MODE
When the [SPECIAL MODES] key on the basic screen of the copy mode is touched, the special modes screen
containing six special function touch keys will appear. These functions are shown below.
Common operation procedure for using the special functions
1
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
2
Touch the key for the desired special mode.
MARGIN SHIFT
PAMPHLET COPY
Example:
To set the margin shift
function:
Setting procedures for modes requiring setting
screens start on the next page. The dual page
copy and job build functions do not require setting
screens.
MARGIN SHIFT
SPECIAL MODES
PAMPHLET COPY
ERASE
JOB BUILD
MULTI SHOT
DUAL PAGE
COPY
OK
Margin shift: page 20
Erase: page 21
Dual page copy: page 22
Pamphlet copy: page 23
Job build: page 24
Multi shot: page 25
When using the multi shot function, set the original,
select the desired paper, and select one-sided or
two-sided copying before selecting the multi shot
function on the special modes screen.
[OK] key on the special modes screen
Touch the [OK] key, to return to the basic screen of
the copy mode.
copy-2_Ep.P65 4/26/01, 11:17 AM19
20
Margin shift
The margin shift function will automatically shift the text or image on the copy paper approximately 1/2" (10 mm) in its
initial setting.
●
The shift direction can be selected from right or left
shift as shown in the illustration.
1
Touch the [MARGIN SHIFT] key on the SPECIAL
MODES screen.
MARGIN SHIFT
PAMPHLET COPY
The margin shift setting
screen will appear.
2
Select the shift direction.
RIGHT LEFT
Touch a shift direction key
to select right or left. The
selected key will be
highlighted.
Two-sided copying
Original
One-sided copying
Image shifted
to the right
Image shifted
to the left
Original
Image shifted
to the right
Image shifted
to the left
Margin
Margin
or
Margin
Margin
3
Set the shift amount as needed and touch the
[OK] key.
inch
1
/
2
(0 1)
SIDE 2
OK
OK
CANCEL
SIDE 1
inch
3
/
8
(0 1)
Use the key and the
keys to set the shift amount.
The shift amount can be
set from 0" to 1" in 1/8"
increments ( 0 mm to 20 mm
in 1 mm increments for the
AB system). If a duplex
module is not installed, the
shift amount setting for the
reverse side is not
displayed.
4
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes screen.
After adjusting the exposure, follow any of the
copying procedures.
To cancel the margin shift function, touch the [CANCEL]
key on the margin shift setting screen.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1720
21
Erase
The erase function is used to erase the shadow lines on copies produced when copying thick originals or books. The
erase modes that can be selected are shown below. The erase width is approximately 1/2" (10 mm) in it’s initial setting.
Edge erase
Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of copies
caused when thick paper or a book is used as an original.
Center erase
Eliminates shadow lines produced by the bindings of
bound documents.
Edge + center erase
Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of copies and
eliminates the shadow at the center of copies.
1
Touch the [ERASE] key on the SPECIAL MODES
screen.
JOB BUILD
ERASE
The erase setting screen
will appear.
2
Select the desired erase mode.
ERASE
EDGE
ERASE
CENTER
ERASE
EDGE+CENTER
ERASE
Select one of the three
erase modes. The selected
key will be highlighted.
3
Adjust the amount of erase and touch the [OK]
key.
inch
1/2
(0 1)
EDGE
CANCEL OK
Use the and keys to
adjust the erase width and
then touch the [OK] key.
Original
Copy
4
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes screen.
After adjusting the exposure, follow any of the
copying procedures.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
To cancel the erase function, touch the [CANCEL] key on
the erase setting screen.
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1721
22
Dual page copy
The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two documents placed side by side on the document glass.
It is especially useful when copying books and other bound documents.
[Example] Copying right and left pages of a book
●
The dual page copy function can be used with reduction
copying but cannot be used with enlargement copying.
●
The dual page copy function can be done only from
the document glass. The automatic document feeder
cannot be used with this function.
●
Only 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 paper can be used.
1
Touch the [DUAL PAGE COPY] key on the
SPECIAL MODES screen.
MULTI SHOT
DUAL PAGE
COPY
The [DUAL PAGE COPY]
key will be highlighted.
2
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes screen.
OK
DUAL PAGE
COPY
3
Place the originals on the document glass.
Center line of
original
Index
This page
is copied
first.
8
1
2
/
x
11 or A4
Dual page copy
Book original
When copying book originals:
When copying a thick book, press down lightly on
the document cover.
4
Ensure that 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size paper is
selected.
COPY RATIO
PAPER SELECT
AUTO
100%
8
1
2
/
11
x
If 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size
paper is not selected, touch
the [PAPER SELECT] key
to select 8-1/2" x 11" or A4
size paper.
After adjusting the exposure, follow any of the
copying procedures. When copying onto two sides
of paper, follow steps 2 to 4 on page 14 and then
follow steps 4 to 7 on page 13.
When copying onto one side of paper, follow steps 4
to 7 on page 13.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
To cancel the dual page copy function, touch the [DUAL
PAGE COPY] key on the special modes screen (step 1).
(The highlighted display will be canceled.)
NOTE
To erase shadows caused by document binding, use the
edge erase function (page 21).
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1822
23
Pamphlet copy
The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange copies in proper order for eventual center-stapling and folding into a
booklet. Two original pages are copied onto each side of copy paper. Four pages are, therefore, copied onto one sheet.
[Example] Copying eight originals in the pamphlet copy mode
1
Touch the [PAMPHLET COPY] key on the
SPECIAL MODES screen.
PAMPHLET COPY
The pamphlet copy setting
screen will appear.
2
Designate the type of originals to be copied: 1-
sided or 2-sided.
ORIGINAL
1-SIDED 2-SIDED
3
Select the binding position (left binding or right
binding) and touch the [OK] key.
RIGHT
BINDING
CANCEL
LEFT
BINDING
OK
4
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes screen.
5
Copy from the first page to the last page from
either the document feeder or the document
glass.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
First page
First page
Originals (one-sided)
Originals (two-sided)
Left binding
For left to
right turning
Right binding
For right to
left turning
Finished copies are
folded in two.
6
Ensure that the desired paper size has been
automatically selected based on the original size.
COPY RATIO
PAPER SELECT
AUTO
100%
1711
X
To select another size
paper, select the desired
size and touch the [AUTO
IMAGE] key. The
appropriate copy ratio will
be selected automatically
based on the original size
and the paper size. (See
steps 2 and 3 on page 16.)
7
Make all other desired settings such as exposure
or the number of copies, and press the [START]
key.
8
[When using the automatic document feeder:]
Copying will start after all originals have been scanned.
(The next step is not needed.)
[When using the document glass:]
Replace the original with the next original and press
the [START] key. Repeat this operation until all originals
have been scanned.
9
Touch the [READ-END] key. (only if the document
glass is used)
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].
READ-END
When the pamphlet copy function is set, the two-
sided copying mode will be automatically selected
and cannot be changed.
To cancel the pamphlet copy function, touch the [CANCEL]
key on the pamphlet copy setting screen.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
●
Scan the originals from the first page to the last page.
The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by
the machine.
●
Either left binding (right to left turning) or right binding
(left to right turning) can be selected.
●
Four originals will be copied onto one sheet. Blank
pages may be automatically produced at the end
depending on the number of the originals.
●
When using this function, a duplex module must be
installed.
●
If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, copies can be
stapled in two positions along the center of copies
and folded at the center.
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1823
24
Job build
The number of originals that can be copied into a set of copies in a single run is limited by the capacity of the memory
available*
1
for scanned originals. Normally the number of originals is further limited by the number of originals that can
be set into the document feeder tray*
2
.
The job build function allows scanning and copying of up to 100 originals. For scanning more than 50 originals, the
originals must be separated into sections not exceeding 50 originals, scanned in sections and stored in memory. After
all sections are in memory, they can be copied as a continuous set .
*1 The number of originals that can be copied into a set of copies in a single run is limited by the capacity of the
memory available for scanned originals.
*2 Up to 50 sheets (30 sheets for 8-1/2" x 14" or larger) can be set into the document feeder tray at one time.
[Example] Copying 100 pages of 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 originals
1
Touch the [JOB BUILD] key on the SPECIAL
MODES screen.
JOB BUILD
The [JOB BUILD] key will be
highlighted.
2
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes screen
while JOB BUILD is highlighted.
OK
ERASE
JOB BUILD
DUAL PAGE
COPY
MULTI SHOT
3
Place the first section originals in the document
feeder tray. (page 7)
Originals
Page 1
50 sheets
Page 51
50 sheets
Divide the originals in sections of 50 sheets and scan
the originals starting from the first page of section A and
then scan section B. Be sure to keep the correct page
order when setting section B.
✽
4
Make all other desired settings such as the
number of copies, and press the [START] key.
Scanning of originals will
start. After scanning of the
first section of originals (“A
in the example above) is
completed, remove the
scanned originals, place
the next section of originals
(section B in the example)
and press the [START] key.
Repeat this operation until
all blocks of originals have
been scanned.
5
Touch the [READ-END] key after the last section
of originals has been scanned.
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].
READ-END
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
To cancel the job build function, touch the [JOB BUILD]
key on the special modes screen as in step 1. The
highlighted display will be canceled.
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1824
25
Multi shot
The multi shot function is used to copy up to four originals, collectively in a specified order, per sheet of copy paper in
any one of four layout patterns.
[Example] Copying seven originals using the 4 in 1 MULTI SHOT selection in a layout pattern starting from the upper
left to lower right.
●
When using the multi shot function, place the originals,
select the desired paper size, and select the copying
mode (page 9) before selecting the multi shot function
on the special modes screen.
●
When using the multi shot function, the appropriate
copy ratio will be automatically set based on the original
size, paper size, and the number of originals to be
copied onto one sheet. The minimum reduction ratio
is 25%. Depending on the original size, paper size,
and the number of originals to be copied onto one
sheet, the appropriate copy ratio may be smaller than
25%. In this case, portions of original images may not
be copied.
1
Touch the [MULTI SHOT] key on the SPECIAL
MODES screen.
MULTI SHOT
The multi shot setting
screen will appear.
2
Select the number of originals to be copied onto
one sheet of copy paper on the multi shot
selection screen.
2in1 4in1
The orientation of copy
paper and the image of the
originals may be rotated as
needed.
3
Select the layout.
LAYOUT
Select the order in which
the originals will be
arranged on the copy.
Copies
One-sided copies from
one-sided originals
One-sided copies from
two-sided originals
4
[When using the automatic document feeder:]
Copying will start after all originals have been scanned.
(The next step is not needed.)
[When using the document glass:]
Replace the original with the next original and press
the [START] key. Repeat this operation until all originals
have been scanned.
5
If scanning is being done from the document
glass, touch the [READ-END] key after the last
original has been scanned to start copying.
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].
READ-END
To cancel the multi shot function, touch the [CANCEL] key
on the multi shot setting screen.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1825
26
JOB PROGRAM MEMORY
Frequently used job programs can be stored in each of ten storage registers. This is convenient for quick job recall
without losing time manually reprogramming each aspect of a job.
●
Selection for functions stored as part of a job program, will not be recalled as part of the program if the function has
been disabled or changed by a key operator program.
●
To exit the job memory mode, press the [CA] (clear all) key on the operation panel or touch the [EXIT] key on the
touch panel.
Storing a job program
1
Press the [#/P] key on the operation panel to
display the [STORE/DELETE] selection screen.
2
Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key to obtain the
storage register screen.
5
1
RECALL
M NUMBER.
STORE
/
DELETE
234
789
3
Touch a number key from 1 to 10 on the storage
register screen.
1
6
RECALL
ESS PROGRAM NUMBER.
PROGRAMS
STORE
/
234
789
Highlighted storage
register numbers are
registers which already
have programs stored. If a
highlighted number is
selected, a screen will
appear with selections for
deleting the selected
program, storing (replacing
the selected program with
a new one) or canceling to
go back to the STORE/
DELETE screen to select a
different storage register.
4
Make all copier selections to be stored.
TO STORE, MAKE SELECTIONS AND PRESS [OK],
TO DELETE, PRESS [CANCEL].
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
8
1
2
/
11
X
8
1
2
/
11
X
8
1
2
/
11
X
11 17
x
8
1
2
/
11 R
X
1.
2.
3.
4.
The number of copies
cannot be stored.
5
Touch the [OK] key.
EXPOSURE
AUTO
AUTO
100%
OK
8
1
2
/
11
X
11
X
8
1
2
/
11
X
8
1
2
/
11
X
11 17
x
8
1
2
/
11 R
X
1.
2.
3.
4.
D PRESS [OK].
PAPER SELECT
COPY RATIO
CANCEL
The selected settings will
be stored under the register
number selected in step 3.
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1826
27
Recalling a job program
Deleting a stored job program
JOB PROGRAM MEMORY
1
Press the [#/P] key.
2
Touch the desired storage register number key
to recall the job from memory.
1
6
2
7
3
8
RECALL
PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER.
JOB PROGRAMS
When a number key is
touched, the selection
screen will be closed and
the stored job program will
be recalled. A number for
which no job program has
been stored cannot be
selected.
3
Set the number of copies as needed and press
the [START] key.
Copying will start with the
settings of the recalled job
program.
1
Follow steps 1 and 2 in “Storing a job program”
on the previous page.
2
Select a storage register number of the program
to be deleted.
5
10
3
8
4
9
EXIT
STORE
/
DELETE
If a number key for which
no job program has been
stored is selected, the
screen will change to the
screen of step 4 on the
previous page (for storing
a program). The message
“TO STORE, SELECT AND
PRESS [OK]. TO DELETE,
PRESS [CANCEL].” will
appear. When [CANCEL] is
pressed, the screen will
return to the selection
screen shown to the left.
3
Touch the [DELETE] key.
REC LL
STORE
/
DELETE
A JOB PROGRAM HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED.
STORE ANOTHER PROGRAM?
CANCEL DELETE STORE
When the [DELETE] key is
touched, the screen in step
2 will return and the
program will be deleted. If
the [CANCEL] key is
touched, the screen in step
2 will return but the program
will not be deleted. If no
other programs are to be
deleted, touch the [EXIT]
key on the screen displayed
in step 2 to exit the job
program mode.
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1827
28
INTERRUPTING A PRINT OR COPY RUN
INTERRUPT can be used to temporarily stop a long print or copy job so that another copy job can be run. Only copy
jobs can be run during interrupt.
1
Place the original in the document feeder tray
or on the document glass. (page 7)
2
Touch the [INTERRUPT] key.
ORIGINAL
8
1
2
/
11
X
AUTO
0
AUTO
100
%
8
1
2
/
11
X
INTERRUPT
EXPOSURE
PAPER SELECT
When it is possible to interrupt
a print or copy job in progress,
the [INTERRUPT] key will
appear as shown in the
illustration.
CANCEL
0
AUTO
TO
100
%
8
1
2
/
11
X
EXPOSURE
PER SELECT
ORIGINAL
8
1
2
/
11
X
When the [INTERRUPT]
key is touched in step 2, the
[INTERRUPT] touch key will
be replaced by the
[CANCEL] key as shown in
the illustration. To cancel
interrupt copying at any
time, touch the [CANCEL]
key.
3
Make all other desired settings such as
exposure, paper size and number of copies and
then press the [START] key.
■ When step 3 is completed, a copy job icon will appear
at the top of the job icon queue at the left side of the
screen and interrupt copying will start. After the
interrupt job is completed, the interrupted job will
automatically resume.
29
MISFEED REMOVAL
Misfeed in scanner module
When an original has misfed in the scanner module, remove the misfed original following the procedure below.
NOTES
●
For misfeed removal in the main unit and other peripheral devices, see the “Operation manual (for printer operation and
general information)”.
●
If you press the [INFORMATION] key, detailed information for misfeed removal will be displayed on the touch panel.
1
Open the document feeding area cover and
remove any misfed originals.
Document feeding area
cover
2
Close the document feeding area cover.
Close the cover securely so
that cover clicks into place.
3
Open the document cover and turn the green
rotating knob in the direction of the arrow to
remove any misfed originals.
4
Close the document cover.
■ A message may appear indicating the number of
originals which must be returned to the document
feeder tray. Return the originals to the document feeder
tray and press the [START] key.
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1829
30
TROUBLESHOOTING
Whenever the machine stops or operation is not possible, check the operation panel display for messages. In most
cases, these messages will give sufficient information to return the machine to an operating condition. In cases where
this information is not enough, check the list below for more information. This section describes problems concerning
copier features. For troubleshooting specific problems related to printer, facsimile, or network scanner features, see the
separate manuals provided for them. For problems related to other peripheral devices, see chapter 5 of the “Operation
manual (for printer operation and general information)”.
Problem
Machine does not
operate.
Copies are too
dark or too light.
Smudges appear
on copies.
Image cannot be
rotated.
Part of original
image is not
copied.
Blank copies
Order of copies
incorrect
Job cancelation
needed
Scanning of
originals is
incomplete.
●
Is the START key indicator off?
●
Is the original image too dark or too
light?
●
Is the exposure mode set to AUTO?
●
Is the exposure mode set to PHOTO?
●
Document glass or document
transport area dirty?
●
Black stripes on copies when the
document feeder is used?
●
Original smudged or blotchy?
●
Is the auto paper select or auto
image function set?
●
Is the original positioned correctly?
●
Is the copy ratio proper for the original
and paper sizes?
●
Is the original placed face down?
●
Is the order of originals correct?
●
Is a message requesting cancelation
of job displayed?
●
Is a message indicating memory is
full displayed?
Check Solution or cause
If the indicator is not on, the machine may be
warming up. Warm-up should be completed in
approximately 80 seconds.
Adjust the exposure in the manual mode. (See page
15.)
The exposure level in the AUTO mode can be
adjusted using a key operator program. Contact your
key operator. (See page 33.)
Cancel the PHOTO exposure mode. (See page 15.)
Clean regularly. (See page 4-12 of the “Operation
manual (for printer operation and general
information)”.)
Clean the original scanning window. (See page 4-12
of the “Operation manual (for printer operation and
general information)”.)
Use a clean original.
Rotation copy functions only if the machine is either
in the auto paper select mode or in the auto image
mode. (See pages 8 and 16.)
Set the original properly. (page 7)
Use the auto image function to select the
appropriate copy ratio based on the original and
copy sizes. (See page 16.)
Place the original face down in the document feeder
tray or on the document glass. (See page 7.)
When using the document glass, set the originals
from the first page one sheet at a time.
When using the automatic document feeder, set
the originals with the first page down.
Press the [CA] (clear all) key to cancel the current
job.
If the data amount exceeds the limit when using
the pamphlet copy or multi shot copy which requires
scanning of all originals, scanning will be canceled
and copying will not be performed. If you install a
hard disk drive, the storage capacity will increase.
31
SPECIFICATIONS
Copier
Resolution Scan: 600 dpi or 300 dpi, output: 600 dpi
Gradation Scan: 256 levels, output: 2 levels
Originals Sheets, bound documents
Maximum size: 11" x 17" or A3
Copy sizes Max. 11" x 17" or A3, min. 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" or A5
Image loss: Max 21/64" or 8 mm (leading edge and trailing edge in total), max. 21/
64" or 8 mm (along all other edges in total)
Warm-up time Approx. 80 seconds
First-copy time* 35 copy/min. type: 5.3 seconds
45 copy/min. type: 4.6 seconds
*Paper is fed from paper tray 1, quick scan from document glass (page 33) is set,
the original scanning resolution on the document glass is set to 600 x 300 dpi
and no optional hard disk drive is installed.
Copy ratio Variable: 25 to 400% in 1% increments, total 376 steps
Fixed presets: 25%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, and 400% for inch system,
25%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%, and 400% for AB system
Continuous copy 999 copies; subtractive counter
Scanner module
Name B/W scanner module/DSPF
Type Two-side simultaneous scanning system from the document feeder.
One-sided scanning from the document glass
Original feed system Automatic continuous feeding
Original exit system Face down output
Original transport system DSPF: sheet through type (reference position: center), document glass: reference
position is left rear
Original setting direction Face down
Original sizes 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17" or A5 to A3
Original weight 14 to 34 lbs. or 50 to 128 g/m
2
Capacity Up to 50 sheets (30 sheets*
1
for 8-1/2" x 14" or B4 or larger originals) provided the
total aggregate thickness does not exceed 1/4" or 6.5 mm (14 to 20 lbs. or 50 to 80
g/m
2
) or 3/16" or 5 mm (21 to 34 lbs. or 80 to 128 g/m
2
)
Power supply Drawn from the main unit
Dimensions 31-13/16" (W) x 24-3/8" (D) x 7-3/32" (H) or
808 mm (W) x 619 mm (D) x 180 mm (H)
Weight Approx. 43 lbs. or 19.5 kg
*1 For paper heavier than 28 lbs. (105 g/m
2
), only a stack of up to 15 sheets can be set. If 16 or more sheets are set,
image can not be scanned properly and scanned image can be expanded compared with original itself.
Copying speed 45 copy/min. type
11" x 17" or A3 20 copies/min.
8-1/2" x 14" or B4 22 copies/min.
8-1/2" x 11" or A4 45 copies/min.
8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R 30 copies/min
Copying speed 35 copy/min. type
11" x 17" or A3 17 copies/min.
8-1/2" x 14" or B4 20 copies/min.
8-1/2" x 11" or A4 35 copies/min.
8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R 25 copies/min.
32
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
This section describes all key operator programs relating only to the copier and facsimile functions. For the key
operator programs which relate to copier, printer and facsimile functions, see the separate Key Operator’s Guide.
Program name Page
Copy function settings
Initial status settings 33
Exposure adjustment 33
Rotation copy setting 33
Auto paper selection setting 33
600dpi x 600dpi scanning mode 33
Quick scan from document glass 33
Device control
Original size detector setting 34
Disabling of document feeder 34
Using the key operator programs
To use of the key operator programs, follow the procedures described in the Key Operator’s Guide on page 6. Also read
“Supplementary explanation of key operation for key operator programs” on page 6.
Key operator program list
33
Setting programs
This section describes the setting of programs common
to copier, facsimile and network scanning features. For
programs dedicated to facsimile, network scanning and
programs common to both the copier and printer features,
see their respective manuals.
Copy function settings
The following programs can be set in “Copy function
settings”.
●
Initial status settings
●
Exposure adjustment
●
Rotation copy setting
●
Auto paper selection setting
●
600dpi x 600dpi scanning mode
●
Quick scan from document glass
Initial status settings
The copier settings will be reset when the main switch
is turned off, when the [CA] key is pressed or when
the auto clear interval has elapsed. Use this program
to establish new initial settings or to return the initial
settings to the factory default settings. Paper tray,
exposure mode, copy ratio, duplex mode, and output
mode default settings can be made.
NOTE
If a duplex mode other than 1-sided to 1-sided is set as
the default and either the duplex or scanner mode is
disabled*, the default will change to the 1-sided to 1-sided
mode.
* Disable duplex unit (page 10 of the Key Operator’s Guide)
* Disabling of document feeder (page 34)
Exposure adjustment
Use this program to lighten or darken copies in the
automatic exposure mode. The factory setting is “5”.
“1” indicates lighter density and “9” indicates darker
density on the touch panel.
Rotation copy setting
If this program is set, the image of originals will rotate
when the orientation of the originals does not match
that of the copy paper.
(Rotation copy will function only if the auto paper
select or auto image mode has been selected.)
NOTE
For copying from 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 or A5 size originals onto 5-
1/2 x 8-1/2R or A5R paper, this program must be set.
Auto paper selection setting
Use this program to set the paper type* for the auto
paper select mode to “Plain paper” or “Plain paper
and recycle paper”.
* Paper type specified in Tray setting of the custom
setting function (page 1-20 of “Operation manual
(for printer operation and general information)”)
600dpi x 600dpi scanning mode
Use this program to change the original scanning
resolution of the automatic document feeder from
600 x 300 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi.
If this mode is set, the copy quality for fine
characters and fine lines will be improved but the
original scanning speed will be slower.
NOTE
If the original scanning speed is more important than higher
resolution, do not set this program.
Quick scan from document glass
Use this program to change the original scanning
resolution on the document glass from 600 x 600dpi
to 600 x 300 dpi.
If you set this program, the first copy time will be
shorter but the copy image will become a little more
coarse.
NOTE
If the copy image quality is more important than first copy
time, do not set this program.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1833
34
Device control
Original size detection and disabling of the document
feeder can be set.
Original size detector setting
This program is used to select the group of original
sizes to be detected. Original size detection from
the document glass can be disabled using the
program CANCEL DETECTION AT DOCUMENT
GLASS.
If CANCEL DETECTION AT DOCUMENT GLASS
is set, originals will be regarded as EXTRA for all
copier functions and no original size will be displayed.
Disabling of document feeder
This program is used to prevent use of the automatic
document feeder when the scanner module
malfunctions. In this case scanning can still be done
off the document glass.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Detectable original sizes
Group
Document feeder tray (for automatic document feeding)
Document glass
11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14,
1 INCH - 1 8-1/2 x 11, 8-1/2 x 11R, A4
5-1/2 x 8-1/2
11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 13,
2 INCH - 2 8-1/2 x 11,8-1/2 x 11R, A4
5-1/2 x 8-1/2
3 AB - 1 A3, A4, A4R, A5, 8-1/2 x 11,
B4, B5, B5R 216 x 330
4 AB - 2 A3, A4, A4R, A5, 8-1/2 x 11,
B5, B5R, 216 x 330 B4
copy-2_Ep.P65 2/04/01, 19:1834
cover4.p65 2/04/01, 19:181
2001D KS1
TINSE2077FCZZ
Operation manual for copier
PRINTED IN CHINA
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-2135.
SHARP CORPORATION
P350,P450,3500,3501
3551,4500,4501,4551
cover4.p65 2/04/01, 19:182
LASER PRINTER
Operation Manual
(for network scanner)
Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to gain
the maximum benefit from the product.
Before installing this product, be sure to read the installation
requirements and cautions sections of the "Operation manual
for printer operation and general information".
Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference
including this manual, the "Operation manual for printer
operation and general information" and operation manuals for
any optional equipment which has been installed.
1
INTRODUCTION
The optional Network Scanner Expansion Kit (AR-NS2) enables the machine to be used as a network scanner. Page
2 of the manual that accompanies the Network Scanner Expansion Kit (AR-NS2) contains an overview of the network
scanner functions, general considerations, and an explanation of image sending methods. Please read the manual
that accompanies the AR-NS2 before you read this manual. Both manuals explain only the network scanner functions
of the product. For information on loading paper, replacing toner cartridges, clearing paper misfeeds, handling peripheral
units, and other printer-related information, please refer to your "Operation manual (for printer operation and general
information)".
Additional manuals have been provided for copy and facsimile features. Please refer to these as necessary.
To enable the network scanner function of this machine, a product key (password) must be entered using a key
operator program. This is only required once. Use the "Product Key Entry for Network Scanner Expansion Kit" program
to enter the product key. If you do not know your product key, please ask your dealer. (For information on using key
operator programs, refer to "Operation manual (for printer operation and general information)".)
NOTES
• Before using the network scanner feature, several settings must be established from the Web page. These settings are
explained from page 2 on. The settings must be established by the network administrator. Such settings must be effected by
the system administrator who has the special network related backgrounds.
• This manual assumes that several options have been installed.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION...................................................... 1
SETTINGS AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRED
FOR THE NETWORK SCANNER FEATURE ........... 2
●ABOUT THE WEB PAGE.................................... 2
●SETTING PASSWORDS .................................... 2
●
BASIC SETTINGS FOR NETWORK SCANNING
..... 3
●SETTING UP DESTINATION INFORMATION.... 4
●STORING SENDER INFORMATION.................. 5
●STORING A CUSTOM DIRECTORY.................. 5
CONDITION SETTING SCREEN
OF SCANNER MODE .............................................. 6
SENDING AN IMAGE............................................... 8
●BASIC TRANSMISSION METHOD .................... 8
●TRANSMISSION METHODS
FOR SCAN TO E-MAIL (MANUAL
ENTRY, BROADCAST TRANSMISSION) ......... 10
●SCANNING AND TRANSMITTING
A TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL ............................... 11
SCANNING SETTINGS
(ORIGINAL SIZE, RESOLUTION, EXPOSURE
AND FILE FORMAT) .............................................. 12
●
MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE
... 12
●SELECTING THE RESOLUTION..................... 13
●SELECTING THE EXPOSURE ........................ 14
●SELECTING THE FILE FORMAT..................... 15
Page
PRIORITY TRANSMISSION OF A STORED JOB
.... 16
CANCELING AN E-MAIL/FTP TRANSMISSION .... 16
STORING, EDITING, AND CLEARING
FROM THE TOUCH PANEL ................................... 17
●STORING ONE-TOUCH KEYS
(only addresses for Scan to E-mail
and Internet-Fax).............................................. 17
●
EDITING AND DELETING ONE-TOUCH KEYS
..... 19
●PROGRAMMING A GROUP KEY.................... 20
●EDITING AND DELETING GROUP KEYS....... 21
●STORING SENDER INFORMATION................ 22
●EDITING AND DELETING
SENDER INFORMATION................................. 22
●STORING A GROUP INDEX............................ 23
●PRINTING PROGRAMMED INFORMATION ... 23
TROUBLESHOOTING............................................ 24
●IF YOUR E-MAIL IS RETURNED ..................... 24
●IF A TRANSMISSION ERROR OCCURS ........ 24
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS .............................. 25
●KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST.................. 25
●USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS.... 25
●SETTING PROGRAMS.................................... 26
●PRINTING OUT SETTINGS............................. 27
SPECIFICATIONS .................................................. 28
2
SETTINGS AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRED
FOR THE NETWORK SCANNER FEATURE
To use the Network Scanner feature, settings for the E-mail server, DNS server, and destination addresses must be established.
To establish the settings, use a computer that is connected to the same network as the machine to access the
machine's Web page. The Web page can be displayed with your Web browser (Internet Explorer 4.0 or later, or
Netscape Navigator 4.0 or later). To access the Web page, refer to page 2-6 of "Operation manual (for printer operation
and general information)".
ABOUT THE WEB PAGE
When you access the Web page in the machine, the following page will appear in your browser.
A menu frame appears on the left side of the page. When you click an item in the menu, a screen appears in the right
frame that allows you to establish settings for that item.
For overviews of each of the menu items, refer to pages 2-7 to 2-8 of "Operation manual (for printer operation and
general information)".
For detailed explanations of the procedures for establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu frame.
SETTING PASSWORDS
Passwords can be set to restrict Web page access and protect settings.
Note that it is not necessary to set passwords; the network scanner functionality can also be used without passwords.
A password can be set for the administrator and passwords can be set for each user. If you use a user password to
access the Web page, you will be able to establish, edit, and delete destinations in the Scanner Destination Management
menu; however, you will not be able to establish settings in the Setup menu.
The passwords for "User" and "admin" are both initially set to "Sharp". If you wish to change the passwords when first
establishing the settings, enter "Sharp" in "Old Admin Password" before you establish the settings. A password must
consist of alphanumeric characters and be no more than seven characters long. Passwords are case sensitive.After
entering a password, click "Submit" to set it. After setting the password, turn the machine power off and then back on.
When a password is set, you will be prompted for the password when you attempt to access a Web page with
protected settings. For the "User name", enter "user" if you are accessing the page as a user, or "admin" if you are
accessing the page as an administrator. For detailed information on setting passwords, refer to "Help".
Web Page
3
SETTINGS AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRED FOR THE NETWORK SCANNER FEATURE
BASIC SETTINGS FOR NETWORK SCANNING
Click "Network Scanning" in the menu frame, and then establish the required settings. These settings should only be
established by the network administrator. After entering the settings, be sure to click "Submit" to store them. For
detailed information on setting procedures, refer to "Help".
■■
■■
■ Select the method for assigning a file name to a scanned image
Select the method for assigning a file name to a scanned image. In "File Naming", click the items that you wish to
use in the file name. "Sender Name" and "Date & Time" are initially selected. If you are going to send images to the
same recipient more than once, we recommend that you also select "Session Page Counter" or "Unique Identifier"
to prevent sending multiple files with the same name, which would result in each successive file overwriting the
previous file.
■■
■■
■ Selecting an e-mail subject (only used for Scan to E-mail)
Enter a subject when using Scan to E-mail. Only one subject can be entered. If nothing is entered, “Scanned
image from <Device Name>” will appear.
*The name that appears in <Device Name> is the name stored in "Name" in the screen that appears when you click "Status
& Alert E-mail" in the menu frame. If a name has not been stored, the product name will appear.
■■
■■
■ E-mail Server and DNS Server Settings
E-mail sent by Scan to E-mail or Scan to FTP (Hyperlink) uses SMTP. To use either of these transmission methods,
you must first click "Network Settings" in the Web page menu, click "E-mail" in the screen that appears, and then enter
the required information in the settings under "E-mail Setup".
If you entered a host name in "Primary E-mail Server" or "Secondary E-mail Server" under "E-mail Setup", you will
need to click "DNS" and then enter the settings for the DNS server under "DNS Setup".
If you entered a host name in "Hostname or IP Address" when storing a destination for Scan to FTP (Scan to FTP
(Hyperlink)) or Scan to Desktop, you will also need to enter the settings for the DNS server under "DNS Setup".
Network Scanning Setting screen
4
SETTING UP DESTINATION INFORMATION
To store the name and address of a destination in an auto dial key, click "Destination Management" or one of the
transmission methods in the Web page menu frame. "Destination Management" can also be used to edit or clear
stored destinations.
A total of 500 destinations can be stored, including E-mail, FTP, Desktop, Internet-Fax, and Group destinations.
Among these, a combined total of 100 Scan to FTP and Desktop destinations can be stored.
The stored destinations appear as one-touch keys in the touch panel of the machine when you send an image,
allowing you to select the destination.
For detailed information on setting up, editing, and deleting destinations, refer to "Help".
■■
■■
■ Storing destinations for Scan to E-mail and Internet-Fax
Scan to E-mail and Internet-Fax destinations can also be stored, edited, and cleared from the touch panel of the
machine. (Pages 17 - 19)
To perform Scan to E-mail, the e-mail server settings must first be established. (Refer to page 3.)
■■
■■
■ Storing destinations for Scan to FTP
If you select the "Enable Hyperlink to FTP server to be e-mailed" checkbox, you can send an e-mail message to
a "Sender" selected from "E-mail Destination" (stored in "Sender E-mail" in the Web page menu (page 5)), to
notify that person of the location of the scanned image data and its file format. (Scan to FTP (Hyperlink))
The e-mail includes a link to the location of the scanned image data, and if the FTP server does not require a user
name or password (anonymous server), the recipient can display the image by simply clicking on the address.
If you entered a host name in "Hostname or IP Address", you will need to enter the DNS server or WINS server
settings. Click "Network Settings" and enter the settings under "DNS Setup". To perform Scan to FTP (Hyperlink),
you must also click "E-mail" and then enter the settings under "E-mail Setup" for the e-mail server. (Refer to page
3.)
■■
■■
■ Storing destinations for Scan to Desktop
Scan to Desktop can only be used if Network Scanner Tool is installed in your computer (Network Scanner Tool is
included on the CD-ROM that accompanies the AR-NS2 Network Scanner Expansion Kit).
You can store a Scan to Desktop destination in the Web page, or in Network Scanner Tool. We recommend that
you normally use Network Scanner Tool, which automatically establishes settings. The Web page is primarily used
when the same settings are to be established in multiple laser printers, or when the network administrator performs
maintenance. If the information set here differs from the information set in the host computer, transmission and
reception will not take place normally. For details, refer to "User's Guide"* for Network Scanner Tool in the CD-
ROM that accompanies the Network Scanner Expansion Kit (AR-NS2).
If you entered a host name in “Hostname or IP Address”, you will need to enter the DNS server or WINS server
settings. (Refer to page 3.)
*To view "User's Guide", Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.05 or later is necessary. If this is not installed on your computer, you can
install it from the CD-ROM that accompanies the Network Scanner Expansion Kit (AR-NS2). For details, refer to the operation
manual for the Network Scanner Expansion Kit (AR-NS2).
■■
■■
■ Storing Groups
If you are using Scan to E-mail or Internet-Fax, a scanned image can be sent to multiple destinations in a single
operation. To use this function, you must first store the destinations in a group. Click "Group" and then select the
Scan to E-mail or Internet Fax destinations that you wish to store in the group. Up to 300 destinations can be
stored in one group. Only destinations for E-mail or Internet-Fax can be stored in a group. Note that multiple
destinations cannot be entered manually when sending an image.
SETTINGS AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRED FOR THE NETWORK SCANNER FEATURE
5
SETTINGS AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRED FOR THE NETWORK SCANNER FEATURE
■■
■■
■ Items common to all transmission methods when storing destinations
• Full Name, Display Name
Only alphabetical characters and symbols can be used to enter names in "Full Name" and "Display Name". For
the maximum number of characters that can be entered, click "Help" in the menu frame. "Display Name" is the
one-touch key name that is displayed in the touch panel of the machine. If a display name is not stored, the first 18
characters of the name stored in "Full Name" are automatically used as the display name.
• Initial, Custom Directory
Stored destinations are arranged on "indexes" when displayed in the touch panel of the machine. There are two
types of indexes: the ABC index and group indexes. The ABC index arranges destinations based on the letter
entered in "Initial", which is normally the first letter of the name entered in "Full Name". If a destination is frequently
used, it is convenient to select the "Frequently Used" checkbox to include the destination in the alphabetical
"FREQUENT USE" index. Group indexes ("Custom Directories") allow you to create and name indexes (see the
following page) of destinations for specific purposes.
• File Format
When you store a destination, you can also select the compression mode and the format of the image file that is
created when you scan an original for transmission. You can select TIFF-F, TIFF, or PDF for the file type, and MH
(G3), MMR (G4), or "Uncompressed" for the compression mode. An initial setting has been made for the file type
and compression mode, so you only need to make a selection if the initial settings are not satisfactory. For an
explanation of the initial settings of each of the transmission methods, click "Help" in the menu frame.
NOTE
Internet-Fax only has one file format, TIFF-F, and thus there is no selection. MH (G3) or MMR (G4) can be selected for the
compression mode.
STORING SENDER INFORMATION
To store the sender information (Sender Name, E-mail Address) that is displayed when the recipient receives your e-
mail, click "Sender E-mail" in the menu frame and then click "Add". Information for up to 20 different senders can be
stored. Select a sender from the stored senders using the touch panel of the machine when you send an image (page
8). The selected sender appears in the sender column of the recipient's e-mail software program.
NOTE
If you do not select a sender when sending an image, the default sender information stored with the key operator program is
automatically sent. (Page 27)
STORING A CUSTOM DIRECTORY
Auto dial keys (one-touch keys and group keys) are normally stored in the ABC index. However, you can also use the
group indexes (custom directory) to group destinations for more convenient use. Six indexes are available, and a
name up to 6 characters long can be assigned to each index.
Click "Custom Directories" in the menu frame of the Web page, and then enter the desired name in the screen that
appears. "User-*" is initially entered for the name of each index. Clear this and then enter the new name.
The procedure for storing auto dial numbers in a group index is explained on page 4, and the procedure for switching
between the ABC index and the group indexes is explained on page 7.
NOTE
You can also store indexes in the Custom Directory from the touch panel of the machine.
6
CONDITION SETTING SCREEN OF SCANNER MODE
The condition setting screen of scanner mode is displayed by pressing the IMAGE SEND key (refer to page 4 of
"Operation manual (for copier)") while the print mode, copy mode, or job status screen appears in the touch panel. In
the explanations that follow, it is assumed that the initial screen that appears after pressing the IMAGE SEND key is
the condition setting screen (shown below). If you have set the display to show the address directory (following page)
when the IMAGE SEND key is pressed, touch the CONDITION SETTINGS key in the address directory to display the
condition setting screen.
The key operator program can be used to set the display to show either the condition setting screen (shown below) or
the address directory screen (following page) when the IMAGE SEND key is pressed (refer to page 26).
NOTE
For information on the parts of the unit and the operation panel that are used for network scanning, refer to pages 3-4 of
"Operation manual (for copier)". For parts that are used for both network scanning and printing, refer to chapter 1 of "Operation
manual (for printer operation and general information)".
■■
■■
■ Condition setting screen
The display is initially set (factory setting) to show the following condition setting screen as the initial screen.
Message display
Messages appear here to indicate the current status
of the machine. When the machine is ready to send,
an icon appears to the left.
ADDRESS DIRECTORY key (page 9)
This displays the Address Directory screen (next
page). Touch this key when you want to use an auto-
dial number (one-touch dialing or group dialing).
ADDRESS REVIEW key (page 10)
When performing Scan to E-mail or Internet-Fax
broadcast transmission, touch this key to check your
selected destinations. Your selected destinations will
appear as a list, and the list can be edited.
SENDER LIST key (page 8)
Touch this key to select the sender when sending
an image.
E-MAIL ADDRESS key (page 10)
When performing Scan to E-mail, touch this key if
you wish to enter the e-mail address of the recipient
manually instead of using an auto dial key.
Two-sided scanning icon display (page 11)
Icons appear here when you touch the ORIGINAL
key and select two-sided scanning. The icons can
be touched to open function selection screens.
ORIGINAL key (pages 11-12)
Touch this key when you wish to manually set the
size of the original to be scanned or scan both sides
of the original.
FILE FORMAT key (page 15)
Touch this key to set the file format of scan images
that you transmit. The selected file format setting
will be highlighted above the key. The initial factory
setting is PROGRAMMED.
RESOLUTION key (page 13)
Touch this key to change the resolution setting for
the original to be scanned. The selected resolution
setting will be highlighted above the key. The initial
factory setting is STANDARD.
EXPOSURE key* (page 14)
Touch this key to change the exposure setting for
the original to be scanned. The selected exposure
setting will be highlighted above the key. The initial
factory setting is AUTO.
E-MAIL ADDRESS
AUTO
ORIGINAL
AUTO
EXPOSURE
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
PROGRAMMED
FILE FORMAT
READY TO SEND.
SENDER LIST
ADDRESS REVIEW
ADDRESS
DIRECTORY
7
■ Address directory screen (alphabetically ordered)
If you have set the initial screen to the address directory screen using the key operator program, the initial screen
will appear as follows.
Destinations stored using the Web page are grouped in indexes ( ) according to the letter entered in "Initial" for
each destination, and the name entered in "Display Name" is displayed in the one-touch key ( ).
One-touch key display
This shows the one-touch keys that have been
stored on the selected "index card". The key type is
indicated by the icon at the right.
:Scan to E-mail, Internet-Fax
: Scan to FTP
: Scan to Desktop
The display is initially set to show 8 keys. This can
be changed to 6 or 12 using the key operator
program. (Refer to page 26.)
Display switching keys
In cases where the one-touch keys cannot all be
displayed on one screen, this shows how many
screens are left. Touch the " " " " keys to move
through the screens.
NOTE
The screen showed above is the alphabetical address directory. If desired, the initial screen can be set to the group address
directory (refer to page 26).
CONDITION SETTINGS key
This displays the condition setting screen (previous
page), which is used to set various conditions.
ABC GROUP key
Touch this key to switch between the alphabetical
index and the group index.
Index keys
One-touch key destinations are stored on each of
these index cards (alphabetical index or group
index). Touch an index key to display the card.
Group indexes make it possible to store one-touch
keys by group with an assigned name for easy
reference. This is done with the custom settings (refer
to page 5). Frequently used one-touch key
destinations can be stored on the FREQUENT USE
card for convenient access.
CONDITION SETTING SCREEN OF SCANNER MODE
GROUP6GROUP5GROUP4GROUP3GROUP2GROUP1
ABC GROUP
SHARP CORPORATION
FREQUENT USE ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC GROUP
TPS
SHARP GROUP D DESKTOP
E F
G H DESKTOP
CONDITION
SETTINGS
READY TO SEND.
ADDRESS REVIEW
E-mail Destination Management page
8
SENDING AN IMAGE
BASIC TRANSMISSION METHOD
1
Make sure the machine is in scanner mode.
When the IMAGE SEND
key light is on, the machine
is in scanner mode. If the
light is not on, press the
IMAGE SEND key.
2
Load the original.
For detailed information on
loading an original, refer to
pages 7 and 8 of "Operation
manual (for copier)".
NOTE
You cannot load documents in both the auto document
feeder and on the document glass and send them in a
single transmission. If documents are loaded in both the
auto document feeder and on the document glass, only
the document in the auto document feeder will be scanned
and transmitted.
3
Check the original size.
AUTO 8 X11
ORIGINAL
ST ND RD
RESOLUTION
PROGRAMMED
FILE FORMAT
1
/
2
The original size is
automatically detected.
If you loaded a non-standard
size document or wish to
change the scanning size,
touch the ORIGINAL key
and set the document size.
(Refer to page 12.)
NOTE
To scan a two-sided original, refer to page 11.
4
If needed, adjust the resolution setting.
(Refer to page 13.)
AUTO 8 X11
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
PROGRAMMED
FILE FORMAT
1
/
2
The initial factory setting is
STANDARD.
5
If needed, adjust the exposure setting.
(Refer to page 14.)
AUTO 8 X11
AUTO
EXPOSURE
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
PROGRAMMED
FILE FORMAT
1
/
2
The initial factory setting is
AUTO.
6
If needed, select the file format.
(Refer to page 15.)
AUTO 8 X11
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
PROGRAMMED
FILE FORMAT
1
/
2
The initial factory setting is
PROGRAMMED.
7
Touch the SENDER LIST key.
-MAIL ADDRESS SENDER LIST
ADDRESS REVIEW
DIRECTORY
This step is not necessary
for Scan to FTP or Scan to
Desktop. Go directly to step
10 (next page).
NOTES
• You can omit selection of a sender (go directly to step
10). In this case, the default sender information stored
with the key operator program is automatically
transmitted. (Page 27)
• Up to 20 senders can be stored using the Web page.
(Page 5)
8
Touch a key to select a sender.
2 GROUP
SHARP PPD
1 GROUP
DER LIST
The touched key is
highlighted. If you made a
mistake, touch the correct
key. The highlighting will
move to the new key.
The selected sender will be
the sender of the e-mail.
9
Touch the OK key.
1 GROUP
9
SENDING AN IMAGE
10
Touch the ADDRESS DIRECTORY key.
ADDRESS
DIRECTORY
The address directory
screen appears.
11
Touch the one-touch key for the desired
destination.
FREQUENT USE ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRS
T.P.S.
SHARP GROUP
SHARP CORPORATION
READY TO SEND.
Refer to page 7 for
information on using the
address directory screen.
The key you touched is
highlighted. If you touch the
wrong key, touch the key again
to cancel the selection. The key
display will return to normal.
NOTES
• Refer to pages 4 and 5 for information on programming
one-touch key destinations.
•
When pressing a one-touch key, corresponding information from
the email destination screen is shown in the message display. Up
to 28 characters can be displayed in the message screen,
regardless of the number of characters that have been entered.
• You can also manually enter the address of a Scan to E-
mail destination, or select multiple destinations for a
broadcast transmission. (Next page)
Using the auto document feeder
12
Press the START key.
Scanning begins and the
transmission job is stored.
(The job is transmitted
after previously stored
transmission jobs have
been completed.)
If scanning is completed normally, the machine makes a
beep sound to inform you that the transmission job is stored
and JOB STORED appears in the message display.
Using the document glass
12
Press the START key.
The original is scanned
and the READ-END key
appears.
13
If you have another page to scan, change pages
and then press the START key.
Repeat this sequence until all pages have been scanned.
You can change the resolution and exposure settings
as needed for each page (refer to pages 13 and 14).
If no action is taken for one minute, scanning
automatically ends and the transmission job is stored.
14
After the final page is scanned, touch the READ-
END key.
READ-END
L. (Pg.No. 3)
ESS [READ-END].
The machine makes a beep
sound to inform you that the
transmission job is stored
and JOB STORED appears
in the message display. (The
destination is automatically
called and the document
transmitted after previously
stored jobs are completed.)
Open the document glass cover and remove the
document.
NOTES
• Canceling transmission
To cancel transmission while SCANNING ORIGINAL... appears in the display or before the READ-END key is pressed, press the C key or
the CA key. To cancel a transmission job that is already stored, press the JOB STATUS key and cancel the job as explained on page 16.
• Important points when using Scan to E-mail
Be very careful not to send image data files that are too large. Your mail server's system administrator may have placed a limit
on the amount of data that can be sent in one e-mail transmission. If this limit is exceeded, the e-mail will not be delivered to
the recipient. Even if there is no limit and your e-mail is successfully delivered, a large data file may take a long time to be
received and place a heavy burden on the recipient's network, depending on the recipient's network (Internet) connection
environment. If large image data files are repeatedly sent, the resulting burden on the network may slow down the speed of
other, unrelated data transmissions and in some cases, may even cause the mail server or network to go down.
In cases where you need to send multiple documents, try such measures as lowering the resolution or image quality mode.
•
If the power is turned off or a power failure occurs while a document is being scanned in the auto document feeder, the machine will stop and
a document misfeed will occur. After power is restored, remove the document as explained on page 29 of "Operation manual (for copier)".
10
TRANSMISSION METHODS FOR SCAN TO E-MAIL
(MANUAL ENTRY, BROADCAST TRANSMISSION)
It is possible to manually enter the address of a Scan to E-mail destination, or select multiple destinations for a
broadcast transmission. (These procedures are not possible when performing an Internet-Fax transmission. First use
the procedure in "Basic transmission method" on pages 8 to 9.)
SENDING AN IMAGE
1
Perform steps 1 through 9 of "Basic
transmission method" (pages 8 to 9).
2
Touch the E-MAIL ADDRESS key.
E-MAIL ADDRESS SENDER
ADDRESS
DIRECT
3
Enter the e-mail address.
If you make a mistake, press the key to move the cursor
(
■
) back to the mistake and then enter the correct
character.
4
Touch the FILE FORMAT key.
The file format is initially set
to "File type: PDF,
Compression mode: MMR
(G4)". If you do not need to
change the file format, go
directly to step 6.
NOTE
The initial file format setting can be changed with the key
operator program. (Page 27)
5
Select the file type and the compression mode.
TIFF
TIFF-F
PDF
MH (G3)
MMR (G4)
NONE
FILE TYPE COMPRESSION MODE
CANCEL OK
OK
E-MAIL ADDRESS
FILE FORMAT
6
Touch the outer OK key.
RESSION MODE
CANCEL OK
OK
You will return to the initial
screen.
If you are not performing a
broadcast transmission, go
directly to step 9.
7
If you wish to enter another e-mail address,
repeat steps 2 through 6.
NOTES
• If the key operator
program has been set
so that the NEXT
ADDRESS key must
always be pressed
(page 26) and you wish
to enter another
address, press the
NEXT ADDRESS key and then repeat steps 2 through 6.
• If you frequently use broadcasting to send documents to
the same group of destinations, it is convenient to program
those destinations into a group key. (Page 4)
8
Touch the ADDRESS REVIEW key and check the
destinations.
E-MAIL ADDRESS SENDER LIST
ADDRESS REVIEW
DIRECTORY
When the ADDRESS
REVIEW key is pressed,
only the entered
destinations are displayed.
If you need to clear a
destination, press its key.
Press the OK key to return
to the initial screen.
9
Continue from step 12 of "Basic transmission
method" (pages 8 to 9).
NOTES
• To cancel a broadcast transmission when selecting
destinations, press the CA key.
• When you perform a broadcast transmission, the
compression mode set with the key operator program is
used as the file compression mode for all destinations.
This is initially set to "MH (G3)". If desired, you can change
the setting to "MMR (G4)". (Page 27)
CONDITION
SETTINGS
NEXT ADDRESS
11
NOTES
• Booklets and tablets
Two-sided originals that are bound at the side are booklets, and two-sided originals
that are bound at the top are tablets.
• Two-sided scanning turns off after the document is stored in memory. Pressing the
CA key will also cancel two-sided scanning.
Booklet Tablet
SCANNING AND TRANSMITTING A TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL
A two-sided original can be automatically scanned and transmitted using the auto document feeder. Follow the steps
below.
SENDING AN IMAGE
1
Make sure the machine is in scanner mode and
then load the document in the auto document
feeder.
2
Touch the ORIGINAL key.
AUTO 8 X11
ORIGINAL
RESOLUTION
PROGRAMMED
FILE FORMAT
1
/
2
When you touch the
ORIGINAL key, check the
original size displayed in the
key.
3
Touch the 2-SIDED BOOKLET key or the 2-
SIDED TABLET key as appropriate for the
original you loaded.
AUTO MANUAL
2-SIDED
BOOKLET
2-SIDED
TABLET
ORIGINAL SIZE
If necessary, touch the
MANUAL key and set the
original size. (Page 12)
4
Touch the OK key.
OK
ED
L
You will return to the initial
screen.
A two-sided original icon appears next to the ORIGINAL key.
(Example: The icon that appears when the 2-SIDED
BOOKLET key is touched.)
ORIGINAL
ST ND RD
RESOLUTION
PROGRAMMED
FILE FORMAT
AUTO 8 X11
1
/
2
5
Continue from step 4 of "Basic transmission
method" (pages 8 to 9).
12
SCANNING SETTINGS (ORIGINAL SIZE,
RESOLUTION, EXPOSURE, AND FILE FORMAT)
When sending an image, you can adjust the original size, resolution, exposure, and file format settings as needed.
MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE
If you load an original that is not a standard size (such as an AB size), or if you wish to change the scanning size, touch
the ORIGINAL key and set the original size manually. Perform the following steps after loading the document in the
automatic document feeder or on the document glass.
NOTE
Standard sizes that can be detected are as follows:
5-1/2"x8-1/2", 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R, 8-1/2"x14", 11"x17". If a non-standard size original is loaded (including special sizes),
the closest standard size may be displayed, or the original size may not appear at all.
NOTE
You can return to automatic detection by pressing the CA key.
1
Touch the ORIGINAL key.
AUTO 8 X11
ORIGINAL
RESOLUTION
PROGRAMMED
FILE FORMAT
1
/
2
2
Touch the MANUAL key.
ROTATE THE IMAGE 90 DEGREE
MANUAL
ST
UTO
2-SIDED
TABLET
2-SIDED
BOOKLET
ORIGINAL SIZE
The sizes that can be
selected are displayed.
NOTE
If you wish to rotate the original 90° when creating an image
file, click the "Load the original so that the image is oriented
horizontally" checkbox (a checkmark should appear in the
box).
3
Touch the desired original size key.
OK
OK
INCH
AB
ORIGINAL SIZE
MANUALAUTO
5 X8
1
/
2
1
/
2
5 X8 R
1
/
2
1
/
2
8 X11
1
/
2
8 X11R
1
/
2
8 X14
1
/
2
11X17
AUTO is no longer
highlighted. MANUAL and
the original size key you
touched are highlighted.
If you wish to select an AB size, touch the
AB INCH key and then touch the desired
original size key.
OK
OK
B4
A3
B5R
A4
A5
A5R
INCH
AB
A4RB5
ORIGINAL SIZE
MANUALAUTO
AB is highlighted and AB
size keys are displayed. To
return to the inch palette,
touch the AB
INCH key
once again.
4
Touch the outer OK key.
OK
OK
L
A4
You will return to the initial
screen. (Pressing the inner
OK key in the step above
returns you to step 2.)
5
The selected size appears in the top half of the
ORIGINAL key.
ORIGINAL
RESOLUTION
PROGRAMMED
FILE FORMAT
A4
13
SCANNING SETTINGS (ORIGINAL SIZE, RESOLUTION, EXPOSURE, AND FILE FORMAT)
SELECTING THE RESOLUTION
After loading the original, you can adjust the resolution as needed for the type of original and the size of the letters on
it. After loading the original in scanner mode, adjust the settings as explained below. The initial resolution setting is
STANDARD.
■ Change the resolution.
1
Touch the RESOLUTION key.
AUTO 8 X11
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
PROGRAMMED
FILE FORMAT
1
/
2
2
Touch the desired resolution key.
HALF TONE
OK
L/FTP
200
300
400
600
INTERNET
FAX
200 100
200 200
200 400
400 400
(dpi)
STANDARD
FINE
SUPER FINE
ULTRA FINE
200 200
300 300
400 400
600 600
200 100
200 200
200 400
400 400
(
The selected key is
highlighted. If you selected
FINE, SUPER FINE, or
ULTRA FINE, you can also
touch the HALF TONE key
to select halftone.
3
Touch the OK key.
HALF TONE
OK
MAIL/FTP
00 200
00 300
00 400
00 600
INTERNET
FAX
200 100
200 200
200 400
400 400
(dpi)
OK
You will return to the initial
screen.
NOTES
• The initial factory resolution setting is Standard. If desired,
you can change the initial setting to a different setting
using the key operator program. (Refer to page 26.)
• When using the automatic document feeder, the
resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has
begun.
■ Resolution settings
Standard
Touch this key if your original consists of
normal-sized characters (like those in
this manual).
Fine
Touch this key if your original has small
characters or diagrams. The original will
be scanned at twice the resolution of the
Standard setting.
Super fine
Touch this key if your original has intri-
cate pictures or diagrams. A higher-qual-
ity image will be produced than with the
Fine setting.
Ultra fine
Touch this key if your original has intri-
cate pictures or diagrams. This setting
gives the best image quality. However,
transmission will take longer than with
the other settings.
Half tone
Touch this key if your original is a photo-
graph or has gradations of color (such as
a color original). This setting will produce
a clearer image than Fine, Super fine, or
Ultra fine used alone. Half tone cannot be
selected if Standard has been selected.
14
SELECTING THE EXPOSURE
After loading the original, you can adjust the contrast as needed for the darkness and type of the original. After loading
the original in scanner mode, adjust the settings as explained below. The initial exposure setting is AUTO.
■ Change the exposure.
1
Touch the EXPOSURE key.
AUTO 8 X11
AUTO
EXPOSURE
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
PROGRAMMED
FILE FORMAT
1
/
2
If the Fax Expansion Kit
(AR-FX5) has been
installed, the SPECIAL
MODES key will appear in
place of the EXPOSURE
key. In this case, press the
SPECIAL MODES key and
then press the EXPOSURE
key.
2
Touch the desired exposure key.
AUTO
DARK
ORIGINAL
LIGHT
ORIGINAL
The selected key is
highlighted.
3
Touch the OK key.
OK
LIGHT
You will return to the initial
screen.
NOTE
When using the document glass to scan pages an original,
the exposure setting can be changed each time you change
pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the
exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has
begun.
Dark Select this setting if your original consists
Original mostly of dark characters.
Auto
This setting automatically adjusts the ex-
posure for light and dark parts of the origi-
nal.
Light Select this setting if your original consists
Original mostly of faint characters.
■ Exposure settings
SCANNING SETTINGS (ORIGINAL SIZE, RESOLUTION, EXPOSURE, AND FILE FORMAT)
15
SCANNING SETTINGS (ORIGINAL SIZE, RESOLUTION, EXPOSURE, AND FILE FORMAT)
SELECTING THE FILE FORMAT
When you send an image to one or more recipients using Scan to E-mail or Scan to FTP, the FILE FORMAT key
enables you to temporarily override the individual file format settings (FILE TYPE / COMPRESSION MODE) stored
for each recipient and send the image to all of the recipients using a single file format setting.
"PROGRAMMED" is initially selected, which means that the file format settings stored for each recipient are used.
1
Touch the FILE FORMAT key.
AUTO 8 X11
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
PROGRAMMED
FILE FORMAT
1
/
2
2
Select the file type and the compression mode.
ORIGINAL
AUTO
EXPOSURE
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
FILE FORMAT
READY TO SEND.
ONE PAGE PER FILE
AUTO 8 X11
1
/
2
TIFF
TIFF-F
PDF
MH (G3)
MMR (G4)PROGRAMMED PROGRAMMED
NONE
FILE TYPE COMPRESSION MODE
OK
NOTE
When the "ONE PAGE PER FILE" checkbox is not selected,
all scanned pages are combined into a single file. When
the checkbox is selected, one file is created per page.
3
Touch the OK key.
MH (G3)
MMR (G4)ED PROGRAMMED
NONE
COMPRESSION MODE
OK
You will return to the initial
screen.
NOTES
• The initial file format setting can be changed with the key
operator program. (Page 27)
• Even if you change the settings in the FILE FORMAT
setting screen, you can return to the settings stored for
each recipient by selecting "PROGRAMMED" once again.
The PROGRAMMED key returns both the file type and
compression mode to the stored file format settings
regardless of which key is touched. You cannot return
only the file type, or only the compression mode, to the
stored setting.
• When you perform a broadcast transmission, the
compression mode selected in the key operator program
has precedence over the others.
16
1
Press the JOB STATUS key.
2
Touch the E-MAIL/FTP key.
E-MAIL/FTP
WAITING
WAITING
WAITING
3
Touch the job key of the transmission job to
which you wish to give priority.
The touched key is highlighted.
4
Touch the PRIORITY key.
PRIORITY
STOP/DELETE
AITING
AITING
AITING
The selected job moves up
to the next position after the
job currently being
executed.
When the current job is completed, execution begins of
the job selected in step 3.
NOTE
If the job currently being executed is a broadcast
transmission, the priority job will be executed after the call
to the current destination is completed. When the priority
job is completed, the remaining broadcast destinations are
called. However, if the priority job is also a broadcast
transmission, the job is begun after the current broadcast
job is completed.
PRIORITY TRANSMISSION OF A STORED JOB
If you have an urgent transmission job and multiple transmission jobs have already been stored, you can give priority
to the urgent job so that it will be transmitted immediately after the job currently being executed. This is done from the
job status screen. For details on using the job status screen, refer to page 1-14 of "Operation manual (for printer
operation and general information)".
1
Press the JOB STATUS key.
2
Touch the E-MAIL/FTP key.
E-MAIL/FTP
WAITING
WAITING
WAITING
3
Touch the job key of the transmission job you
wish to cancel.
The touched key is highlighted.
4
Touch the STOP/DELETE key.
PRIORITY
STOP/DELETE
AITING
AITING
AITING
A message appears to
confirm the cancellation.
Touch the YES key to delete
the selected job key and
cancel the transmission.
NOTE
If you do not wish to cancel the transmission, touch the
NO key.
CANCELING AN E-MAIL/FTP TRANSMISSION
You can cancel a transmission job that is in progress or that has been stored. Cancellation is done from the e-mail/
FTP job status screen.
17
STORING ONE-TOUCH KEYS
(only addresses for Scan to E-mail and Internet-Fax)
The touch panel of the machine can also be used to store destinations for Scan to E-mail and Internet-Fax. (Scan to
FTP destinations must be stored using the Web page, and Scan to Desktop destinations must be stored using
Network Scanner Tool (page 4).)
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key.
2
Touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key.
KEY OPERATOR PRO
ADDRESS
CONTROL
3
Touch the DIRECT ADDRESS key.
DIRECT ADDRESS
CUSTOM INDEX
4
Touch the INDIVIDUAL key.
DIRECT ADDRESS
INDIVIDUAL
GROUP
STORE
5
Click the checkbox of the transmission method
to be used so that a checkmark appears.
(Example: Scan to E-mail)
T ADDRESS /INDIVIDUAL
E-MAIL INTERNET-FAX
NAME
INDEX ADDRESS
6
Touch the NAME key.
DIRECT ADDRESS / INDIVIDUAL
NAME
INDEX FAX
E-MAIL INTER
The "No." that automatically
appears is the lowest number
from 001 to 500 that has not
yet been programmed. When
NAME is touched, the letter-
entry screen appears. Enter up
to 36 characters for the name.
NOTE
If you are going to use the Web page to edit or delete the
stored name at a later time, do not use the characters ", <,
or >. These characters cannot be displayed in the Web page.
7
Touch the INITIAL key.
INITIAL
FILE FORMAT
8
Touch a letter key.
The first letter (initial) of the
name entered in step 6 is
initially selected and is
highlighted. If you wish to
change the letter, touch a
different letter key.
NOTE
The initial you enter here determines the position of the
one-touch key in the ABC index. For information on the
ABC index, refer to page 7.
9
Touch the OK key.
STORING, EDITING, AND CLEARING FROM
THE TOUCH PANEL
One-touch and group keys for Scan to E-mail and Internet-Fax, group indexes, and senders can also be stored, edited
and cleared from the touch panel of the machine.
18
STORING, EDITING, AND CLEARING FROM THE TOUCH PANEL
10
Touch the INDEX key.
NAME SHARP CORPORATION
INDEX ADDRE
KEY NAME
INTERNET
E-MAIL
11
Touch an index key.
DIRECT ADDRESS / INDIVIDUAL
NEXT EXIT
INDEX
USER 1 USER 2
YES NO
USER 3 USER 4 USER 5 USER 6
OK
SELECT THE CUSTOM INDEX WHERE YOU REGISTER THIS ADDRESS.
DO YOU REGISTER THIS ADDRESS AT THE [FREQUENT USE], TOO?
Select one of the upper row of keys (USER 1 through USER
6) to determine the location of the one-touch key when the
GROUP index is displayed instead of the ABC index (refer
to page 7). The lower keys are for selecting whether to
include the one-touch key in the FREQUENT USE index.
If you touch the wrong key, simply touch the correct key.
12
Touch the OK key.
13
Touch the ADDRESS key.
P CORPORATION
ADDRESS
FILE FORMAT
The E-mail address entry
screen appears.
14
Enter the e-mail address of the destination.
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
If you make a mistake, touch the
key to move the
cursor (
) back one space and then enter the correct
character.
15
Touch the OK key.
You will return to the one-touch key programming screen.
REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED will appear
highlighted to the right of "No.".
NOTE
The "ADDRESS" line only shows 32 digits, regardless of
how many were digits were actually programmed.
16
Check the key name.
The characters appearing next to the NAME key will be
displayed in the key. Only the first 18 characters of the
name entered in step 6 will be displayed.
If you need to change the name that will be displayed in
the key, touch the KEY NAME key.
NAME SHARP CORPORATION
E-MAIL INTERNET-
REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.
INDEX USER 3 ADDRES
KEY NAME SHARP CORPORATION
If you do not wish to change
the name, this step is not
necessary.
17
Check the file format and the compression
mode.
For a Scan to E-mail destination
Initial settings are File type: PDF, Compression mode:
MMR (G4). If you need to change these settings, touch
the FILE FORMAT key. File type selections are PDF, TIFF,
and TIFF-F; and compression mode selections are
NONE, MH (G3), MMR (G4).
If you do not need to change
the settings, this step is not
necessary.
When you have completed
the settings, press the OK
key.
For an Internet-Fax destination
The initial setting is Compression mode: MH (G3). If you
need to change the setting, press the COMPRESSION
key. Selections are MH (G3) and MMR (G4).
If you do not need to change
the settings, this step is not
necessary.
When you have completed
the settings, press the OK
key.
NOTE
The file format for Internet-Fax is automatically set to TIFF-F.
18
When you have finished programming the one-
touch key, touch the EXIT key
If you wish to program another one-touch key,
touch the NEXT key.
Pressing the EXIT key
returns you to the screen of
step 4 on the previous page.
19
STORING, EDITING, AND CLEARING FROM THE TOUCH PANEL
EDITING AND DELETING ONE-TOUCH KEYS
If you wish to delete a one-touch key or change the E-mail address, name, or other information programmed in a one-
touch key, perform the following procedure.
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key, touch the
ADDRESS CONTROL key, and then touch the
DIRECT ADDRESS key (refer to steps 1 to 3 on
page 17).
2
Touch the AMEND/DELETE key.
AMEND/DELETE
3
Touch the one-touch key you wish to edit or
delete.
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
SELECT ADDRESS TO AMEND/DELETE.
EXIT
FREQUENT USE
ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC GROUP
SHARP CORPORATION TPS
SHARP GROUP
● To edit a one-touch key, follow steps 4 and 5.
●
To delete a one-touch key, follow steps 6 and 7.
● When you have finished editing or deleting,
touch the EXIT key.
4
Touch the key corresponding to the information
you wish to change (change the information in
the same way as you stored the information on
pages 17 to 18).
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
NAME SHARP CORPORATION
E-MAIL
SINITIAL
DELETE EXIT
KEY NAME SHRAP CORPORATION PDF / MMR (G4)FILE FORMAT
INTERNET-FAX
5
Make sure that your changes are correct, and
then touch the EXIT key.
SINITIAL
DELETE EXIT
If you wish to change
another one-touch key,
repeat steps 3 through 5
.
6
Touch the DELETE key.
SINITIAL
DELETE EXIT
7
Touch the YES key.
DELETE THE ADDRESS?
SHARP CORPORATION
NO YES
SHARP CORPORATION PDFFILE FORMAT
If you wish to delete another
one-touch key, repeat steps
3, 6, and 7.
NOTES
• If you cannot edit or delete a one-touch key
If you attempt to edit or delete a one-touch key in the following situations, a warning message will appear and editing/deletion
will not be possible.
● The one-touch key you wish to edit or delete is currently being used for transmission or is used in a currently stored
transmission job.
● The one-touch key is included in a group key.
If the key is being used for a current transmission or currently stored transmission, cancel the transmission or wait until it is
completed and then change or delete the key. If the key is included in one of the above groups, delete the key from the group
and then change or delete the key.
• Destinations for Scan to FTP and Scan to Desktop that are stored in one-touch keys cannot be edited or cleared from the
touch panel of the machine. Use the Web page to edit or clear these destinations. (Page 2)
20
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key, touch the
ADDRESS CONTROL key, and then touch the
DIRECT ADDRESS key (refer to steps 1 to 3 on
page 17).
2
Touch the GROUP key.
DIRECT ADDRESS
INDIVIDUAL GROUP
STORE
3
Follow steps 6 through 12 of "Storing one-touch
keys" (pages 17 to 18) to enter a GROUP NAME,
INITIAL, and INDEX.
4
Touch the ADDRESS key.
AME
GROUP-SHARP DIGITAL DOCUMENT
X USER 2 ADDRESS
ME
5
Touch index keys and the keys as
needed, and then touch one-touch keys of the
destinations that you wish to store in the group.
DIRECT ADDRESS / GROUP
SELECT ADDRESS.
FREQUENT USE ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC GROUP
ADDRESS REVIEW
A B
C GROUP SHARP CORPORATION
TPS
One-touch keys that have been touched are highlighted.
If you touch the wrong key, simply touch it again to cancel
the highlighting and remove the destination from the
group.
NOTE
One group key cannot be stored in another group key.
Group keys appear grayed out and cannot be touched.
STORING, EDITING, AND CLEARING FROM THE TOUCH PANEL
6
To check the destinations that you have stored
in the group, touch the ADDRESS REVIEW key.
OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC GROUP
ON
ADDRESS REVIEW
A list of your selected
destinations is displayed.
You can delete a displayed
destination by touching it.
When a message appears
asking if you want to delete
the destination, touch the
YES key.
7
Touch the outer OK key.
DIRECT ADDRESS / GROUP
SELECT ADDRESS TO DELETE.
GROUP NAME : SHARP GROUP
OK
OK
SHARP CORPORATION TPS
The number of destinations in the group appears to the
right of the ADDRESS key.
8
Check the name of the key (refer to step 16 on
page 18).
The characters appearing next to the KEY NAME key
will be displayed in the group key. To change these
characters, touch the KEY NAME key. This step is not
necessary if you do not wish to change the characters.
9
Touch the EXIT key when you have finished
programming the group key.
If you wish to program another group key, touch
the NEXT key.
When you touch the EXIT key, you will return to the
screen of step 2.
PROGRAMMING A GROUP KEY
Scan to E-mail and Internet-Fax destinations that have been stored in one-touch keys can be stored in group keys. Up
to 300 destinations can be stored in a group key.
To program a group key from the Web page, refer to page 4.
NOTE
Only one-touch key destinations can be stored in a group key. If you wish to store a destination that is not programmed in a
one-touch key, first program the destination in a one-touch key and then store it in the group key.
21
STORING, EDITING, AND CLEARING FROM THE TOUCH PANEL
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key, touch the
ADDRESS CONTROL key, and then touch the
DIRECT ADDRESS key (refer to steps 1 to 3 on
page 17).
2
Touch the AMEND/DELETE key.
AMEND/DELETE
3
Touch the group key you wish to edit or delete.
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
SELECT ADDRESS TO AMEND/DELETE.
EXIT
FREQUENT USE
ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC GROUP
SHARP CORPORATION TPS
SHARP GROUP
● To edit a group key, follow steps 4 and 5.
●
To delete
a group key
, follow steps 6 and 7.
● When you have finished editing or deleting,
touch the EXIT key.
4
Touch the key of the item you wish to change
(to edit the item, follow the same steps as for
one-touch keys on page 17).
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
GROUP NAME SHRAP GROUP
002
SINITIAL
DELETE EXIT
INDEX USER 2 2 ADDRESSESADDRESS
KEY NAME SHARP GROUP
To edit a destination stored in a group key, touch the
ADDRESS key. The following screen appears.
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
SELECT ADDRESS.
FREQUENT USE
ADDRESS REVIEW
ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC GROUP
A B
C GROUP SHARP CORPORATION
TPS
The one-touch keys stored in the group are highlighted.
To add another one-touch key to the group, touch the
key to highlight it.
To delete a one-touch key from the group, touch the key
so that it is no longer highlighted.
5
Make sure the edited information is correct, and
then touch the EXIT key.
SINITIAL
DELETE EXIT
ES
If you wish to change
another group key, repeat
steps 3 through 5.
6
Touch the DELETE key.
SINITIAL
DELETE EXIT
7
Touch the YES key.
DELETE THE ADDRESS?
SHARP GROUP
NO YES
If you wish to delete another
group key, repeat steps 3,
6, and 7.
EDITING AND DELETING GROUP KEYS
If you need to delete group key or change its name or one of its stored destinations, perform the following procedure.
NOTE
If you cannot edit or delete a group key
If you attempt to edit or delete a group key in the following situations, a warning message will appear and editing/deletion will not be possible.
● The one-touch key you wish to change or delete is currently being used for transmission or is used in a currently stored
transmission job.
If the key is being used for a current transmission or currently stored transmission, cancel the transmission or wait until it is
completed and then edit or delete the key.
22
STORING SENDER INFORMATION
Use this procedure to store the sender information (sender name and e-mail address) that is displayed when the
recipient receives your e-mail. Information for up to 20 different senders can be stored. Select a sender from the
stored senders using the touch panel of the digital copying machine when you send an image (page 8). The selected
sender appears in the sender column of the recipient's e-mail software program. If you prefer to store sender information
from the Web page, refer to page 5.
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key, and then
touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key (refer to
steps 1 and 2 on page 17).
2
Touch the E-MAIL SENDER key.
E-MAIL SENDER
3
Touch the STORE key.
STORE
SENDER
4
Touch the SENDER NAME key.
RE.ADDRESS
SENDER NAME
The "No." that automatically
appears is the lowest number
from 01 to 20 that has not yet
been programmed. When
SENDER NAME is touched,
the letter-entry screen
appears. Enter up to 20
characters for the name.
5
Touch the RE.ADDRESS key.
RE.ADDRESS
SENDER NAME 1 GROUP
The display changes to the
address entry screen when
you touch the RE.ADDRESS
key. Up to 64 characters can
be entered for the sender's
e-mail address. When
finished, press the OK key to
return to the original screen.
6
If you have finished storing senders, touch the
EXIT key. If you wish to store another sender,
touch the NEXT key.
EDITING AND DELETING SENDER INFORMATION
Use this procedure when you need to edit sender information or clear a sender.
1
Perform steps 1 and 2 of "STORING SENDER
INFORMATION".
2
Touch the AMEND/DELETE key.
AMEND/DELETE
The stored senders appear.
3
Touch the one-touch key of the sender that you
wish to edit or clear.
IST
1 GROUP
2 GROUP
The edit/clear screen of the
touched sender appears.
4
Edit or clear the sender.
RE.ADDRESS
SENDER NAME
EXITDELETE
1 GROUP
E-MAIL SENDER
Edit sender information in the same way that you stored
it. When finished, touch the EXIT key to return to the
screen of step 3.
To clear the sender, touch the DELETE key. A message
appears asking you to confirm your selection. Touch the
YES key to clear the sender and return to the screen of
step 3.
STORING, EDITING, AND CLEARING FROM THE TOUCH PANEL
23
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key.
2
Touch the LIST PRINT key.
Y
ST
S
L
LIST PRINT
3
Touch the SENDING ADDRESS LIST key.
SENDING ADDRESS LIST
PRINTER TEST PAGE
ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
4
Touch the key of the list you wish to print.
INDIVIDUAL
LIST
GROUP LIST
PROCESSING PRINT
DATA appears in the
message display and
printing begins.
To cancel printing, touch the
CANCEL key.
STORING A GROUP INDEX
You can assign any name up to 6 characters long to each of the USER indexes (USER 1 to USER 6).
To perform this procedure from the Web page, refer to page 5.
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key, and then
touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key (refer to
steps 1 and 2 on page 17).
2
Touch the CUSTOM INDEX key.
DIRECT ADDRESS
CUSTOM INDEX
3
Touch an index key (USER 1 to USER 6).
You can enter a name for the selected index.
CUSTOM SETTINGS
CUSTOM INDEX
SELECT THE KEY TO BE CUSTOM NAMED.
OK
USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 USER 4 USER 5 USER 6
When touched, the letter entry screen appears.
4
Enter a maximum of 6 characters for the index
name.
Use the key to clear the displayed name and then
enter the desired name.
When finished, touch the OK key. The new name appears
in the screen of step 3.
5
If you wish to program another index name,
repeat steps 3 and 4.
When finished, touch the OK key.
To change a user index name, re-enter the name as
explained in step 4.
PRINTING PROGRAMMED INFORMATION
You can print out lists of the one-touch keys and group keys that have been stored in the machine.
NOTES
• The list is printed before other print jobs waiting to be printed.
• If you attempt to print a list when no data exists, a warning message will appear.
STORING, EDITING, AND CLEARING FROM THE TOUCH PANEL
24
TROUBLESHOOTING
IF YOUR E-MAIL IS RETURNED
If a Scan to E-mail or Internet-Fax is not successfully transmitted, an e-mail informing you of this fact is sent to the
sender selected at the time of transmission. If this happens, read the e-mail and determine the cause of the error, and
then repeat the transmission.
IF A TRANSMISSION ERROR OCCURS
If a transmission error occurs when you send a scanned image, a message informing you of the error and an error
code will appear in the touch panel on the machine.
■■
■■
■ Error Code Table
Error Code Description of the Error
CE-01 The optional network interface card (Print Server Card) is not installed or is out of order.
CE-02 Cannot find the specified mail server or FTP server.
CE-03 The server was down during the scanning of the original.
CE-04 An invalid account name or password for the FTP server has been entered.
CE-05 An invalid directory of the FTP server has been entered.
CE-00 An error other than the above has occurred.
25
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
This section explains the key operator programs that are related to the network scanner feature of the machine. For
key operator programs that are related to the printer and copy functions of the machine, refer to KEY OPERATOR'S
GUIDE and "Operation manual (for copier)".
NOTE
You may not be able to use all of the programs in the key operator program list. Programs that you can use will depend on what
peripheral devices are installed on the machine.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST
Program name Page
Image send settings
Operation settings
Default display setting 26
The number of direct address keys displayed setting
26
Must input next address key at broadcast setting
26
Initial resolution setting 26
Scan to E-mail initial status settings
Default sender set 27
Initial file format setting 27
Compression mode at broadcasting 27
USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
To use a key operator program, follow the procedure on page 6 of KEY OPERATOR'S GUIDE. (Please carefully read
"Supplementary explanation of key operation for key operator programs (when using the operation panel with touch
panel)" on the same page.) For explanations of each setting, refer to the following pages.
26
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
SETTING PROGRAMS
The setting programs for the network scanner feature
of the machine are explained here. Explanations of the
setting programs used for the copy feature, setting
programs used for the facsimile feature, and setting
programs that are related to the printer feature can be
found in the copy, facsimile, and printer manuals.
Operation settings
The following operation settings are available:
●Default display setting
●The number of direct address keys displayed setting
●Must input next address key at broadcast setting
●Initial resolution setting
Default display setting
You can select the initial display that appears when
you press the IMAGE SEND key to change to scanner
mode or when you press the CA key in scanner mode.
Normally the initial display is set to the condition setting
screen (page 6).
The following three selections are available:
• Condition setting screen
• Address directory (ABC)
• Address directory (Group)
When an address directory (ABC or Group) is
selected, the selected index of that address directory
(page 7) is set as the initial screen.
The number of direct address keys
displayed setting
The number of one-touch keys displayed in each
address directory screen can be changed from 8
(the normal setting) to 6 or 12.
Touch 6, 8, or 12 to select the desired number.
NOTE
For the key name that appears in each one-touch key, a
maximum of 18 characters can appear when the number
of one-touch keys displayed is set to 6 or 8. A maximum of
10 characters can appear when the number of one-touch
keys displayed is set to 12.
Must input next address key at
broadcast setting
You can select whether the NEXT ADDRESS key
must be pressed before entering the next destination
when performing a broadcast transmission (only for
Scan to E-mail). Usually this is set so that the NEXT
ADDRESS key can be omitted.
Example: Normal setting (factory setting)
XXXX NEXT ADDRESS One-touch NEXT ADDRESS One-touch
Manual
Can be omitted Can be omitted
XXXX NEXT ADDRESS XXXX
Manual
Manual
Cannot be omitted.
If the box is checked, it will no longer be possible to
omit the NEXT ADDRESS key as shown in the
above example. Even if the next destination to be
entered is a one-touch key, the NEXT ADDRESS
key must be touched before the one-touch key can
be entered.
If you attempt to enter a subsequent destination
without touching the NEXT ADDRESS key, the
destination will not be entered.
Initial resolution setting
This setting is used to change the default resolution
setting for scanner mode from STANDARD to FINE,
SUPER FINE, or ULTRA FINE. HALF TONE can
also be selected for the latter three resolution
settings. STANDARD is normally selected for the
initial resolution setting. If you wish to select HALF
TONE for the selected resolution setting, touch the
HALF TONE key to highlight it.
NOTES
• HALF TONE cannot be selected for STANDARD
resolution.
• For more information on each of the resolution settings,
refer to page 13.
27
PRINTING OUT SETTINGS
Settings established with the key operator programs can
be verified by printing them out.
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key.
2
Touch the KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS key.
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
LIST PRIN
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
ADDRESS
CONTROL
3
Touch the LIST PRINT key.
ON
GS
END
GS
DEVICE CONTROL
LIST PRINT
4
Touch the ALL KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
LIST key.
SENDER LIST
ALL KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS LIST
PROCESSING PRINT DATA
appears in the message
screen and printing begins.
To cancel printing, touch the
CANCEL key.
NOTES
• The list is printed before other jobs waiting to be printed.
• In the screen of Step 4, you can touch the SENDER LIST
key to print the Sender List. This list lets you check the
stored senders.
Scan to E-mail initial status settings
The Scan to E-mail initial status settings let you adjust
certain default settings for Scan to E-mail.
The Scan to E-mail initial status settings are as follows:
●Default sender set
●Initial file format setting
●Compression mode at broadcasting
Default sender set
If you do not select a sender when performing a
Scan to E-mail operation, the sender information
stored with this setting is automatically used. You
can check the stored sender information by printing
the SENDER list.
1
Touch the SENDER NAME key and then enter
the sender name.
The sender name entry screen appears.
Up to 20 characters can be entered.
2
Touch the OK key.
3
Touch the RE.ADDRESS key and then enter the
return address.
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
4
Touch the OK key.
The entered return address appears. Check the address
to make sure it is correct
Initial file format setting
You can change the default file format (file type,
compression mode, and file creation method) used
when the e-mail address is entered manually for a
Scan to E-mail transmission.
Normally the file type is set to PDF and the
compression mode is set to MMR (G4).
Compression mode at broadcasting
This setting selects the compression mode for
broadcasting using Scan to E-mail. The compression
mode set here is used for all destinations regardless
of their individual compression mode settings.
The usual setting is MH (G3).
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
28
SPECIFICATIONS
For information on power requirements, power consumption, dimensions, weight, and other specifications that are
common to all features of the machine, refer to page 6-2 of "Operation manual (for printer operation and general
information)".
Maximum original size 11"x17"
Two-sided originals Possible
Optical resolution 600dpi
Output modes 1bit/pixel
Halftone processing Error dispersion (200/300/400/600dpi)
File format*
1
File type: PDF/TIFF/TIFF-F
Compression mode: NONE/MH (G3)/MMR (G4)
Scan destinations Scan to FTP
Scan to Desktop
Scan to E-mail, Internet-Fax
Management system Uses built-in Web server
Web browser Internet Explorer 4.0 or later, Netscape Navigator 4.0 or later
Network protocol TCP/IP, UDP/IP
LAN connectivity 10Base-T/100Base-TX
Supported mail system Mail servers supporting SMTP
Number of destinations 500 maximum*
2
Number of senders 20 maximum
Output resolution
Destination type
E-mail/FTP Broadcast transmission Broadcast transmission
Resolution
(E-mail/Internet-Fax) (Fax/E-mail/Internet-Fax)
STANDARD 200x200dpi 200x100dpi 203.2x97.8dpi
(8x3.85line/mm)
FINE 300x300dpi 200x200dpi 203.2x195.6dpi
(8x7.7line/mm)
SUPER FINE 400x400dpi 200x400dpi 203.2x391dpi
(8x15.4line/mm)
ULTRA FINE 600x600dpi 400x400dpi 406.4x391dpi
(16x15.4line/mm)
*1The file format for Internet-Fax is automatically set to TIFF-F. Compression mode selections are MH (G3) and
MMR (G4).
*2A total of 500 destinations can be stored, including E-mail, FTP, Desktop, Internet-Fax, and Group destinations.
Among these, a combined total of 100 Scan to FTP and Desktop destinations can be stored.
Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine.
Operation manual (for network scanner)
SHARP CORPORATION
PRINTED IN CHINA
2002D
KS1
TINSE2292FCZZ
LASER PRINTER
Operation Manual (for facsimile)
Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to gain
the maximum benefit from the product.
Before installing this product, be sure to read the installation
requirements and cautions sections of the "Operation manual
for printer operation and general information".
Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference
including this manual, the "Operation manual for printer
operation and general information" and operation manuals for
any optional equipment which has been installed.
350LP,450LP,350M,450M,3500,
3501,3551,4500,4501,4551
Operation manual (for facsimile)
SHARP CORPORATION
PRINTED IN CHINA
2001D
KS1
TINSE2114FCZZ
■ CAUTION:
To reduce the risk of fire, use only UL-Listed No.26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.
■ WARNING:
FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved
by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
■ FAX interface cable and Line cable:
These special accessories must be used with the device.
■ NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will
be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
0-1
TO USE THIS PRODUCT CORRECTLY AS A FACSIMILE
Several points must be kept in mind when using this product as a facsimile.
Please note the following:
■ Settings and programming
Information about settings and programming that are required before the fax functionality can be used is located in "Points
to Check and Programming after Installation" on page 1-2 of this manual. Please read this section and perform the
required settings and programming.
■ Lithium battery
A lithium battery inside the unit keeps settings and programmed information in memory.
• When the battery dies, settings and programmed information will be lost. Be sure to keep a written record of the
settings and programmed information. (Refer to page 6-14.)
• The life of the lithium battery is approximately 5 years if the main switch and fax power switch are kept continually
off.
• When the battery dies, please consult your dealer or your nearest Sharp customer assistance center. When the
lithium battery dies, a message will appear in the display and the unit will no longer function.
■ Other information
• If a thunderstorm occurs, we recommend that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Information will
be retained in memory even if the power cord is unplugged.
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing this product. This manual only explains the facsimile functions of the product. For information
on loading paper, replacing toner cartridges, clearing paper jams, handling peripheral units, and other printer-related
information, please refer to your "Operation manual (for printer operation and general information)".
Additional manuals have been provided for copy and network scanner features. Please refer to these as necessary.
This manual assumes that several options have been installed.
• Keep the fax power switch turned on. (Page 0-
7 of "Operation manual (for printer operation
and general information)".)
Fax functions cannot be used when the power is
turned off.
T
EL
LINE
0-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ....................................................0-1
TO USE THIS PRODUCT CORRECTLY
AS A FACSIMILE ....................................................0-1
FCC NOTICE TO USERS .......................................0-4
ABOUT THE TELEPHONE CONSUMER
PROTECTION ACT OF 1991 ................................0-5
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION...................0-5
NOTICE FOR USERS IN CANADA
(AVIS POUR NOS UTILISATEURS AU CANADA) ...........
0-6
CHAPTER 1
BEFORE USING THE FAX FEATURE
POINTS TO CHECK
AND PROGRAMMING AFTER INSTALLATION.....1-2
A LOOK AT THE OPERATION PANEL ...................1-3
●
FAX MODE (CONDITION SETTING SCREEN)
...1-4
ORIGINALS ............................................................1-6
●ORIGINALS THAT CAN BE FAXED .................1-6
LOADING A DOCUMENT.......................................1-7
●USING THE AUTO DOCUMENT FEEDER ......1-7
●USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS ...................1-7
CHECKING THE SIZE OF A LOADED ORIGINAL
.....1-8
●
MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE
....1-8
SELECTING RESOLUTION
AND EXPOSURE SETTINGS ................................1-9
●SELECTING THE RESOLUTION.....................1-9
●SELECTING THE EXPOSURE ......................1-10
CONVENIENT DIALING METHODS....................1-11
CHAPTER 2
BASIC OPERATIONS
SENDING A FAX.....................................................2-2
●
BASIC PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES
.....2-2
●TRANSMISSION BY AUTO-DIALING ..............2-5
●
TRANSMITTING A TWO-SIDED DOCUMENT
......2-5
PRIORITY TRANSMISSION OF A STORED JOB
....2-6
CANCELING A FAX TRANSMISSION....................2-6
RECEIVING FAXES................................................2-7
●RECEIVING A FAX...........................................2-7
CHAPTER 3
USING CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 1
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
Page
SENDING THE SAME DOCUMENT
TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS IN A SINGLE OPERATION
(BROADCAST TRANSMISSION) ..........................3-2
●USING BROADCAST TRANSMISSION...........3-3
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(TIMER TRANSMISSION) ......................................3-4
●SETTING UP A TIMER TRANSMISSION ........3-4
TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION USING
THE POLLING FUNCTION ....................................3-5
●USING THE POLLING FUNCTION..................3-6
●USING POLLING MEMORY ............................3-7
OWN NUMBER SENDING .....................................3-9
FAXING A DIVIDED ORIGINAL
(DUAL PAGE SCAN).............................................3-10
PROGRAMMING FREQUENTLY USED OPERATIONS
.... 3-11
●USING A PROGRAM .....................................3-11
TRANSFERRING RECEIVED FAXES
TO ANOTHER MACHINE
WHEN PRINTING IS NOT POSSIBLE .................3-12
●USING THE TRANSFER FUNCTION ............3-12
CHAPTER 4
USING CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 2
TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES
TRANSMISSION BETWEEN MACHINES
SUPPORTING F-CODES .......................................4-2
●MEMORY BOXES AND
SUB-ADDRESSES/PASSCODES
REQUIRED FOR F-CODE TRANSMISSION...4-2
●
ENTERING A SUB-ADDRESS AND PASSCODE
FOR A MEMORY BOX IN THE OTHER MACHINE
.....4-3
●CREATING A MEMORY BOX
FOR F-CODE TRANSMISSION.......................4-3
F-CODE POLLING MEMORY ................................4-4
●USING F-CODE POLLING MEMORY..............4-4
●PROCEDURE FOR F-CODE POLLING ..........4-5
Page
0-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION ..........4-6
●F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION ....4-6
●PRINTING A DOCUMENT RECEIVED
TO AN F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL
MEMORY BOX .................................................4-7
F-CODE RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION
.......4-8
●USING THE F-CODE RELAY
BROADCAST FUNCTION
(your machine is the relay machine).................4-9
●USING THE F-CODE RELAY
REQUEST FUNCTION
(your machine requests a relay broadcast) ......4-9
CHAPTER 5
USING CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 3
CONVENIENT METHODS OF USE
STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS
(VERIFICATION STAMP FUNCTION) ...................5-2
●TURNING ON THE VERIFICATION
STAMP FUNCTION ..........................................5-2
CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE ..............5-3
●CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE .......5-3
●SENDING A FAX AFTER TALKING ON THE
PHONE (MANUAL TRANSMISSION) ..............5-3
●USING AN EXTENSION PHONE
TO RECEIVE A FAX .........................................5-4
●RECEIVING A FAX AFTER TALKING
(MANUAL RECEPTION) ..................................5-5
CHAPTER 6
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING ....................................................6-2
STORING, EDITING, AND DELETING
AUTO DIAL KEYS AND PROGRAMS ....................6-2
●STORING ONE-TOUCH DIAL KEYS ...............6-3
●
EDITING AND DELETING ONE-TOUCH KEYS
.......6-5
●PROGRAMMING A GROUP KEY....................6-6
●EDITING AND DELETING GROUP KEYS ......6-7
●STORING A PROGRAM ..................................6-8
●EDITING AND DELETING PROGRAMS .........6-8
Page
STORING A GROUP INDEX ..................................6-9
PROGRAMMING, EDITING, AND DELETING
F-CODE MEMORY BOXES ..................................6-10
●
PROGRAMMING AN F-CODE MEMORY BOX
......6-10
●
SETTING FOR F-CODE POLLING MEMORY
BOXES (NUMBER OF TRANSMISSIONS)
...........6-11
●
SETTING FOR F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
MEMORY BOXES (PRINT PIN.)
..........................6-12
●
SETTING FOR F-CODE RELAY BROADCAST
MEMORY BOXES (END RECEIVING MACHINES)
....6-13
●
EDITING AND DELETING A MEMORY BOX
.....6-13
PRINTING PROGRAMMED INFORMATION .......6-14
ENTERING CHARACTERS..................................6-15
CHAPTER 7
TROUBLESHOOTING
WHEN A TRANSACTION REPORT IS PRINTED ......
7-2
VIEWING THE COMMUNICATION
ACTIVITY REPORT ................................................7-3
WHEN AN ALARM SOUNDS
AND A WARNING MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED .......7-3
PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS..............................7-4
CHAPTER 8
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS ..............................8-2
●KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST..................8-2
●USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS ...8-2
●SETTING PROGRAMS ....................................8-3
●PRINTING OUT SETTINGS...........................8-10
CHAPTER 9
APPENDIX
SPECIFICATIONS...................................................9-2
Page
0-4
FCC NOTICE TO USERS
This equipment complies with FCC Part 68 rules.
On this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC Registration number and Ringer
Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment.
If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment.
This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular
jack which is Part 68 compliant.
This equipment connects to the telephone network through a standard USOC RJ-11C network interface jack.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to your telephone line.
Multiple devices on one line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call.
In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs of all devices should not exceed five (5.0).
To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to your line, as determined by the total RENs, contact
your local telephone company.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, your telephone company may disconnect your service
temporarily.
If possible, They will notify you in advance.
If advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible.
You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect
the operation of your equipment.
If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications
to maintain uninterrupted service.
If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, your telephone company may ask you to disconnect the
equipment until the problem resolved.
If you have any questions or problems which cannot be solved by reading this manual, please contact
Sharp Electronics Corporation
P.O. Box 650
Mahwah, NJ 07430-2135
Telephone: 1-800-BE-SHARP
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company.
Connection to party lines service is subject to state tariffs.
Contact your state's public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for more information.
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers:
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.
0-5
ABOUT THE TELEPHONE CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT OF 1991
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electric
device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at
the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information:
1) The date and time of transmission.
2) Identification of either the business, business entity or individual sending the message.
3) Telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual.
In order to program this information into your facsimile machine, please refer to the appropriate instructions in the
operation manual.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
• If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone
line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network.
• The AC power outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
• Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the
network interface.
• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
• Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of
electric shock from lightning.
• Do not use a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
• Do not install or use the machine near water, or when you are wet. Take care not to spill any liquids on the machine.
0-6
NOTICE FOR USERS IN
CANADA
“NOTICE : The Industry Canada label identifies certified
equipment. This certification means that the equipment
meets telecommunications network protective,
operational and safety requirements as prescribed in
the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical
Requirements document(s). The Department does not
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's
satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure
that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of
the local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of
connection. The customer should be aware that
compliance with the above conditions may not prevent
degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated
by a representative designated by the supplier. Any
repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment,
or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user
to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the
electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe
system, if present, are connected together. This
precaution may be particularly important in rural
areas.
Caution : Users should not attempt to make such
connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician,
as appropriate.”
“NOTICE : The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)
assigned to each terminal device provides an indication
of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on
an interface may consist of any combination of devices
subject only to the requirement that the sum of the
Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does
not exceed 5.”
The REN of this equipment is indicated on the label
of the equipment.
AVIS POUR NOS
UTILISATEURS AU CANADA
AVIS : L'étiquette de l'Industrie Canada identifie le
matériel homologué, Cette étiquette certifie que le
matériel est conforme à certaines normes de protection,
d'exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de
télécommunications. Industrie Canada n'assure toutefois
pas que le matériel fonctionnera à la satisfaction de
l'utilisateur.
Avant d'installer ce matériel, l'utilisateur doit s'assurer
qu'il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de
l'entreprise locale de télécommunication. Le matériel doit
également être installé en suivant une méthode
acceptée de raccordement. L'abonné ne doit pas oublier
qu'il est possible que la conformité aux conditions
énoncées ci-dessus n'empêchent pas la dégradation
du service dans certaines situations.
Les réparations de matériel homologué doivent être
effectuées par un centre d'entretien canadien autorisé
désigné par le fournisseur. La compagnie de
télécommunications peut demander à l'utilisateur de
débrancher un appareil à la suite de réparations ou de
modifications effectuées par l'utilisateur ou à cause de
mauvais fonctionnement.
Pour sa propre protection, l'utilisateur doit s'assurer que
tous les fils de mise à terre de la source d'énergie
électrique les lignes téléphoniques et les canalisations
d'eau métalliques, s'il y en a, sont raccordés ensemble.
Cette précaution est particulièrement importante dans
les régions rurales.
Avertissement : L'utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire
ces raccordements de lui-même, il doit avoir recours à
un service d'inspection des installations électriques, ou
à un électricien, selon le cas.
Remarque : L'indice de change (IC) assigné à chaque
appareil terminal indique le nombre de terminaux
pouvant être raccordés à une interface téléphonique.
La terminaison de l'interface peut être constituée de
n'importe quelle combinaison d'appareils terminaux
pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de
l'ensemble des appareils terminaux ne dépasse pas 5.
Le nombre REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) de cet
appareil est indiqué sur l'étiquette de l'appareil.
Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
335 Britannia Road East,
Mississauga, Ontario, L4Z 1W9
Canada
1-1
CHAPTER 1
BEFORE USING THE FAX
FEATURE
This chapter contains basic information about using the fax features of
this product. Please read this chapter before using the fax features.
Page
POINTS TO CHECK AND PROGRAMMING AFTER INSTALLATION
........1-2
A LOOK AT THE OPERATION PANEL...................................................1-3
●FAX MODE (CONDITION SETTING SCREEN) .............................. 1-4
ORIGINALS ..............................................................................................1-6
●ORIGINALS THAT CAN BE FAXED ................................................ 1-6
LOADING A DOCUMENT ........................................................................1-7
●USING THE AUTO DOCUMENT FEEDER .....................................1-7
●USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS ...................................................1-7
CHECKING THE SIZE OF A LOADED ORIGINAL .................................1-8
●MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE ................................ 1-8
SELECTING RESOLUTION AND EXPOSURE SETTINGS ................... 1-9
●SELECTING THE RESOLUTION .................................................... 1-9
●SELECTING THE EXPOSURE ........................................................1-10
CONVENIENT DIALING METHODS ....................................................... 1-11
1-2
POINTS TO CHECK AND PROGRAMMING AFTER INSTALLATION
After installing the unit and before using it as a fax machine, check the following points and program the required
information.
■ Make sure the fax power switch is turned on
In addition to the main power switch, the rear of the unit also has a power switch for fax functionality. If this power
switch is not turned on, you will not be able to use the unit as a fax machine. Please keep the fax power switch
turned on at all times.
■ Make sure the correct date and time have been set
Make sure the correct date and time have been programmed in the unit (refer to page 3-15 of "Operation manual
(for printer operation and general information)"). If the date and time are wrong, please correct them.
It is important to set the correct date and time because they are used for such features as Timer Transmission
(page 3-4).
■ Program the sender's name and sender's number
Refer to page 8-4 to program the name and fax number of the user of this product using the key operator program.
The programmed name and number are printed at the top of each transmitted fax page. The sender's number is
also used as an identification number when you use the Polling function to request transmission from another fax
machine (refer to page 3-6).
NOTE
You can check your programmed name and number by printing out the Sender List. (Refer to page8-10.)
1-3
1
A LOOK AT THE OPERATION PANEL
Operation panel keys used for fax and keys displayed on the touch panel are explained here.
Touch panel (following page)
The machine status, messages and touch keys are
displayed on the panel. The display will change to
show the status of print, copy, network scaner or
fax according to which of those modes is selected.
Mode select keys (page 2-2)
Use to select the basic modes of the product.
IMAGE SEND key
Press to select fax mode and display the basic
screen of fax mode.
Numeric keys
Use to enter fax numbers, sub-addresses,
passcodes, and numerical settings.
C key (clear key)
Use to clear a mistake when entering fax numbers,
sub-addresses, passcodes, and numerical settings.
One digit is cleared each time you press the key.
When an original is being scanned, this key can also
be used to cancel scanning.
CA key
Use to cancel a transmission or programming
operation. When the key is pressed, the operation
is canceled and you return to the initial screen (next
page).
When sending a fax, this key is also used to cancel
an image setting, paper size setting, or special
function.
key (page 5-5)
This is used to produce tone signals when you are
on a pulse dial line.
Start key (page 2-3)
Press to begin scanning an original for fax
transmission.
NOTE
For information on the parts of the unit that are used for faxing, refer to page 3 of "Operation manual (for copier)". For parts that are
used for both faxing and printing, refer to page 1-4 of "Operation manual (for printer operation and general information)".
1-4
A LOOK AT THE OPERATION PANEL
FAX MODE (CONDITION SETTING SCREEN)
The condition setting screen of fax mode is displayed by pressing the IMAGE SEND key while the print mode, copy
mode, or job status screen appears in the touch panel. In the explanations that follow, it is assumed that the initial
screen that appears after pressing the IMAGE SEND key is the condition setting screen (shown below). If you have
set the display to show the address directory (following page) when the IMAGE SEND key is pressed, touch the
CONDITION SETTINGS key in the address directory to display the condition setting screen.
The key operator program can be used to set the display to show either the condition setting screen (shown below) or
the address directory screen (following page) when the IMAGE SEND key is pressed (refer to page 8-3).
Message display
Messages appear here to indicate the current status
of the machine. When the machine is ready to send,
an icon appears to the left.
Memory and reception mode display
This shows the amount of fax memory that is free
and the currently selected reception mode.
SPEAKER key (page 1-11)
This key is used for dialing with the speaker. During
dialing it changes into the PAUSE key, and after
pressing the SUB ADDRESS key it changes into
the SPACE key.
REDIAL key (page 1-11)
Touch this key to redial the most recently dialed number.
After dialing, this key changes into the NEXT ADDRESS
key.
ADDRESS DIRECTORY key (page 2-5)
This displays the Address Directory screen (next
page). Touch this key when you want to use an auto-
dial number (one-touch dialing or group dialing).
SUB ADDRESS key (page 4-3)
Touch this key to enter a sub-address or passcode.
ADDRESS REVIEW key
When performing a broadcast transmission, touch this
key to check your selected destinations. Your selected
destinations will appear as a list, and the list can be
edited.
Two-sided scanning and verification stamp icon
display (pages 2-5 and 5-2)
Icons appear here when you touch the ORIGINAL
key and select two-sided scanning and/or the
verification stamp function (when the optional
verification stamp unit is installed). The icons can
be touched to open function selection screens.
ORIGINAL key (page 1-8)
Touch this key when you wish to manually set the
size of the original to be scanned, scan both sides
of the original, or use the verification stamp option.
RESOLUTION key (page 1-9)
Touch this key to change the resolution setting for
the original to be scanned. The selected resolution
setting will be highlighted above the key. The initial
factory setting is STANDARD.
SPECIAL MODES key
Touch this key to select one of the following special
functions:
• Timer transmission (page 3-4) • Polling (page 3-6)
• Dual page scan (page 3-10) • Exposure (page 1-10)
• Program (page 3-11) • Memory box (page 3-7)
Special function icon display (page 1-15 of
"Operation manual (for printer operation and
general information)")
When a special function such as polling or dual page
scan is selected, a special function icon appears
here.
SPECIAL MODES
AUTO
READY TO SEND.
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
SUB ADDRESS
ADDRESS REVIEW
REDIALSPEAKER
FAX MEMORY:100%
AUTO RECEPTION
ADDRESS
DIRECTORY
■ Condition setting screen
The display is initially set (factory setting) to show the following condition setting screen as the initial screen.
1-5
1
■ Address directory screen (alphabetically ordered)
If you have set the initial screen to the address directory screen using the key operator program, the initial screen
will appear as follows.
FREQUENT USE ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC GROUP
CONDITION
SETTINGS
READY TO SEND.
SUB ADDRESS
ADDRESS REVIEW
REDIALSPEAKER
A B
C D
E F
G H
A LOOK AT THE OPERATION PANEL
CONDITION SETTINGS key
This displays the condition setting screen (previous
page), which is used to set various conditions.
ABC GROUP key
Touch this key to switch between the alphabetical
index and the group index.
Index keys
One-touch key destinations are stored on each of
these index cards (alphabetical index or group
index). Touch an index key to display the card.
Group indexes make it possible to store one-touch
keys by group with an assigned name for easy
reference. This is done with the custom settings (refer
to pages 6-3 and 6-9). Frequently used one-touch
key destinations can be stored on the FREQUENT
USE card for convenient access.
One-touch key display
This shows the one-touch keys that have been stored
on the selected "index card". The key type is indicated
by the icon at the right. One-touch keys in which a fax
number is stored are indicated by a " " icon. The
display is initially set to show 8 keys. This can be
changed to 6 or 12 using the key operator program.
(Refer to page 8-3.)
Display switching keys
In cases where the one-touch keys cannot all be
displayed on one screen, this shows how many
screens are left. Touch the " " " " keys to move
through the screens.
NOTES
• The screen showed above is the alphabetical address directory. If desired, the initial screen can be set to the group address
directory (refer to page 8-3).
• If the Network Scanner option has been installed, one-touch keys in which a destination other than a fax number is stored are
indicated by the following icons:
: Scan to E-mail destination
: Scan to FTP destination
: Scan to Desktop destination
1-6
ORIGINALS
ORIGINALS THAT CAN BE FAXED
■ Original sizes
Minimum original size Maximum original size
Using the auto document feeder
11" (width)x31-1/2"* (length)
8-1/2" (width)x5-1/2" (length) *Long documents can be loaded
Using the document glass
5-1/2" (width)x8-1/2" (length)
11" (width)x17" (length)
NOTE
Originals that are not a standard size (5-1/2"x8-1/2", 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R, 8-1/2"x14", 11"x17") can also be faxed.
■ Scanning area of original
Note that the edges of an original cannot be scanned.
Area that cannot be scanned
Far edge
Near edge
Bottom edgeTop edge
Area that cannot be scanned: 0.2" or less at top edge
and 0.2" or less at bottom edge
: Near edge + far edge = 0.2" or less
Faxed document width
Receiving machine's paper width
Reduced size Ratio
11"x17" 8-1/2"x14" 8-1/2"x14" 1 : 0.64 (Area ratio)
11"x17" 8-1/2"x11" 8-1/2"x11"R 1 : 0.5 (Area ratio)
8-1/2"x14" 8-1/2"x11" 8-1/2"x11"R 1 : 0.78 (Area ratio)
A document can also be faxed without reducing its size. In this case, the left and right edges will not be transmitted.
(Refer to page 8-6.)
■ Automatic reduction of faxed document
If the size (width) of the faxed document is greater than the receiving machine's paper size, the size will be
automatically reduced.
1-7
1
LOADING A DOCUMENT
A document can be loaded in the auto document feeder or on the document glass. Multiple-page documents and long
documents can be loaded in the auto document feeder. Single-sheet documents and bound documents that cannot
be loaded in the auto document feeder can be loaded on the document glass.
1
Lift the document glass cover and make sure a
document is not placed on the document glass.
Gently close the cover.
2
Adjust the document guides on the auto document
feeder to the width of the document.
1
Open the document glass cover, and place the
document face down on the document glass.
Gently close the cover.
Original size detector
NOTE
Do not place any objects under the original size detector
plate. Closing the document glass cover with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate
and prevent correct detection of the document size.
3
Align the edges of the document pages and then
insert the stack in the document feeder so that
the first page is face down.
Insert the stack into the auto
document feeder until it
stops. The stack should not
be higher than the indicator
line (maximum 50 pages, or
30 pages for 8-1/2"x14" or
larger documents).
USING THE AUTO DOCUMENT FEEDER
USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS
Regardless of the size of the original, place the original
in the far left corner of the document glass. (Align the
upper left-hand corner of the original with the tip of the
mark.)
Document glass scale
mark
8-1/2"x11"
8-1/2"x11"R
11"x17"
8-1/2"x14"
Document glass scale
mark
5-1/2"x8-1/2"
1-8
MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE
If you load an original that is not a standard size (such as an AB size), or if the size is not detected correctly, you must
touch the ORIGINAL key and set the original size manually. Perform the following steps after loading the document in
the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.
1
Touch the ORIGINAL key.
AUTO 8 X11
1
/
2
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
2
Touch the MANUAL key.
MANUAL
ORIGINAL SIZE
O
2-SIDED
TABLET
SIDED
OKLET
The sizes that can be
selected are displayed.
3
Touch the desired original size key.
REDIAL
OK
OK
INCH
AB
SPEAKER
ORIGINAL SIZE
MANUAL
LONG SIZE
AUTO
5 X8
1
/
2
1
/
2
5 X8 R
1
/
2
1
/
2
8 X11
1
/
2
8 X11R
1
/
2
8 X14
1
/
2
11X17
AUTO is no longer
highlighted. MANUAL and
the original size key you
touched are highlighted.
If you wish to select an AB size, touch the
AB INCH key and then touch the desired
original size key.
REDIAL
OK
OK
B4
A3
B5R
A4
A5
A5R
INCH
AB
A4RB5
SPEAKER
ORIGINAL SIZE
MANUALAUTO
AB is highlighted and AB
size keys are displayed. To
return to the inch palette,
touch the AB
INCH key
once again.
4
Touch the outer OK key.
REDIAL
OK
OK
KER
L
A4
You will return to the initial
screen. (Pressing the inner
OK key in the step above
returns you to step 2.)
5
The selected size appears in the top half of the
ORIGINAL key.
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
A4
■ If you loaded a long original
If you loaded a long (up to 31.5") original in the auto document feeder, touch the
LONG SIZE key in step 3 above.
NOTE
When a long original is loaded, you cannot use the automatic two-sided scanning function.
CHECKING THE SIZE OF A LOADED ORIGINAL
If the loaded original is a standard size*, the size will be detected (automatic original detection)
and displayed in the ORIGINAL key. Make sure that the size has been correctly detected. If
you have loaded a non-standard size original or wish to change the scanning size, you can
follow the steps below to manually set the original scanning size.
AUTO 8 X11
1
/
2
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
OK
LONG SIZE
INCH
AB
NU L
NOTE
You can return to automatic detection by pressing the CA key.
NOTE
*Standard sizes that can be detected are as follows:
5-1/2"x8-1/2", 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R, 8-1/2"x14", 11"x17". If a non-standard size original is loaded (including special sizes),
the closest standard size may be displayed, or the original size may not appear at all.
1-9
1
SELECTING RESOLUTION AND EXPOSURE SETTINGS
After loading an original, you can adjust the resolution and exposure settings to match the condition of the original-for
example, if it has small or faint characters, or if it is a photo. After loading the original in fax mode, adjust the settings
as explained below.
SELECTING THE RESOLUTION
The initial resolution setting is STANDARD. To change the setting, follow these steps:
■ Change the resolution.
1
Touch the RESOLUTION key.
AUTO 8 X11
1
/
2
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
2
Touch the desired resolution key.
STANDARD
FINE
SUPER FINE HALF TONE
ULTRA FINE
The selected key is
highlighted. If you selected
FINE, SUPER FINE, or
ULTRA FINE, you can also
touch the HALF TONE key
to select halftone.
3
Touch the OK key.
DARD
NE
FINE
HALF TONE
OK
FINE
You will return to the initial
screen.
NOTES
• The initial factory resolution setting is Standard. If desired,
you can change the initial setting to a different setting
using the key operator program. (Refer to page 8-3.)
• When using the automatic document feeder, the
resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has
begun.
• Even if you send a document using Fine, Super fine, or
Ultra fine resolution, some receiving fax machines may
not be able to print the document at the same resolution.
■ Resolution settings
Standard
Touch this key if your original consists of
normal-sized characters (like those in
this manual).
Fine
Touch this key if your original has small
characters or diagrams. The original will
be scanned at twice the resolution of the
Standard setting.
Super fine
Touch this key if your original has intri-
cate pictures or diagrams. A higher-qual-
ity image will be produced than with the
Fine setting.
Ultra fine
Touch this key if your original has intri-
cate pictures or diagrams. This setting
gives the best image quality. However,
transmission will take longer than with
the other settings.
Half tone
Touch this key if your original is a photo-
graph or has gradations of color (such as
a color original). This setting will produce
a clearer image than Fine, Super fine, or
Ultra fine used alone. Half tone cannot be
selected if Standard has been selected.
1-10
SELECTING RESOLUTION AND EXPOSURE SETTINGS
SELECTING THE EXPOSURE
The initial exposure setting is AUTO. To change the setting, follow these steps:
■ Change the exposure.
1
Touch the SPECIAL MODES key.
SPECIAL MODES
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
2
Touch the EXPOSURE key.
POLLINGR
EXPOSURE
PAGE
CAN
3
Touch the desired exposure key.
AUTO
DARK
ORIGINAL
LIGHT
ORIGINAL
The selected key is
highlighted.
4
Touch the outer OK key.
OK
OK
LIGHT
You will return to the initial
screen.
Dark Select this setting if your original consists
Original mostly of dark characters.
Auto
This setting automatically adjusts the ex-
posure for light and dark parts of the origi-
nal.
Light Select this setting if your original consists
Original mostly of faint characters.
■ Exposure settings
NOTE
When using the document glass to scan pages an original,
the exposure setting can be changed each time you change
pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the
exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has
begun.
1-11
1
CONVENIENT DIALING METHODS
This product includes an auto-dialing feature to make dialing easier. By programming frequently dialed numbers, you
can call and send documents to these locations by means of a simple dialing operation (refer to page 2-5). There are
two types of auto-dialing: one-touch dialing and group dialing. To program auto-dial numbers, refer to pages 6-3, 6-6.
● One-touch dialing
Simply press a one-touch key and then press the Start
key to dial the programmed location. A name of up to 36
characters can be programmed for the location (a maximum
of 18 characters are displayed). When using F-code
transmission, a sub-address and passcode can also be
programmed (refer to page 4-2).
● Group dialing
Multiple one-touch dial locations can be programmed into
a single one-touch key. This is convenient for successively
sending a document to multiple locations.
• Full fax numbers entered with the numeric keys cannot
be stored in a group dial key. First program the number in
a one-touch key and then store it in a group dial key.
● Redialing
The machine keeps the last fax or voice number dialed
with the numeric keys in memory. You can redial the last
number dialed by simply pressing the REDIAL key.
• If numeric keys were pressed during a phone
conversation, the REDIAL key may not dial the correct
number.
● On-hook dialing
This feature allows you to dial without lifting an extension
phone connected to the machine. Press the SPEAKER
key, listen for the dial tone through the speaker, and then
dial.
• To speak with another person, you must lift the extension
phone connected to the machine when they answer.
• Faxes must be sent manually when using on-hook dialing.
(Refer to page 5-3.)
• On-hook dialing is not possible using a one-touch key
that includes a sub-address and passcode, or a group
dial key.
FREQUENT USE ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRS
CORPO.TPS
SHARP GROUP
SHARP CORPORATION
No.001:SHARP CORPORATION
0666211221
SHARP CORPORATION
FERQUENT USE ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST
CORPO.TPS
SHARP GROUP
No.005:SHARP GROUP
GROUP:025
ADDRESS
DIRECTORY
SUB ADDRESS
REDIALAKER
RY:100%
CEPTION
FAX MEMORY: 100%
AUTO RECEPTION
ADDR
DIRE
SUB
RESPEAKER
NOTES
• A total of 500 one-touch dial and group dial keys can be programmed. (Refer to page 6-2.)
• Programmed one-touch keys and group dial keys are stored on "index cards". A key can be accessed by touching its card.
(Refer to page 1-5.)
• To prevent calling or sending a fax to a wrong number, look carefully at the touch panel and make sure you program the
correct number when programming an auto-dial number. You can also check programmed numbers by printing out an address
list or group list after programming (refer to page 6-14).
Touch the ADDRESS DIRECTORY key in the initial
screen to display the above screen.
Touch the ADDRESS DIRECTORY key in the initial
screen to display the above screen.
2-1
CHAPTER 2
BASIC OPERATIONS
This chapter explains basic operations such as sending faxes.
Page
SENDING A FAX...................................................................................... 2-2
●BASIC PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES................................ 2-2
●TRANSMISSION BY AUTO-DIALING.............................................. 2-5
●TRANSMITTING A TWO-SIDED DOCUMENT ...............................2-5
PRIORITY TRANSMISSION OF A STORED JOB..................................2-6
CANCELING A FAX TRANSMISSION ....................................................2-6
RECEIVING FAXES.................................................................................2-7
●RECEIVING A FAX........................................................................... 2-7
2-2
SENDING A FAX
BASIC PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES
1
Make sure the machine is in fax mode.
When the IMAGE SEND
key light is on, the machine
is in fax mode. If the light is
not on, press the IMAGE
SEND key.
2
Load the original.
Refer to the following pages:
• Using the auto document feeder: Page 1-7
• Using the document glass: Page 1-7
If you are using the document glass to send multiple
pages, load the first page first.
NOTE
You cannot load documents in both the auto document
feeder and on the document glass and send them in a
single fax transmission. If documents are loaded in both
the auto document feeder and on the document glass, only
the document in the auto document feeder will be scanned
and transmitted.
3
Check the original size.
AUTO 8 X11
1
/
2
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
If you loaded a non-
standard size document or
the document size was not
correctly detected, touch
the ORIGINAL key and set
the document size. (Refer to
page 1-8.)
4
If needed, adjust the resolution setting.
(Refer to page 1-9.)
AUTO 8 X11
1
/
2
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
5
If needed, adjust the exposure setting.
(Refer to page 1-10.)
POLLING
EXPOSURE
DUAL PAGE
SCAN
SPECIAL MODES
SRANDARD
RESOLUTION
6
Dial the fax number.
The number that you
entered appears in the
message display. If it is not
correct, press the C key and
re-enter the number. You
can also use the REDIAL
key (page 1-11) or an auto-
dial number (2-5).
Entering a pause.
ADDRES
DIRECTO
SUB ADD
NEXT ADDPAUSE
MEMORY:100%
TO RECEPTION
If you need to insert a pause
between digits to access an
outside line or dial an
international number, touch
the PAUSE key in the upper
right-hand corner of the
screen.
Each time you touch the PAUSE key, a hyphen ("-")
appears and a 2-second pause* is inserted.
After entering a number, you can also touch the PAUSE
key to enter a hyphen, and then enter another number
using the numeric keys or a one-touch key. This connects
the numbers together (Chain dialing).
* The duration of each pause can be changed with the
key operator program. (Refer to page 8-4.)
2-3
2
SENDING A FAX
Using the auto document feeder
7
Press the START key.
Scanning begins.
If a job is not in progress
and the telephone line is
not being used, the
destination is called after
the first page is scanned.
Transmission takes place
as the document pages
are being scanned.
(This is called "Quick on-line"-refer to the following page.)
If there is a previously stored job or a job is in progress, or
if the line is being used, all pages of the document are
scanned into memory and stored as a transmission job.
(This is called memory transmission: the destination is
automatically called and the document transmitted after
previously stored jobs are completed.)
If scanning is completed normally, the machine makes a
beep sound to inform you that the transmission job is stored
and JOB STORED appears in the message display.
NOTES
• Canceling transmission
To cancel transmission while SCANNING ORIGINAL... appears in the display or before the READ-END key is pressed, press
the C key or the CA key. To cancel a transmission job that is already stored, press the JOB STATUS key and cancel the job
as explained on page 2-6.
• If the machine makes two beeps during or at the end of transmission and an error message appears in the message display,
refer to page 7-3 to fix the problem.
• If the power is turned off or a power failure occurs while a document is being scanned in the auto document feeder, the
machine will stop and a document jam will occur. After power is restored, remove the document as explained on page 29 of
"Operation manual (for copier)".
Using the document glass
7
Press the START key.
The original is scanned
and the READ-END key
appears.
8
If you have another page to scan, change pages
and then press the START key.
Repeat this sequence until all pages have been scanned.
You can change the resolution and exposure settings
as needed for each page (refer to pages 1-9 and 1-10).
If no action is taken for one minute, scanning
automatically ends and the transmission job is stored.
9
After the final page is scanned, touch the READ-
END key.
READ-END
L. (Pg.No. 3)
ESS [READ-END].
The machine makes a beep
sound to inform you that the
transmission job is stored
and JOB STORED appears
in the message display.
(The destination is
automatically called and the
document transmitted after
previously stored jobs are
completed.)
Open the document glass cover and remove the
document.
2-4
■ Quick On-line
When you use the auto document feeder to send a multi-page document and there are no previously stored jobs
waiting or in progress (and the line is not being used), the machine dials the destination after the first page is
scanned and begins transmitting scanned pages while the remaining pages are being scanned. This transmission
method is called Quick On-line. The messages SCANNING ORIGINAL and SENDING both appear until scanning
of the final page is completed.
If the receiving party is busy, the transmission will switch to a memory transmission. (Refer to the following section,
"Storing transmission jobs (memory transmission)".)
NOTES
• The machine is initially set (factory setting) to perform Quick On-line transmission. If desired, you can turn off this function
with the key operator program (refer to page 8-7).
• When a document is transmitted using the following methods, the job will be stored in memory (Quick On-line transmission
will not be performed):
• Sending from the document glass • Broadcast transmission (page 3-2) • Timer transmission (page 3-4)
• F-code transmission (Chapter 4)
■ Storing transmission jobs (memory transmission)
When a document is sent from the document glass, or when the telephone line is in use, the document is scanned
into memory and then automatically transmitted after previously stored transmission jobs are completed. This
means that transmission jobs can be stored in memory by performing a transmission operation while the machine
is occupied with another transmission/reception operation. This is called memory transmission, and up to 50 jobs
can be stored in memory at once, including the job currently being executed. After transmission, the scanned
document data is cleared from memory.
NOTES
• You can check transmission jobs stored in memory in the job status screen. (Refer to page 1-14 of "Operation manual (for
printer operation and general information)".)
• If the memory becomes full while a document is being scanned, a message will appear in the display. You can cancel the
transmission by touching the CANCEL key, or send only the pages already scanned by touching the SEND key. The page
that was being scanned when the memory became full will be cleared from memory. If the memory becomes full while
scanning the first page of a document, the transmission job is automatically canceled.
• The number of jobs that can be stored will depend on the number of pages in each job and the transmission conditions. The
number of storable jobs will increase if the optional expansion memory (8 MB) is installed.
■ If the receiving party is busy
If the receiving party is busy, the transmission is temporarily canceled and then automatically re-attempted after
a brief interval (two attempts are made at an interval of 3 minutes*). If you do not want the machine to re-attempt
the transmission, cancel the job in the job status screen. (Refer to page 2-6.)
*This setting can be changed with the key operator program (page 8-7).
■ If a transmission error occurs
The machine is initially set to not re-attempt transmission if transmission does not end normally due to a line error
or other reason, or if the other machine does not begin reception within 45 seconds after the connection is
established. If desired, you can use the key operator program to set the machine to automatically re-attempt
transmissions when a transmission error occurs (page 8-7). The machine also supports error correction mode
(ECM), and is initially set to automatically resend any parts of a document that were distorted due to noise on the
line or other reasons (page 8-5).
■ Image rotation
The machine is initially set to rotate a vertically-placed document 90° so that it is oriented horizontally before
transmission (8-1/2"x11" originals are rotated to 8-1/2"x11"R and 5-1/2"x8-1/2"R originals are rotated to 5-1/2"x8-
1/2"). 8-1/2"x11"R originals and 5-1/2"x8-1/2" originals are not rotated. If desired, you can turn this function off
with the key operator program as explained on page 8-6.
NOTE
When using the document glass, be sure to orient 5-1/2"x8-1/2" originals vertically. If oriented horizontally (5-1/2"x8-1/2"
orientation), the original size will be detected as 8-1/2"x11", and you will need to touch the ORIGINAL key and set the original
size to 5-1/2"x8-1/2"R (by touching the 5-1/2"x8-1/2"R key). (Refer to page 1-8.)
SENDING A FAX
2-5
2
SENDING A FAX
TRANSMITTING A TWO-SIDED DOCUMENT
A two-sided document can be automatically transmitted using the auto document feeder. Follow the steps below to
automatically send a two-sided document.
1
Make sure the machine is in fax mode and then
load the document in the auto document feeder
(page 1-7).
2
Touch the ORIGINAL key.
AUTO 8 X11
1
/
2
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
When you touch the
ORIGINAL key, check the
original size displayed in the
key.
3
Touch the 2-SIDED BOOKLET key or the 2-
SIDED TABLET key as appropriate for the
original you loaded.
AUTO MANUAL
2-SIDED
BOOKLET
2-SIDED
TABLET
SPEAKER
ORIGINAL SIZE
If necessary, touch the
MANUAL key and set the
original size. (Page 1-8)
4
Touch the OK key.
REDIAL
OK
KER
ED
L
You will return to the initial
screen.
A two-sided original icon appears next to the ORIGINAL key.
(Example: The icon that appears when the 2-SIDED
BOOKLET key is touched.)
AUTO 8 X11
1
/
2
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
5
Continue from step 4 of "Basic Procedure for
Sending Faxes" (pages 2-2 to 2-3)
TRANSMISSION BY AUTO-DIALING
To send a document by auto-dialing (one-touch dialing or group dialing) instead of entering a full fax number with the
numeric keys, follow the steps below. To use an auto-dial destination, you must first program the full fax number and
name of the destination. Refer to page 1-11 for information on auto-dialing and pages 6-3, 6-6 for information on
programming auto-dial destinations.
1
Perform steps 1 through 5 of "Basic Procedure
for Sending Faxes" (page 2-2).
2
Touch the ADDRESS DIRECTORY key.
ADDRESS
DIRECTORY
SUB ADDRESS
REDIALAKER
Y:100%
EPTION
The address directory
screen appears.
3
Touch the one-touch key for the desired
destination.
FREQUENT USE ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRS
T.P.S.
SHARP GROUP
S
SHARP CORPORATION
READY TO SEND.
Refer to page 1-5 for
information on using the
address directory screen.
The key you touched is
highlighted. If you touch the
wrong key, touch the key
again to cancel the
selection. The key display
will return to normal.
4
Continue from step 7 of "Basic Procedure for
Sending Faxes" (page 2-3).
NOTES
• Booklets and tablets
Two-sided originals that are bound at the side are booklets, and two-sided originals
that are bound at the top are tablets.
• Two-sided scanning turns off after the document is stored in memory. Pressing the
CA key will also cancel two-sided scanning.
Booklet Tablet
2-6
1
Press the JOB STATUS key.
2
Touch the FAX JOB key.
FAX JOB
DETAIL
PRIORITY
STOP/DELETE
WAITING
WAITING
WAITING
3
Touch the job key of the transmission job to
which you wish to give priority.
The touched key is highlighted.
4
Touch the PRIORITY key.
X JOB
PRIORITY
STOP/DELETE
AITING
AITING
AITING
The selected job moves up
to the next position after the
job currently being
executed.
When the current job is completed, execution begins of
the job selected in step 3.
NOTES
If the job currently being executed is a broadcast
transmission (page 3-2) or a serial polling operation (3-5),
the priority job will be executed after the call to the current
destination is completed. When the priority job is
completed, the remaining broadcast or polling destinations
are called. However, if the priority job is also a broadcast
transmission or serial polling operation, the job is begun
after the current broadcast or serial polling job is completed.
PRIORITY TRANSMISSION OF A STORED JOB
If you have an urgent transmission job and multiple transmission jobs have already been stored, you can give priority
to the urgent job so that it will be transmitted immediately after the job currently being executed. This is done from the
job status screen. For details on using the job status screen, refer to page 1-14 of "Operation manual (for printer
operation and general information)".
1
Press the JOB STATUS key.
2
Touch the FAX JOB key.
FAX JOB
DETAIL
PRIORITY
STOP/DELETE
WAITING
WAITING
WAITING
3
Touch the job key of the transmission job you
wish to cancel.
The touched key is highlighted.
4
Touch the STOP/DELETE key.
X JOB
PRIORITY
STOP/DELETE
AITING
AITING
AITING
A message appears to
confirm the cancellation.
Touch the YES key to delete
the selected job key and
cancel the transmission.
NOTES
• If you do not wish to cancel the transmission, touch the
NO key.
• You can verify a canceled transmission job in the
transaction report. (Refer to page 7-2.)
"CANCEL" will appear in the Type/Note column.
CANCELING A FAX TRANSMISSION
You can cancel a transmission job that is in progress or has been stored. Cancellation is done from the fax job status
screen. (Printing of a received fax cannot be canceled.)
2-7
2
RECEIVING FAXES
When another fax machine sends a fax to your machine, your machine will ring*, automatically receive the fax, and
begin printing (automatic reception).
NOTES
• You can store a transmission job while fax reception is in progress (refer to page 2-4).
• If an extension phone is connected to the machine, you can answer using the extension phone and then begin fax reception
(manual reception). This allows you to use the line for both voice calls and faxes. (Refer to page 5-5.)
• To receive faxes, sufficient paper must be loaded in the paper tray. Refer to pages 1-16 to 1-24 of "Operation manual (for
printer operation and general information)" to load appropriate paper. Incoming faxes will be automatically adjusted to the
orientation of the printing paper, so there is no need to load both horizontally and vertically oriented paper.
However, if you receive a fax that is smaller than 8-1/2"x11" size, the paper size used to print the fax will depend on how the
original was oriented (vertically or horizontally) in the sending fax machine.
RECEIVING A FAX
1
The machine will ring* and reception will
automatically begin.
NOTES
• If the fax is being sent manually and you have connected
an extension phone to the machine, you can lift the phone
before reception begins to talk with the other person.
■ If received data cannot be printed
If the machine runs out of paper or toner, or a paper jam occurs, print and copy jobs
that are in progress will be held in memory until printing becomes possible. The jobs
are automatically printed when printing capability is restored. When received data
is held in memory, the DATA light next to the IMAGE SEND key blinks.
You can also use the transfer function to have another fax machine print the received
data (refer to page 3-12).
NOTE
If the machine makes a double beep sound during reception or at the end of reception and an error message appears in the
display, clear the error as explained on page 7-3.
2
Reception ends.
When reception ends, the
machine makes a "beep"
sound.
The output tray for the
printed fax varies depending
on the output unit installed
on the machine.
NOTES
• If the machine has multiple output trays, the key operator
program can be used to change the output tray for fax
reception (page 8-8).
• If desired, you can set the machine to output a blank
sheet of paper after printing the last page of each received
fax job. This will help you distinguish where one reception
ends and another begins.
*Number of rings
The machine has been set to ring twice before begin-
ning automatic reception. You can use the key op-
erator program to change the number of rings to any
number from 0 to 15. (Refer to page 8-8.)
If the number of rings is set to 0, the machine will
receive faxes without ringing.
3-1
CHAPTER 3
USING CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 1
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
This chapter explains fax features for special situations and purposes.
Please read those sections that are of interest to you.
Page
SENDING THE SAME DOCUMENT
TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS IN A SINGLE OPERATION
(BROADCAST TRANSMISSION) ............................................................ 3-2
●USING BROADCAST TRANSMISSION .......................................... 3-3
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(TIMER TRANSMISSION) ....................................................................... 3-4
●SETTING UP A TIMER TRANSMISSION........................................3-4
TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION USING THE POLLING FUNCTION
....3-5
●USING THE POLLING FUNCTION..................................................3-6
●USING POLLING MEMORY............................................................. 3-7
OWN NUMBER SENDING ......................................................................3-9
FAXING A DIVIDED ORIGINAL (DUAL PAGE SCAN)...........................3-10
PROGRAMMING FREQUENTLY USED OPERATIONS........................3-11
●USING A PROGRAM........................................................................3-11
TRANSFERRING RECEIVED FAXES
TO ANOTHER MACHINE WHEN PRINTING IS NOT POSSIBLE .........3-12
●USING THE TRANSFER FUNCTION.............................................. 3-12
3-2
SENDING THE SAME DOCUMENT TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS IN A SINGLE OPERATION
(BROADCAST TRANSMISSION)
This feature is used to send a document to multiple destinations in a single operation. The document to be transmitted
is scanned into memory and then successively transmitted to the selected destinations. This feature is convenient for
such purposes as distributing a report to company branches in different locations. Up to 300 destinations can be
selected. When transmission to all destinations has been completed, the document is automatically cleared from
memory.
NOTES
• If you frequently use broadcasting to send documents to the same group of destinations, it is convenient to program those
destinations into a group key. A group key is a one-touch key in which multiple destinations are programmed. The procedure
for programming group keys is explained on page 6-6.
• When using a group key to send a fax, the destinations programmed in the group key are counted as broadcasting destinations.
For example, if five destinations are programmed in a group key and the key is touched for a broadcast transmission, the
broadcast transmission will have five destinations.
Beep
The document is scanned
into memory
Reception
Reception
Reception
Destination A
(recipient)
Successive
transmission
Beep
Beep
Sender
Destination B
(recipient)
Destination C
(recipient)
Successively enter
destination numbers
100%
PTION
ADDRESS
DIRECTRY
SUB ADDRESS
NEXT ADDRESSSE
3-3
3
USING BROADCAST TRANSMISSION
SENDING THE SAME DOCUMENT TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS IN A SINGLE OPERATION (BROADCAST TRANSMISSION)
1
Follow steps 1 through 5 in "Basic Procedure
for Sending Faxes". (Refer to page 2-2.)
2
Dial the fax number of the first destination or
touch an auto-dial key (one-touch key or group
key). (Refer to page 2-5.)
CORPO.TPS
SHARP GROUP
SPE
An auto-dial key is
highlighted when touched.
3
Touch the NEXT ADDRESS key and then dial
the fax number of the next destination or touch
an auto-dial key.
CONDITION
SETTINGS
SUB ADDRESS
NEXT ADDRESSSE
Repeat this step for each of
the remaining destinations.
NOTES
• If you enter an incorrect number
If you make a mistake while entering a number, press
the C key and then re-enter the correct digit(s).
If you have already completed entry of a fax number, you
can delete the number using steps 4 and 5.
• If you select an incorrect auto-dial key
Simply touch the incorrect key one more time to cancel
the selection.
• The NEXT ADDRESS key only needs to be pressed when
successively dialing fax numbers with the numeric keys.
Example:
XXXX NEXT ADDRESS XXXX
Dial
Dial
Cannot be omitted.
XXXX NEXT ADDRESS One-touch NEXT ADDRESS One-touch
Dial
Can be omitted Can be omitted
If desired, you can use the key operator program to set
the machine so that the NEXT ADDRESS key must always
be pressed (refer to page 8-3).
4
Touch the ADDRESS REVIEW key to display the
list of destinations.
CONDITION
SETTINGS
SUB ADDRESS
ADDRESS REVIEW
When the ADDRESS
REVIEW key is pressed,
only the entered and
selected destinations are
displayed.
5
Check the destinations.
0666211221
ADDRESS REVIEW
SELECT ADDRESS TO DELETE.
CORPO.TPS
SHARP GROUP
When you have finished
checking the destinations,
touch the OK key to return
to the screen of step 4.
YES
0666211221
DELETE THE ADDRESS?
NO
If you wish to delete a
destination, touch the
displayed one-touch key. A
message will appear to
confirm the deletion. Touch
YES and the destination will
be deleted from the
destination list. Touching NO
will close the message box.
6
Continue from step 7 of the basic procedure for
sending faxes (page 2-3).
NOTE
To cancel a broadcast transmission
To cancel a broadcast transmission when selecting
destinations, press the CA key.
3-4
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(TIMER TRANSMISSION)
This feature enables you to set up a transmission or polling operation to be performed automatically at a specified time
up to a week in advance. This allows you to take advantage of off-peak phone rates without having to be there when
the transmission is performed. A combined total of 50 timer transmission and memory transmission jobs can be stored.
NOTES
• After a timer transmission is performed, the information (image, destination, etc.) is automatically cleared from memory.
• To perform a timer transmission, the document must be scanned into memory. It is not possible to leave the document in the
auto document feeder or on the document glass and have it scanned at the specified time of transmission.
• To set the date and time in the machine, refer to page 3-15 of "Operation manual (for printer operation and general information)".
• Only one polling timer operation can be set up at a time. If you wish to set up multiple timer polling operations, combine the
machines to be polled into a serial polling operation with a timer setting. (Refer to the next page.)
1
In fax mode, touch the SPECIAL MODES key.
SPECIAL MODES
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
2
Touch the TIMER key.
SPECIAL MODES
TIMER
The timer transmission
screen appears.
3
Select the day of the week. (Touch the key or
the key until the desired day is selected.)
DAY OF THE WEEK
IMER
The initial setting is "---" (no
selection). If you select this
setting, the transmission will
be performed as soon as
the specified time arrives.
SETTING UP A TIMER TRANSMISSION
4
Select the time. (Touch the key or the key
until the desired time appears.)
30
CANCEL
TIME
HH.
mm.
Select the time in 24-hour
format.
Example:
11:00 P.M.
23:00
If you continue touching the
keys, the numbers
will change quickly.
5
Touch the outer OK key.
OK
mm.
30
OK
CANCEL
You will return to the screen
in step 1. A timer icon will
appear to the right of the
SPECIAL MODES key.
To cancel the timer
transmission, touch the
CANCEL key.
6
Perform the desired transmission operation.
The steps that follow will depend on the type of
transmission. The following operations can be performed
in a timer transmission:
• Normal transmission (page 2-2)
• Broadcast transmission (page 3-2)
• Polling (next page)
• Serial polling (next page)
• F-code polling (page 4-5)
• F-code confidential transmission (page 4-6)
• F-code relay request transmission (page 4-8)
NOTES
• Other operations can be performed after a timer transmission is set up. If another operation is in progress when the specified
time arrives, the timer transmission will begin when the job in progress is completed.
• If a timer transmission job is given priority in the fax job status screen (page 2-6), the time setting will be canceled and the job
performed as soon as the current job is completed.
3-5
3
TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION USING
THE POLLING FUNCTION
This function can only be used if the other machine is a Super G3 or G3 machine and supports the polling function.
The polling function allows your machine to call a fax machine that has document data set and initiate reception of the
document. You can also perform the reverse operation: scan a document into the memory of your machine so that
another machine can call your machine and initiate reception of the document.
This function whereby your machine calls the sending machine and asks the sending machine to begin transmission
of a loaded document is called the polling function. Scanning a document into memory and automatically sending it
when the receiving machine calls and "polls" your machine is called memory polling.
NOTE
For information on polling and polling memory using F-codes, refer to page 4-4. This section only explains normal polling and
normal polling memory.
■ Polling
This function allows your machine to call a sending machine and initiate reception of a document loaded in that
machine. A timer setting can also be established to have the operation take place at night or another specified
time (refer to the previous page).
The other machine
Document data previously
scanned into memory
Your machine
Polling (ask other machine
to send document)
Document data is automatically
sent to your machine
Permits polling
Group keys and the broadcast transmission function (page 3-2) can be used to successively poll multiple fax
machines in a single operation (serial polling). Up to 300 machines can be polled. In this case, the sequence of
operations in the above diagram is successively repeated for each sending machine selected.
NOTE
The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of polling transmission.
■ Polling memory
This feature allows your machine to automatically send a document previously scanned into memory when another
machine calls and polls your machine.
Document data previously
scanned into memory
Polling
(request transmission)
Document data is
automatically sent to
other machine
Permits polling
Your machine The other machine
3-6
TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION USING THE POLLING FUNCTION
USING THE POLLING FUNCTION
A document should not be loaded in the machine when the following operation is performed. When used in conjunction
with the timer transmission function, only one polling job can be stored.
NOTE
If the other machine has a polling security function (refer to page 3-8), use the key operator program to program your own fax number
(refer to page 8-4), and ask the operator of the other machine to appropriately program your fax number in that machine.
1
Touch the SPECIAL MODES key in fax mode,
and then touch the POLLING key.
POLLING
EXPOSURE
DUAL PAGE
SCAN
SPECIAL MODES
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
The POLLING key is
highlighted and the polling
icon appears.
To cancel polling, touch the
POLLING key once again to
cancel the selection.
2
Touch the OK key.
OK
REDIALAKER
You will return to the initial
screen.
3
Dial the number of the other fax machine or
touch an auto-dial key (one-touch or group key)
(refer to page 2-5).
CORPO.TPS
SHARP GROUP
SPE
If you are performing serial
polling, touch the NEXT
ADDRESS key and repeat
this step. (Page 3-3)
NOTE
When performing serial polling, an auto-dial key that includes
a sub-address or passcode (page 4-2) cannot be selected.
4
When you have finished entering the
destination(s), press the START key.
JOB STORED appears in
the screen.
Your machine prints the
document after receiving it
from the sending machine.
■ Manual polling
A document should not be loaded in the machine when the following operation is performed. Manual polling is
begun on the signal of the other party.
1
Touch the SPEAKER key in fax mode, and dial
the number of the other machine.
ADDR
DIRE
SUB
RESPEAKER
AX MEMORY:100%
AUTO RECEPTION
A one-touch key or the
REDIAL key can also be
used.
If you have connected an
extension phone to the
machine, you can lift the
extension phone and then dial.
2
Touch the SPECIAL MODES key.
SPECIAL MODES
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
3
When you hear the fax tone from the other
machine, press the POLLING key.
POLLINGER
EXPOSURE
L PAGE
SCAN
POLLING appears in the
display.
4
Polling reception begins.
If you lifted an extension phone to dial, replace the
extension phone. Your machine prints the document after
receiving it from the sending machine.
NOTE
Serial polling cannot be performed manually. When polling
reception ends, repeat steps 1 through 4.
NOTE
• To cancel the operation
Press the JOB STATUS key and then cancel the operation as explained on page 2-6.
3-7
3
USING POLLING MEMORY
This function sends a document previously scanned into memory to a receiving machine when the receiving machine
calls and polls your machine. This machine has "memory boxes", which are memory used for such functions as the
normal polling memory function, F-code polling memory, F-code confidential transmission, and F-code relay transmission
(refer to page 4-2). The polling memory function explained here uses a memory box called the "PUBLIC BOX". (If
desired, you can restrict polling to fax machines whose fax number you have programmed in your machine (refer to
page 8-9)).
NOTE
When using the polling memory function, do not set the reception mode to MANUAL. (Page 5-4)
■ Scanning a document into memory (Public Box) for polling memory
This procedure is for scanning a document into the Public Box. If other document data has already been stored in
the Public Box, the new document will be added after that data. If the previously stored data is no longer needed,
delete that data (refer to the following page) before scanning in new document data.
1
In fax mode, load the document in the auto
document feeder or on the document glass
(page 1-7).
2
Touch the SPECIAL MODES key and then the
MEMORY BOX key.
MEMORY BOXPROGRAM
OK
SPECIAL MODES
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
To cancel the operation,
touch the CA key.
3
Touch the DATA STORE key.
POLLIN
DATA STORE PRINT
4
Touch the PUBLIC BOX key.
PUBLIC BOX
This specifies that the
document will be scanned into
the Public Box.
5
Set the original size, resolution, exposure and
other scanning conditions as needed.
6
Press the Start key.
The document is scanned.
If other document data has
previously been stored, the
new data will be added on
after the old data.
If you used the document glass and have another page
to scan, change the pages and then press the Start
key again. Repeat this procedure until all pages have
been scanned, and then press the READ-END key that
appears in the message screen. When the document
data has been stored in the Public Box, JOB STORED
appears on the screen, after which you will return to
the initial screen.
NOTE
To cancel scanning
To cancel scanning of a document while scanning is in
progress, press the C key.
NOTE
The machine has been initially set to automatically clear document data from the Public Box after polling takes place and the
data is sent to the polling machine. You can use the key operator program to change this setting so that the data is not
automatically cleared and polling can take place repeatedly (refer to page 8-9).
TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION USING THE POLLING FUNCTION
3-8
■ Restricting polling access (polling security)
If you wish to prevent unauthorized fax machines from polling your machine, turn on the polling security function.
When this function is turned on, polling permission will only be granted if the fax number of the polling machine (as
programmed in that machine) matches one of the fax numbers you have programmed in your machine as passcode
numbers. Up to 10 fax numbers can be programmed as passcode numbers.
To turn on the polling security function and program passcode numbers, use the key operator program as explained
on page 8-9.
NOTES
• If you do not use the polling security function, the document will be sent to any fax machine that polls you.
• When using the polling security function, even if you have programmed the fax number of a another machine in your machine,
polling will not be possible if the operator of the other machine has not programmed the same fax number in that machine.
■ Printing document data in the Public Box
When document data is stored in the Public Box, an icon will appear to the right of the PUBLIC BOX key. To
check the stored data, you can print it out.
1
Touch the SPECIAL MODES key in fax mode
and then touch the MEMORY BOX key.
MEMORY BOXPROGRAM
OK
SPECIAL MODES
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
2
Touch the PRINT DATA key.
POLLING MEMORY
ORE PRINT DATA
3
Touch the PUBLIC BOX key.
PUBLIC BOX
Touching the CANCEL key
will return you to the screen
of step 2.
4
Press the START key.
The message screen
appears and the Public Box
data is stored as a print job.
To cancel printing, touch the
CANCEL key.
■ Deleting document data from the Public Box
This procedure is used to delete document data from the Public Box when it is no longer needed.
1
Touch the SPECIAL MODES key in fax mode
and then touch the MEMORY BOX key.
MEMORY BOXPROGRAM
OK
SPECIAL MODES
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
2
Touch the DELETE DATA key.
MEMORY
DATA DELETE DATA
3
Touch the PUBLIC BOX key.
PUBLIC BOX
The message screen
appears.
4
Touch the YES key.
YES
PUBLIC BOX
DELETE THE DATA IN THE MEMORY BOX?
NO
All data in the Public Box is
deleted and you return to
the screen of step 2.
If you touch the NO key, you
will return to the screen of
step 2 without deleting the
data.
TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION USING THE POLLING FUNCTION
3-9
3
OWN NUMBER SENDING
This function prints the date, time, your programmed name, your programmed fax number, and the transmitted page
number at the top center of each page that you fax. All pages that you fax include this information. (Page 8-7)
Example of fax page printed out by the receiving machine
MAY-11-2001-FRI 03:00 PM SHARP PLANNING DIV. FAX No. 0666211221 P. 001/001
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) Date and time: programmed in the custom settings (page 3-15 of "Operation manual (for printer operation and
general information)").
(2) Own name: programmed with the key operator program (page 8-4).
(3) Own fax number: programmed with the key operator program (page 8-4).
(4) Transmitted page number: 3-digit number appearing in the format, "page number/total pages" (only the page
number appears if you use manual transmission or Quick On-Line transmission). If desired, you can use the
key operator program to omit the page number (refer to page 8-6).
■ Position of sender's information
The key operator program can be used to select whether the sender's information is added outside the original
data or inside the data (page 8-7). The initial factory setting is outside the data.
Outside scanned data Inside scanned data
None of the transmitted image
is cut off; however, the
transmitted data is longer than
the scanned data, and thus
when both the sender and the
receiver use the same size of
paper, the printed fax may
either be reduced or split up
and printed on two pages.
The top edge of the scanned
data will be cut off by the
sender's information; however,
when both the sender and the
receiver use the same size of
paper, the printed fax will
neither be reduced nor split
up and printed on two pages.
Direction of transmission
Direction of transmission
Length of
scanned data
Length of
transmitted data
Length of
scanned data
Length of
transmitted data
3-10
FAXING A DIVIDED ORIGINAL (DUAL PAGE SCAN)
When an open book is scanned and faxed, you can use this function to divide the two open pages of the book into two
separate fax pages.
This function can only be used when the original is scanned using the document glass.
Book or sheet original
When page division is set,
the original is divided
into two pages when
scanned into memory
Printed out as
two separate pages
Your machine The other machine
Transmission to
other machine
Scanned original size
11"x17"
Transmitted document
Two 81/2"x11" pages
[Example]
1
Touch the SPECIAL MODES key in fax mode
and then touch DUAL PAGE SCAN.
POLLING
EXPOSURE
DUAL PAGE
SCAN
SPECIAL MODES
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
2
Touch the OK key.
OK
REDIALAKER
You will return to the initial
screen.
3
Place the original on the document glass (page
1-7), and perform the transmission operation.
If you have more originals to scan after pressing the
Start key and scanning the first original, change originals
and repeat scanning until all originals have been
scanned. When finished, press the READ-END key that
appears in the message display. (Page 2-3)
NOTES
• When you set Dual Page Scan, the original size is fixed
at 11"x17". Automatic original size detection will not
function.
When the original on the document glass is scanned, it
will be divided at the book mark on the document glass
scale, with one page on the left side of the book mark
and one page on the right side.
• To cancel Dual Page Scan...
Press the CA key.
■ Selecting Dual Page Scan
Follow the steps below and then send the fax.
3-11
3
PROGRAMMING FREQUENTLY USED OPERATIONS
This function allows you to store the steps of an operation, including the destination and scanning settings, into a
program. When you want to send a document to that destination, you can simply call up the program and the steps will
be performed automatically. This function is convenient when you frequently send documents, such as a daily report,
to the same destination. Up to eight programs can be stored.
NOTES
• A program differs from a timer transmission (page 3-4) in that it is not cleared from memory after transmission takes place. A
program thus allows you to repeatedly perform the same type of transmission. Note, however, that programs do not allow you
to establish a timer setting for transmission.
• With the exception of polling, reception operations cannot be stored in a program.
Programs can be stored using the custom settings, and a name up to 18 characters long can be assigned.
For information on storing, editing, and deleting programs, refer to page 6-8.
The following settings can be stored in a program:
• Destination fax number • Polling • Dual Page Scan • Resolution and exposure
Auto-dial keys (one-touch or group keys) are used to store the destination fax number. A full number cannot be
entered using the numeric keys. When storing a broadcast transmission or serial polling operation in a program, up to
300 destination fax numbers can be stored.
USING A PROGRAM
1
In fax mode, load the document (page 1-7).
Do not load a document if you are performing a polling
operation.
If you are going to use Dual Page Scan (previous page),
place the document on the document glass.
2
Touch the SPECIAL MODES key and then the
PROGRAM key.
PROGRAMEXPOSURE
SPECIAL MODES
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
The program selection
screen appears.
3
Touch the program key you wish to execute.
Make sure the key is highlighted and then touch
the OK key.
OG.
GRAM1
OK
The program key you touched
is selected and you return to
the screen of step 2.
The PROGRAM key is
highlighted.
4
Touch the OK key.
OK
REDIALAKER
You will return to the initial
screen.
5
If needed, set the original size and other
settings, and then press the Start key.
Transmission takes place according to the program.
NOTE
Select settings that cannot be stored in a program in step
5. These include original size, two-sided scanning,
verification stamp function (if the optional verification stamp
unit is installed), and a timer setting.
3-12
TRANSFERRING RECEIVED FAXES TO ANOTHER
MACHINE WHEN PRINTING IS NOT POSSIBLE
When printing is not possible because of a paper, toner, or other problem, you can transfer received faxes to another
fax machine if that machine has been appropriately programmed in your machine. This function can be conveniently
used in an office or other workplace where there is another fax machine connected to a different phone line. When a
fax has been received to memory, the DATA light to the right of the IMAGE SEND key blinks.
Printing not possible because of
paper or toner problem
"Transfer" instruction
using custom settings
Printing
Fax transmission
to your machine
Automatic dialing and
transmission to programmed
transfer destination
Your machine
Other machine
Transfer destination
NOTES
• When the transfer instruction is issued, all data that has been received in memory to that point is transferred. The page that
was being printed when the problem occurred and all following pages will be transferred.
• Data cannot be selected for transfer. Data received to a confidential memory box (page 4-6) cannot be transferred.
• The result of transfer is indicated on an activity report (page 7-3).
USING THE TRANSFER FUNCTION
■ Program the fax number of the transfer destination
Use the key operator program to program the number of the transfer destination (page 8-8). Only one fax number
can be programmed. The transfer function cannot be used unless a number is programmed.
■ Transferring received data
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key.
2
Touch the FAX DATA FORWARD key.
CLOCK
FAX DATA
FORWARD
MODE
INT
If there is no data to transfer
or a transfer number has not
been programmed (page 8-8),
a message will appear and
transfer will not be possible.
3
Touch the YES key.
YES
TRANSFER THE RECEIVED DATA TO ANOTHER
DEVICE?
NO
The machine automatically
dials the transfer destination
programmed with the key
operator program and
begins transfer.
If you do not wish to transfer
the data, touch the NO key.
NOTES
• To cancel transfer
Press the JOB STATUS key, and then cancel the transfer
in the same way as a transmission (refer to page 2-6).
The data that was going to be transferred will return to
print standby status in your machine.
• If the transfer is not possible because the line is busy or
a transmission error occurs, the data returns to print
standby status in your machine.
4-1
CHAPTER 4
USING CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 2
TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES
This chapter explains F-code transmission, which gives you a conve-
nient means of performing advanced operations such as relay broadcast
transmission and confidential transmission. Normally these functions re-
quire that the other fax machine be a similar Sharp machine; however, F-
code transmission enables these functions to be performed with any other
machine that supports F-code transmission. Please read those sections
which are of interest to you.
Page
TRANSMISSION BETWEEN MACHINES SUPPORTING F-CODES....4-2
●MEMORY BOXES AND SUB-ADDRESSES/PASSCODES
REQUIRED FOR F-CODE TRANSMISSION...................................4-2
●ENTERING A SUB-ADDRESS AND PASSCODE
FOR A MEMORY BOX IN THE OTHER MACHINE ........................4-3
●CREATING A MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE TRANSMISSION .....4-3
F-CODE POLLING MEMORY..................................................................4-4
●USING F-CODE POLLING MEMORY .............................................4-4
●PROCEDURE FOR F-CODE POLLING ..........................................4-5
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION ........................................... 4-6
●F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION.................................... 4-6
●PRINTING A DOCUMENT RECEIVED
TO AN F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL MEMORY BOX ..........................4-7
F-CODE RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION ..................................4-8
●USING THE F-CODE RELAY BROADCAST FUNCTION
(your machine is the relay machine) ................................................4-9
●USING THE F-CODE RELAY REQUEST FUNCTION
(your machine requests a relay broadcast) .....................................4-9
4-2
TRANSMISSION BETWEEN MACHINES
SUPPORTING F-CODES
This machine supports the "F-code" standard as established by the ITU-T*.
The F-code standard makes it possible to perform special operations such as relay broadcast and confidential
transmission, which previously could only be performed with another similar Sharp machine, with any other machine
that also supports F-codes.
Before using any of the functions explained in this chapter, verify that the other fax machine supports F-codes and the
function that you wish to use (the other machine may use a different name for the function).
*The ITU-T is a United Nations organization that establishes communications standards. It is a department of the International
Telecommunication Union (ITU), which coordinates global telecommunications networks and services.
MEMORY BOXES AND SUB-ADDRESSES/PASSCODES
REQUIRED FOR F-CODE TRANSMISSION
Fax machines that support F-code transmission enable the creation of a "memory box" in the unit's memory. The
memory box is used to store documents received from another fax machine or documents to be sent when another
machine polls that machine. Up to 100 memory boxes can be created for a variety of purposes, and a name can be
assigned to each box. A "sub-address" that indicates the box's location in memory must be programmed, and if
desired, a passcode can also be programmed to control access to the box.
0001
SHARP
11245
Document
Group 1
7732123
3321 1115
7732123
7732123
Product Planning
Dept.
1115
Product
Planning
Dept.
3333
Department
Manager
11111111
4444
Public Box*
123456
010
Section
Manager
Reports
MEMORY
Sub-address (location in memory)
Select any number up to 20 digits.
Box name (used to manage
boxes in your machine)
Select a name of up to 18
characters.
Passcode (key)
Select any number up to 20 digits.
(Not required)
1115
Product Planning
Dept.
*The Public Box is used for normal serial polling (page 3-5).
When communication occurs involving a memory box, the communication will only take place if the sub-address and
passcode that the other machine sends match the sub-address and passcode programmed in your machine for that
box. Therefore, to allow communication, you must inform the other party of the sub-address and passcode of the
memory box. Likewise, to send a document to a memory box in another machine or use polling to retrieve a document
from that memory box, you must know the sub-address and passcode of that memory box.
Memory boxes are managed in this machine not only by sub-addresses and passcodes (which are number sequences), but
also by names. For example, for the memory box with the sub-address, "7732123", and the passcode, "1115", you could
assign the name "Product Planning". Assigning names makes it easier to manage memory boxes. (Note that you do not need
to inform the other party of a memory box name; the other party only needs to know the sub-address and passcode.)
This machine uses the term "sub-address" for the location of the memory box and the term "passcode" for the
password that allows communication; however, other fax machines of other manufacturers may use different terms.
When asking the other party for a sub-address and passcode, you may find it useful to refer to the 3-character
alphabetical terminology used by the ITU-T.
This machine ITU-T
F-code polling memory box F-code Confidential box
F-code Relay Broadcast Function
Sub-address SEP SUB SUB
Passcode PWD SID SID
4-3
4
CREATING A MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE TRANSMISSION
F-code operations using memory boxes include F-code polling memory (following page), F-code confidential
transmission (page 4-6), and F-code relay broadcast (page 4-8). Memory boxes must be created to perform any of
these operations.
A memory box can be created using the custom settings. The method of setting up the box varies depending on the
operation. Up to 100 boxes can be created. Note that two boxes cannot use the same sub-address, and a passcode
can be omitted.
Refer to page 6-10 for the procedures for creating, editing, and deleting memory boxes.
A maximum of 20 digits are permitted for sub-addresses and passcodes. Be sure to inform the other party of the sub-
address and passcode.
NOTES
• If you attempt to create a box when 100 boxes have already been created, a message will appear and you will not be able to
create the box. First delete an unneeded box (page 6-13), and then create the new box.
• Spaces cannot be used when programming a sub-address or passcode. The characters "#" and "
" cannot be used in a sub-
address, but they can be used in a passcode.
1
Dial the fax number of the other machine, or
touch a one-touch key.
CORPO.TPS
SHARP CORPORATION
SPE
If the sub-address and
passcode have been
programmed into the one-
touch key, the following
steps are not needed.
2
Touch the SUB ADDRESS key.
CONDITION
SETTINGS
SUB ADDRESS
ADDRESS REVIEW
A slash "/" appears at the
end of the fax number. If you
make a mistake, press the
C key to clear the mistake.
3
Use the numeric keys to enter the sub-address
of the other machine's memory box (max. 20
digits)
If you make a mistake,
press the C key and re-enter
the correct digit(s).
4
Touch the SUB ADDRESS key once again.
A slash "/" appears at the end of the sub-address.
5
Use the numeric keys to enter the passcode of
the other machine's memory box (max. 20 digits)
If a passcode has not been established for the other
box, this step is not necessary.
NOTES
• You can program a sub-address and passcode into a one-touch dial key along with the fax number (refer to page 6-3).
• Manual transmission (on-hook dialing or lifting an extension phone connected to the machine) using a sub-address and
passcode is not possible.
ENTERING A SUB-ADDRESS AND PASSCODE FOR A MEMORY
BOX IN THE OTHER MACHINE
When transmitting to a memory box in another fax machine, the sub-address and passcode must be entered after the
other machine's fax number. Enter the other machine's fax number as explained for a normal transmission (page 2-2)
or for a polling operation (page 3-6), and then enter the sub-address and passcode as follows:
TRANSMISSION BETWEEN MACHINES SUPPORTING F-CODES
4-4
F-CODE POLLING MEMORY
F-code polling memory allows one fax machine to call another fax machine and activate reception of a document that has
been scanned into the other machine's F-code polling memory box. Calling another machine and activating reception is
called F-code polling, and scanning a document into a memory box for another machine to retrieve by polling is called F-
code polling memory. This function is approximately the same as normal polling explained on page 3-5; however, it uses
an F-code polling memory box and is always protected by means of the sub-address and passcode.
■■
■■
■ How F-code polling memory works
3) Polling memory
box opens
1) F-code polling
(transmission request)
Sub-address and passcode
are transmitted to your machine
4) Automatic transmission
of document data
to other machine
2)
Check sub-address
and passcode
Your machine The other machine
Product Planning
Subaddress
Passcode
Do not match
Match
F-code polling is when your machine calls another machine and retrieves a document that was scanned into the
polling memory box of that machine (the reverse of the above diagram).
NOTES
• To perform polling or polling memory without using an F-code, refer to page 3-5.
• To create an F-code memory box for polling memory, refer to page 6-10.
• Unlike normal polling, the other machine's fax number is not programmed as a passcode for F-code polling memory. The
sub-address and passcode of the polling memory box are always used for polling security.
• The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of the transmission.
USING F-CODE POLLING MEMORY
In order for another machine to retrieve a document from your machine, you must first scan the document into the F-
code polling memory box.
You can check scanned document data by printing it out (refer to the following page).
NOTE
When using F-code polling memory, do not set the reception mode to manual reception.
NOTE
When creating the memory box, you can select whether to have the scanned document data automatically cleared after
polling, or left in the box to allow repeated polling.
■■
■■
■ Scanning a document into an F-code polling memory box
The procedure for scanning a document into an F-code polling memory box created with the custom settings (page 6-10) is
almost the same as the procedure for scanning a document into the Public Box for normal polling memory. Instead of
touching the PUBLIC BOX key in Step 4 on page 3-7, touch the key of the memory box into which you wish to scan the
document. If document data has already been stored in that box, the new document data will be added on to the existing data.
If you no longer need the existing data, delete it as explained on the following page.
When you touch the memory box into which you wish to scan the document, the
key is highlighted and selected as the scanning destination.
ORY BOX - DATA STORE
SCAN TEAM MARKETING GROUP
IEL ERNY SHARP BRANCH EX
LECT MEMORY BOX.
SPEA
4-5
4
F-CODE POLLING MEMORY
■■
■■
■ Checking and clearing document data in a memory box
The procedure for checking document data in an F-code polling memory box by printing it and the procedure for
clearing data from a box are almost the same as the procedures for printing and clearing document data from the
Public Box. Instead of touching the PUBLIC BOX key in Step 3 on page 3-8, touch the memory box key of the data
you wish to print or clear.
If a document icon ( ) appears to the right of a memory box key, document data
has been stored in that box and you can print it out.
Note that you cannot check or clear the contents of a memory box while it is being
used for transmission.
DATA
MARKETING GROUP
SHARP BRANCH EX
PROCEDURE FOR F-CODE POLLING
Make sure that a document has not been loaded in the auto document feeder or on the document glass, and then
follow the steps below.
NOTES
• You must know the sub-address (SEP) and passcode (PWD) of the other machine's F-code polling memory box.
• Serial polling (selecting multiple fax machines to be polled using a group key or by touching the NEXT ADDRESS key) is not
possible with F-code polling.
1
In fax mode, touch the SPECIAL MODES key
and then the POLLING key.
POLLING
EXPOSURE
DUAL PAGE
SCAN
SPECIAL MODES
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
The POLLING key is
highlighted and the polling
icon is displayed.
To cancel the polling selection,
press the POLLING key once
again so that it is no longer
highlighted.
2
Touch the OK key.
OK
REDIALAKER
You will return to the initial
screen.
3
Enter the fax number, sub-address, and
passcode of the other fax machine.
CORPO.TPS
SHARP CORPORATION
SPE
Refer to steps 2 through 5
on page 4-3 for the
procedure for entering sub-
addresses and passcodes.
4
Press the Start key.
JOB STORED appears on
the screen.
After communicating with
the other machine, your
machine prints the received
document data.
NOTES
• To cancel the operation
Press the JOB STATUS key and then cancel the operation as explained on page 2-6.
• Only one polling operation with a timer setting (page 3-4) can be stored.
4-6
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
This function is used to send confidential documents. The sub-address and passcode programmed for a memory box
restricts access to the box, and received data can only be printed by someone who knows the print PIN. (Personal
Identification Number).
This function is convenient when sending important documents that you only want a specific person to see, or when
multiple departments share a single fax machine.
3) Data is read into the confidential
memory box (reception is permitted)
1) Document data, together
with a sub-address and passcode,
are sent to your machine.
4-1)
Enter print PIN.
(4-digit number)
4-2)
Data is only
printed if correct
passcode is entered.
Your machine
When data is printed
The other machine
MARK
Sub-address
Passcode
MARK
Match
Do not match
2)
Check sub-address
and passcode
As the above diagram shows, receiving document data to the machine's F-code confidential memory box is called
F-code confidential reception, and sending document data to another machine's F-code confidential memory box
is called F-code confidential transmission.
NOTES
• This machine does not support Sharp's previous confidential transmission function, which uses the programmed sender's
fax number and ID code.
• Refer to pages 6-10 through 6-13 for the procedures for creating, editing, and deleting F-code confidential memory boxes.
• Take care not to forget the print PIN. programmed in the F-code confidential memory box. If you forget the passcode, consult
your dealer.
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
F-code confidential transmission is performed in the same way as a normal transmission (refer to chapter 2); however,
you must enter the sub-address (SUB) and passcode (SID) after the fax number of the other machine. (Omit the
passcode if the other machine does not use a passcode.)
For the procedure for entering sub-addresses and passcodes, refer to page 4-3.
F-code confidential reception is performed in the same way as normal reception (refer to chapter 2); however, you
must inform the other party of the sub-address (SUB) and passcode (SID) of your confidential memory box. (Omit the
passcode if a passcode is not programmed in the box.)
NOTE
An F-code confidential transmission can be used in combination with the broadcast transmission function (page 3-2) or timer
transmission function (page 3-4), and can be stored in a program (page 6-8).
4-7
4
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
PRINTING A DOCUMENT RECEIVED TO AN F-CODE
CONFIDENTIAL MEMORY BOX
When a document is received to an F-code confidential memory box, a Transaction Report will print to inform you. The
document can be printed by entering the print PIN. (0000 to 9999) that was programmed when the memory box was
created. Printing of the confidential document will take priority over any other jobs waiting to be printed.
NOTES
• You can use the key operator program to disable printing of the Transaction Report that is printed after a confidential document
is received (page 8-5).
• Document data received to an F-code confidential memory box is automatically cleared after printing.
• Multiple faxes can be received to an F-code confidential memory box.
1
In fax mode, touch the SPECIAL MODES key
and then touch the MEMORY BOX key.
MEMORY BOXPROGRAM
OK
SPECIAL MODES
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
The memory box menu
appears.
To cancel the operation,
press the CANCEL key.
2
Touch the PRINT DATA key.
CONFIDENTIAL
RECEPTION
DATA PRINT DATA
3
Touch the memory box key that has the
document data you wish to print.
MEMORY BOX - CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION
SLA SCANNER TEAM
MARKETING GROUP
SELECT MEMORY BOX.
A mark appears to the
right of memory boxes that
have received document
data.
A memory box cannot be
selected while it is being
used for transmission.
4
Press the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit print
PIN..
CANCEL
ENTER PIN VIA THE 10-KEY.
As each digit is entered, "-"
changes to "
".
If the print PIN. you entered
is correct, the message
PRESS [START] TO PRINT
DATA appears.
If the passcode is not correct, the message PIN IS NOT
VERIFIED appears and you return to the entry screen.
To return to the screen of step 3, touch the CANCEL
key.
5
Press the Start key.
Printing begins. If another
print job is already is
progress, the confidential
data is printed after that job
is completed.
NOTE
If received data remains in an F-code confidential memory box, the memory box cannot be deleted.
4-8
F-CODE RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION
The F-code relay broadcast transmission function makes it possible to program the fax numbers of end receiving machines
in an F-code relay memory box. Your machine thereby becomes a relay machine. When your machine receives a document
from another F-code machine, your machine relays (transmits) that document to each of the end receiving machines.
The relay machine and the originating machine that requests the relay transmission must both support F-codes; however,
the end receiving machines programmed in the F-code relay broadcast memory box do not need to support F-codes.
S.F.
3) Document data is
read into relay broadcast
memory box
(reception is permitted).
4)
Document is successively transmitted
to end receiving machines programmed
in the relay broadcast memory box.
1) Document is sent from
machine requesting
relay transmission
Relay machine (your machine)Relay request machine (sends document)
Receiving machine CReceiving machine BReceiving machine A
Passcode
Match
Does not match
Sub-address
2) Check sub-address
and passcode
If the Network Scanner Expansion
Kit (AR-NS2) installed and your
machine acts as a relay machine,
you can also store E-mail and
Internet-Fax destinations in the relay
broadcast memory box for relay
transmission to E-mail and Internet-
Fax recipients.
The machine that originally sends the document is called the relay request machine, and the machine that has a
memory box containing the end receiving machines and which relays the received document to those machines
is called the relay machine.
The relay machine also prints the document sent by the relay request machine.
For example, corporate headquarters in Seattle wants to send the same document to branch offices in San Francisco,
Oakland, Berkeley, and San Jose. If the San Francisco office creates a relay broadcast memory box and programs the
Oakland, Berkeley, and San Jose offices as end receiving destinations, the overall phone charges will be lower than
if the Seattle office uses the normal broadcast transmission function (page 3-2). This function can also be combined
with a timer setting (page 3-4) to take advantage of off-peak rates, allowing a further reduction in phone charges.
Transmission by the relay machine is called "F-code relay broadcast transmission", and transmission from the relay
request machine to the relay machine is called "relay request transmission".
NOTES
• This machine does not support Sharp's previous relay broadcast function, which uses the programmed sender's number
and relay ID code.
• To create an F-code relay broadcast memory box and program, edit, and delete end receiving machines, refer to pages 6-10
to 6-13. When creating a box, a passcode (SID) can be omitted.
• The relay request machine only bears the expense of sending the document to the relay machine. The relay machine bears
the expense of sending the document to each of the end receiving machines.
4-9
4
F-CODE RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION
USING THE F-CODE RELAY BROADCAST FUNCTION
(your machine is the relay machine)
When a document is received from a relay request machine, the F-code relay broadcast function transmits the document
to the end receiving machines using a memory box only if the sub-address and passcode sent by the relay request
machine are correct.
Refer to pages 6-10 through 6-13 for the procedures for creating, editing, and deleting memory boxes.
Up to 30 end receiving machines (30 one-touch keys or group keys) can be programmed in the F-code relay broadcast
memory box.
A document received from a relay request machine is initially stored in the memory box of your machine. Your machine
(the relay machine) also prints the document, thus the document is first stored as a print job and then as transmission
jobs to each of the programmed end receiving machines. The document data is automatically cleared after transmission
to all end receiving machines is completed.
NOTE
End receiving machines are programmed using auto-dial keys (one-touch keys or group keys). If you need to program an end
receiving machine that has not been programmed in a one-touch key, program the number in a one-touch key first and then
create the memory box.
USING THE F-CODE RELAY REQUEST FUNCTION
(your machine requests a relay broadcast)
First ask the operator of the other F-code machine to create an F-code relay broadcast memory box and program the
end receiving machines in that box. Ask the operator of the other machine for the sub-address (SUB) and passcode
(SID) of the memory box.
When you send the document to the relay machine, enter the sub-address and passcode after the fax number. The
document will be stored in the memory box of the relay machine, and then transmitted from the relay machine to each
of the programmed end receiving machines. A passcode (SID) need not be entered when dialing if a passcode was
not programmed for the memory box.
Aside from the method of dialing the relay machine, the transmission procedure is the same as for a normal
transmission (refer to chapter 2).
Refer to page 4-3 for the procedure for entering a sub-address and passcode after the fax number of the other
machine.
5-1
CHAPTER 5
USING CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS 3
CONVENIENT METHODS OF USE
This chapter explains convenient features that can be used when send-
ing a document, as well as features that expand the range of use of the
fax machine such as connecting an extension phone.
Page
STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (VERIFICATION STAMP FUNCTION)
.....5-2
●TURNING ON THE VERIFICATION STAMP FUNCTION............... 5-2
CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE ...............................................5-3
●CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE .......................................5-3
●SENDING A FAX AFTER TALKING ON THE PHONE
(MANUAL TRANSMISSION)............................................................5-3
●USING AN EXTENSION PHONE TO RECEIVE A FAX..................5-4
●RECEIVING A FAX AFTER TALKING (MANUAL RECEPTION).... 5-5
5-2
STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS
(VERIFICATION STAMP FUNCTION)
If the optional verification stamp unit has been installed on the scanner unit, you can
have a pink fluorescent " " mark stamped on the edge of each original that is scanned
using the auto document feeder.
This feature does not operate for originals scanned on the document glass.
NOTE
When both sides of an original are scanned, only the front side of the original is stamped.
NOTES
• If an error occurs during scanning, scanning is canceled and the original is ejected. In this case, the original may be stamped
without having been scanned.
• You can use the key operator program to permanently turn on the verification stamp function. (Refer to page 8-3.)
TURNING ON THE VERIFICATION STAMP FUNCTION
If the optional verification stamp unit has been installed, follow the steps below to turn on the verification stamp function.
1
In fax mode, load the original and set any
needed scanning conditions such as the
original size, resolution, and exposure.
Stamping position
2
Touch the ORIGINAL key.
AUTO 8 X11
1
/
2
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
3
Touch the STAMP key.
OK
STAMP
L
ED
T
The STAMP key is only
displayed if the verification
stamp unit has been
installed.
When touched, the key is
highlighted.
4
Touch the OK key.
OK
STAMP
L
ED
T
You will return to the initial
screen.
5
Make sure that the verification stamp icon
appears to the right of the ORIGINAL key.
AUTO 8 X11
1
/
2
ORIGINAL
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
When this icon appears, the
edge of each original will be
stamped as it is scanned.
If you have selected two-
sided scanning, the
verification stamp icon will
appear to the right of the
two-sided scanning icon.
6
Begin scanning.
The verification stamp function automatically turns off
when all originals have been scanned.
Note that the function will also automatically turn off if you
take no action for one minute after turning on the function.
■■
■■
■ Replacing the verification stamp cartridge
The optional verification stamp unit contains a consumable
verification stamp cartridge (ink cartridge). This cartridge (AR-
SV1) must be replaced when the mark stamped on each original
becomes faint. Follow the steps below to replace the cartridge.
1
Remove the stamp cover, and then grasp the finger hold
on the ink cartridge and pull the cartridge out of the unit.
2
Insert the new cartridge into the unit. Replace the stamp cover.
Finger hold
A pink fluorescent " " mark is
stamped on scanned originals.
Paper feed direction
5-3
5
CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE
You can connect a telephone to the machine and use it as an extension phone to place and receive calls like any
normal phone. You can also activate fax reception from the phone (remote operation).
NOTES
• If you connect a combination telephone/answering machine to the machine, you will not be able to use the answering
machine function.
• You can place calls from the phone even during a power failure.
CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE
1
Insert the end of the extension phone cord into
the extension phone jack on the rear of the
machine.
Extension
phone jack
Make sure you hear a "click"
sound indicating that the
cord is securely connected.
1
In fax mode, load the document and set any
needed scanning conditions such as the
original size, resolution, and exposure.
NOTE
If you have loaded the original on the document glass,
you can only send one page by manual transmission.
2
Lift the extension phone.
Or, you can press the SPEAKER key (page 1-11).
3
Dial the number of the other party or touch a
one-touch key.
CORPO.TPS
SHARP CORPORATION
You can also dial using the
keypad on the extension
phone.
You cannot use a group key
or a one-touch key that
includes a sub-address and
passcode.
4
Speak to the other party when they answer.
If you used the SPEAKER key to dial, lift the extension
phone to talk.
5
After the other party switches to fax reception,
press your Start key.
Transmission begins.
6
Replace the extension phone.
SENDING A FAX AFTER TALKING ON THE PHONE
(MANUAL TRANSMISSION)
If the other fax machine is set to manual reception, you can talk to the other party and then send a fax without breaking
the connection. This procedure is called manual transmission.
NOTE
Automatic redialing (page 2-4) will not take place if the line is busy.
5-4
USING AN EXTENSION PHONE TO RECEIVE A FAX
The machine normally receives faxes automatically after ringing (page 2-7); however, when an extension phone is
connected, you can set the reception mode to MANUAL. This will allow you to talk to the other party first and then
receive a fax.
This is convenient when you only have one telephone line and receive more voice calls than faxes. You must answer
all calls on the extension phone, and activate fax reception after you verify that a call is a fax transmission.
NOTES
• The reception mode is initially set to AUTO. If you have not connected an extension phone, keep the reception mode set to
AUTO.
•
If you hear beeps during reception or at the end of reception and an error message appears in the display, refer to page 7-3.
■■
■■
■ Changing the reception mode to MANUAL.
CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key.
2
Touch the RECEIVE MODE key.
LIST PRINT
RECEIVE MODE
3
Touch the MANUAL RECEPTION key.
AUTO RECEPTION
MANUAL RECEPTION
The MANUAL RECEPTION
key is highlighted.
4
Touch the OK key.
ECRPTION
RECEPTION
OK
The reception mode is set
to MANUAL.
NOTE
To return the reception mode to AUTO, touch the AUTO RECEPTION key in step 3 above.
5-5
5
RECEIVING A FAX AFTER TALKING (MANUAL RECEPTION)
When an extension phone is connected to the machine and you have set the reception mode to MANUAL, you can
talk to a person sending a fax manually and then begin fax reception without breaking the connection.
1
When the machine rings, lift the extension
phone and speak.
If you hear a fax tone through the extension phone, do
not speak and proceed to the next step.
2
With the extension phone still lifted, touch the
FAX RECEIVE key.
FAX RECEIVE
ADDRESS
DIRECTORY
FAX MEMORY:100%
Reception begins when
the other party begins
transmission.
3
Replace the extension phone.
The received fax will be printed after previously stored
jobs have been printed. When printing is completed, you
will hear a "beep" sound.
NOTE
You can also talk on the extension phone and manually
receive a fax while the machine is copying.
If the machine rings during copying, lift the extension phone
and speak. To receive a fax, press the IMAGE SEND key
with the extension phone still lifted. When you hear a fax
tone through the extension phone, touch the FAX RECEIVE
key.
CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE
■■
■■
■ Activating fax reception from an extension phone (remote reception)
After speaking on the extension phone, you can activate fax reception from the extension phone. This is called
"remote reception". After speaking, or when you hear a fax tone through the extension phone, perform the following
procedure with the extension phone still lifted.
NOTE
The following procedure is not possible if you are on a pulse dial line and your extension phone cannot produce tone signals.
To find out whether your extension phone can produce tone signals, refer to the manual for your extension phone.
NOTE
The one-digit number that is used to activate fax reception from an extension phone (initially set to "5") is called the "remote
reception number". You can change this number to any number from 0 to 9 with the key operator program. (Refer to page 8-5.)
1
If you are on a pulse dial line, set your phone to
issue tone signals.
Refer to your phone's manual to set the phone to issue
tone signals.
If your phone is already set to issue tone signals, proceed
to the next step.
2
Press the "5" key on the extension phone's
keypad, and then press the " " key twice.
Fax reception is activated.
3
Replace the extension phone.
■■
■■
■ When the machine is in Fax mode
A fax can be received manually even when transmission is in progress.
NOTE
If you are using a line divider to connect an extension phone to the machine, the following method cannot be used for fax
reception. In this case, use remote reception (see above) to receive faxes.
6-1
CHAPTER 6
PROGRAMMING
This chapter explains the procedures for programming and the
information programmed in auto dial keys (one-touch and group keys),
programs, user indexes, and memory boxes.
Page
PROGRAMMING......................................................................................6-2
STORING, EDITING, AND DELETING AUTO DIAL KEYS AND PROGRAMS
........6-2
●STORING ONE-TOUCH DIAL KEYS............................................... 6-3
●EDITING AND DELETING ONE-TOUCH KEYS ............................. 6-5
●PROGRAMMING A GROUP KEY....................................................6-6
●EDITING AND DELETING GROUP KEYS ......................................6-7
●STORING A PROGRAM .................................................................. 6-8
●EDITING AND DELETING PROGRAMS ......................................... 6-8
STORING A GROUP INDEX ...................................................................6-9
PROGRAMMING, EDITING, AND DELETING F-CODE MEMORY BOXES
......6-10
●PROGRAMMING AN F-CODE MEMORY BOX............................... 6-10
●SETTING FOR F-CODE POLLING MEMORY BOXES
(NUMBER OF TRANSMISSIONS)...................................................6-11
●SETTING FOR F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL
TRANSMISSION MEMORY BOXES (PRINT PIN.).........................6-12
●SETTING FOR F-CODE RELAY BROADCAST
MEMORY BOXES (END RECEIVING MACHINES)........................ 6-13
●EDITING AND DELETING A MEMORY BOX..................................6-13
PRINTING PROGRAMMED INFORMATION..........................................6-14
ENTERING CHARACTERS.....................................................................6-15
6-2
STORING, EDITING, AND DELETING AUTO
DIAL KEYS AND PROGRAMS
This section explains the procedures for storing, editing, and deleting auto-dial keys (one-touch keys and group keys)
and programs, which simplify the transmission procedure. (The procedure for using one-touch keys and group keys is
explained on page 2-5 and the procedure for using programs is explained on page 3-11.)
A combined total of 500 one-touch keys and group keys can be stored, and eight programs can be stored. If you
attempt to store more than this, a warning message will appear. In this case, delete any auto-dial keys or programs
that are no longer needed (refer to pages 6-5, 6-7 and 6-8), and then store the new auto-dial key or program.
NOTE
To cancel a storing, editing, or deleting operation, press the CA key. Pressing the CA key takes you out of CUSTOM SETTINGS mode.
To store, edit, or delete an auto-dial key (one-touch key or group key) or program, first follow steps 1 through 4 below.
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key.
2
Touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key.
KEY OPERATOR PRO
ADDRESS
CONTROL
REC
3
Touch the DIRECT ADDRESS / PROGRAM key.
DIRECT ADDRESS / PROGRAM
CUSTOM INDEX
The DIRECT ADDRESS /
PROGRAM menu appears.
4
Touch the desired key and perform the
programming operation.
Refer to the pages indicated below for the
operation you wish to perform.
CUSTOM SETTINGS
DIRECT ADDRESS / PROGRAM
INDIVIDUAL
GROUP
STORE
OK
PROGRAM
AMEND/DELETE
INDIVIDUAL key
Store a one-touch
dial key (following
page)
PROGRAM key
Store a program
key (page 6-8)
GROUP key
Store a group key
(page 6-6)
AMEND/DELETE key
• One-touch key
(page 6-5)
• Group key (page 6-7)
• Program (page 6-8)
PROGRAMMING
There are two methods for storing and editing auto dial numbers (one-touch keys and group keys), user indexes, and
memory boxes: using the touch panel of the machine, and using a Web browser (Netscape Navigator, Internet Explorer,
etc.) on your computer to access the Web page in the machine. This chapter only explains the procedures for storing,
editing, and clearing using the touch panel of the machine. For the procedure for accessing the Web page and items
that can be stored, edited and cleared in the Web page, refer to pages 2-6 through 2-8 of "Operation manual (for
printer operation and general information)".
6-3
6
1
Make sure the FAX key is checked and then
touch the NAME key.
DIRECT ADDRESS / INDIVIDUAL
FAX
NAME
INDEX FAX
The "No." that automatically
appears is the lowest number
from 001 to 500 that has not
yet been programmed. When
NAME is touched, the letter-
entry screen appears. Enter up
to 36 characters for the name.
Refer to page 6-15 for the procedure for entering letters.
2
Touch the INITIAL key.
INITIAL
MODE
3
Touch a letter key.
The first letter (initial) of the
name entered in step 1 is
initially selected and is
highlighted. If you wish to
change the letter, touch a
different letter key.
NOTE
The initial you enter here determines the position of the
one-touch key in the ABC index. For information on the
ABC index, refer to page 1-5.
4
Touch the OK key.
5
Touch the INDEX key.
NAME SHARP CORPORATION
INDEX FAX N
KEY NAME
FAX
6
Touch an index key.
Select one of the upper row of keys (USER 1 through
USER 6) to determine the location of the one-touch key
when the GROUP index is displayed instead of the ABC
index (refer to page 1-5). The lower keys are for selecting
whether to include the one-touch key in the FREQUENT
USE index.
If you touch the wrong key, simply touch the correct key.
7
Touch the OK key.
8
Touch the FAX No. key.
P CORPORATION
FAX No.
MODE
The fax number entry
screen appears.
9
Use the numeric keys to enter the fax number.
To insert a pause between digits of the number, touch
the PAUSE key. The pause appears as a hyphen "-". Refer
to page 8-4 to set the duration of the pause.
If you make a mistake, press the C key to clear one digit
at a time, and then enter the correct digit(s).
If you are not going to enter a sub-address and password
after the fax number, proceed to step 12.
NOTE
A maximum of 64 digits can be entered, including the fax
number, sub-address, passcode, any pauses (hyphens),
and slashes "/" (to separate the sub-address and
passcode).
DIRECT ADDRESS / INDIVIDUAL
NEXT EXIT
INDEX
USER 1 USER 2
YES NO
USER 3 USER 4 USER 5 USER 6
OK
SELECT THE CUSTOM INDEX WHERE YOU REGISTER THIS ADDRESS.
DO YOU REGISTER THIS ADDRESS AT THE [FREQUENT USE], TOO?
STORING ONE-TOUCH DIAL KEYS
Follow the steps below to store a one-touch key after you have completed steps 1 through 4 on page 6-2.
STORING, EDITING, AND DELETING AUTO DIAL KEYS AND PROGRAMS
DIRECT ADDRESS / INDIVIDUAL
NEXT EXIT
FAX No.
ENTER THE FAX No. VIA THE 10-KEY PAD, THEN PRESS [OK].
0666211221
OKCANCEL
PAUSE
SUB ADDRESS
6-4
STORING, EDITING, AND DELETING AUTO DIAL KEYS AND PROGRAMS
10
If you need to enter a sub-address, touch the
SUB ADDRESS key and then enter the sub-
address with the numeric keys.
HEN PRESS [OK].
OKCANCEL
PAUSE
SUB ADDRESS
When you touch the SUB
ADDRESS key, a slash is
entered after the fax
number. Continue by
entering the sub-address
(max. 20 digits).
If you do not wish to enter a
passcode, proceed to step 12.
11
If you wish to enter a passcode, touch the SUB
ADDRESS key once again and enter the passcode
with the numeric keys.
No. VIA THE 10-KEY PAD, THEN PRESS
0666211221/3456/
When you touch the SUB
ADDRESS key, a slash is
entered after the sub-
address. Continue by
entering the passcode
(max. 20 digits).
12
Touch the OK key.
You will return to the one-touch key programming screen.
REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED will appear
highlighted to the right of "No.".
NOTE
The "FAX No." line only shows 32 digits, regardless of how
many digits actually programmed.
13
Check the key name.
The characters appearing next to the NAME key will be
displayed in the key. Only the first 18 characters of the
name entered in step 1 will be displayed.
If you need to change the name that will be displayed in
the key, touch the KEY NAME key.
NAME SHARP CORPORATION
FAX
REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.
INDEX USER 3 FAX No
KEY NAME SHARP CORPORATION
If you do not wish to change
the name, this step is not
necessary.
Refer to page 6-15 for the
procedure for entering
characters.
14
Check the transmission settings
The initial transmission settings are "TRANSMISSION
SPEED: 33.6 kbps" and "INTERNATIONAL
CORRESPONDENCE MODE: NONE". To change either
of the settings, touch the MODE key.
SINITIAL
0666211221/3456/987654AX No.
33.6 kbps / NONMODE
If you do not wish to change
the settings, this step is not
necessary.
After touching the MODE
key, you can change either
of the two settings. When
finished, touch the OK key.
Transmission speed
Speed selections are 33.6 kbps, 14.4 kbps, 9.6 kbps, and
4.8 bps. The higher the number, the faster the transmission
speed.
NOTE
Set the transmission speed only when you know what
speed is most suitable, such as when you are sending
a fax to a foreign country and telephone line conditions
are bad. If you do not know the line condition, do not
change this setting.
International correspondence mode
Selections are NONE, MODE 1, MODE 2, and MODE 3.
NOTE
• When sending a fax to a foreign country, telephone
line conditions can sometimes distort the fax or
interrupt the transmission. Selecting the right
international correspondence mode can help
alleviate these problems.
• If errors frequently occur when sending a fax to a
foreign country, try each of modes 1 to 3 and select
the mode that enables the best transmission.
15
When you have finished programming the one-
touch key, touch the EXIT key
If you wish to program another one-touch key,
touch the NEXT key.
SINITIAL
NEXT EXIT
0666211221/3456/987654.
33.6 kbps / NONMODE
Pressing the EXIT key
returns you to the screen of
step 4 on page 6-2.
6-5
6
EDITING AND DELETING ONE-TOUCH KEYS
If you wish to delete a one-touch key or change the fax number, name, or other information programmed in a one-
touch key, follow steps 1 through 3 on page 6-2 and then perform the following procedure.
NOTE
If you cannot edit or delete a one-touch key
If you attempt to edit or delete a one-touch key in the following situations, a warning message will appear and editing/deletion
will not be possible.
●The one-touch key you wish to edit or delete is currently being used for transmission or is used in a currently stored
transmission job (including a timer transmission).
●The one-touch key is included in a group key.
●The one-touch key is included in a group of end receiving machines for an F-code relay broadcast operation.
●The one-touch key is included in a program.
If the key is being used for a current transmission or currently stored transmission, cancel the transmission or wait until it is
completed and then change or delete the key. If the key is included in one of the above groups, delete the key from the group
and then change or delete the key.
STORING, EDITING, AND DELETING AUTO DIAL KEYS AND PROGRAMS
1
Touch the AMEND/DELETE key.
AMEND/DELETE
2
Touch the one-touch key you wish to edit or
delete.
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
SELECT ADDRESS TO AMEND/DELETE.
EXIT
SHARP CORPORATION
FREQUENT USE
ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC GROUP
CORPO.TPS
SHARP GROUP
SHARP DIGITAL DOCU
SLA SCANNER TEAM CLIFF QUIROGA
DANIEL ERNY
CHARLER WATTS
PROGRAM
● To edit a one-touch key, follow steps 3 and 4.
●
To delete a one-touch key, follow steps 5 and 6.
● When you have finished editing or deleting,
touch the EXIT key.
3
Touch the key corresponding to the information
you wish to change (change the information in
the same way as you stored the information on
page 6-3).
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
NAME SHARP CORPORATION
FAX
SINITIAL
DELETE EXIT
INDEX USER 3 0666211221/3456/987654FAX No.
KEY NAME SHARP CORPORATION 33.6 kbps/NONMODE
4
Make sure that your changes are correct, and
then touch the EXIT key.
SINITIAL
DELETE EXIT
If you wish to change
another one-touch key,
repeat steps 2 through 4.
5
Touch the DELETE key.
SINITIAL
DELETE EXIT
6
Touch the YES key.
DELETE THE ADDRESS?
SHARP CORPORATION
NO YES
SHARP CORPORATION 33.MODE
If you wish to delete another
one-touch key, repeat steps
2, 5, and 6.
6-6
1
Follow steps 1 through 7 of "Storing one-touch
dial keys" (page 6-3) to enter a GROUP NAME,
INITIAL, and INDEX.
2
Touch the ADDRESS key.
AME
GROUP-SHARP DIGITAL DOCUMENT
X USER 2 ADDRESS
ME
3
Touch index keys and the keys as
needed, and then touch one-touch keys of the
destinations that you wish to store in the group.
DIRECT ADDRESS / GROUP
SELECT ADDRESS.
PRODUCTS PLANNING
FREQUENT USE ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC GROUP
SHANE COFFEY
MARKETING GROUP SHARP CORPORATION
CORPO.TPS
ADDRESS REVIEW
One-touch keys that have been touched are highlighted.
If you touch the wrong key, simply touch it again to cancel
the highlighting and remove the destination from the
group.
NOTE
One group key cannot be stored in another group key.
Group keys appear grayed out and cannot be touched.
PROGRAMMING A GROUP KEY
Up to 300 destinations can be stored in a group key. To program a group key, follow steps 1 through 4 on page 6-2 and
then perform the following procedure.
NOTE
Only one-touch key destinations can be stored in a group key. If you wish to store a destination that is not programmed in a
one-touch key, first program the destination in a one-touch key and then store it in the group key.
STORING, EDITING, AND DELETING AUTO DIAL KEYS AND PROGRAMS
4
To check the destinations that you have stored
in the group, touch the ADDRESS REVIEW key.
OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC GROUP
ADDRESS REVIEW
A list of your selected
destinations is displayed.
You can delete a displayed
destination by touching it.
When a message appears
asking if you want to delete
the destination, touch the
YES key.
5
Touch the outer OK key.
DIRECT ADDRESS / GROUP
SELECT ADDRESS TO DELETE.
GROUP NAME : GROUP-SHARP DIGITAL DOCUMENT SYSTEMS
OK
OK
SHARP CORPORATION CORPO.TPS
The number of destinations in the group appears to the
right of the ADDRESS key.
6
Check the name of the key (refer to step 13 on
page 6-4).
The characters appearing next to the KEY NAME key
will be displayed in the group key. To change these
characters, touch the KEY NAME key. This step is not
necessary if you do not wish to change the characters.
The procedure for entering characters is explained on
page 6-15.
7
Touch the EXIT key when you have finished
programming the group key.
If you wish to program another group key, touch
the NEXT key.
When you touch the EXIT key, you will return to the
screen of step 4 on page 6-2.
6-7
6
EDITING AND DELETING GROUP KEYS
If you need to delete a group key or change its name or a one of its stored destinations in a group key, first follow steps
1 through 3 on page 6-2, and then perform the following procedure.
NOTE
If you cannot edit or delete a group key
If you attempt to edit or delete a group key in the following situations, a warning message will appear and editing/deletion will not be possible.
●The one-touch key you wish to change or delete is currently being used for transmission or is used in a currently stored
transmission job (including a timer transmission).
●The group key is included in the end receiving machines for an F-code relay broadcast operation.
●The group key is included in a program.
If the key is being used for a current transmission or currently stored transmission, cancel the transmission or wait until it is
completed and then edit or delete the key. If the key is included in a program or in the end receiving machines for an F-code
relay broadcast operation, delete the key from the program or operation and then edit or delete the key.
STORING, EDITING, AND DELETING AUTO DIAL KEYS AND PROGRAMS
1
Touch the AMEND/DELETE key.
AMEND/DELETE
2
Touch the group key you wish to edit or delete.
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
SELECT ADDRESS TO AMEND/DELETE.
EXIT
SHARP CORPORATION
FREQUENT USE
ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC GROUP
CORPO.TPS
SHARP GROUP
SHARP DIGITAL DOCU
SLA SCANNER TEAM CLIFF QUIROGA
DANIEL ERNY
CHARLER WATTS
PROGRAM
● To edit a group key, follow steps 3 and 4.
● To delete a group key, follow steps 5 and 6.
● When you have finished editing or deleting,
touch the EXIT key.
3
Touch the key of the item you wish to change
(to edit the item, follow the same steps as for
one-touch keys on page 6-3).
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
GROUP NAME SHARP GROUP
002
SINITIAL
NEXT EXIT
INDEX USER 2 2 ADDRESSESADDRESS
KEY NAME SHARP GROUP
To edit a destination stored in a group key, touch the
ADDRESS key. The following screen appears.
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
SELECT ADDRESS.
PRODUCTS PLANNING
FREQUENT USE
SHANE COFFEY
MARKETING GROUP SHARP CORPORATION
CORPO.TPS
ADDRESS REVIEW
ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC GROUP
The one-touch keys stored in the group are highlighted.
To add another one-touch key to the group, touch the
key to highlight it.
To delete a one-touch key from the group, touch the key
so that it is no longer highlighted.
4
Make sure the edited information is correct, and
then touch the EXIT key.
INITIAL
DELETE EXIT
S
If you wish to change
another group key, repeat
steps 2 through 4.
5
Touch the DELETE key.
SINITIAL
DELETE EXIT
6
Touch the YES key.
DELETE THE ADDRESS?
SHARP GROUP
NO YES
If you wish to delete another
group key, repeat steps 2,
5, and 6.
6-8
STORING, EDITING, AND DELETING AUTO DIAL KEYS AND PROGRAMS
STORING A PROGRAM
You can store a destination fax number, polling or dual page scan selections, and resolution and exposure settings in
a program. This enables you to call up the program and perform the transmission by means of a simplified operation.
To store a program, first follow steps 1 through 4 on page 6-2 and then perform the following operation.
1
Touch the PROGRAM NAME key.
PROGRAM
PROGRAM NAME
SETTINGS
ADDRESS
RESOLUTION
SPECIAL
MODE
No.1
The "No." that automatically
appears is the lowest number
from 1 to 8 that has not yet
been programmed. When the
PROGRAM NAME key is
touched, the letter-entry
screen appears. Enter up to
18 characters for the name.
Refer to page 6-15 for the procedure for entering letters.
2
Touch the SETTINGS key.
PROGRAM NAME
SETTINGS
ADDRESS
PROGRAM FOR SHARP
RESOLUTION
SPECIAL
MODES
No.1
3
Touch the keys for the settings you wish to store.
CANCEL OK
SPECIAL MODES
ADDRESS
DIRECTORY
ENTER PROGRAM YOU REQUIRE.
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
ADDRESS REVIEW
For the detailed procedures for each of the settings, refer to
the explanations of those features on the following pages.
Special mode:
• Polling (page 3-6)
• Dual page scanning (page 3-10) • Exposure (page 1-10)
Resolution (page 1-9) Address Directory (page 3-3)
NOTE
You can store up to 300 destinations in a program; however,
you cannot directly enter fax numbers with the numeric keys.
A destination must be programmed in an auto dial key (one-
touch key or group key) before it can be stored in a program.
4
Touch the OK key.
5
Your settings are displayed. Make sure they are
correct.
PROGRAM
PROGRAM NAME
SETTINGS
ADDRESS 2 ADDRESSES
HALF TONE
SUPER FINE
DARK
ORIGINAL
REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.
PROGRAM FOR SHARP
RESOLUTION EXPOSURE
SPECIAL
MODES
DUAL PAGE
SCAN
No.1
NEXT EXIT
6
When you are finished, touch the EXIT key.
If you wish to store another program, touch the
NEXT key.
Touching the EXIT key returns you to the screen of step
4 on page 6-2.
EDITING AND DELETING PROGRAMS
If you need to edit or delete a previously stored program, perform steps 1 through 4 on page 6-2, touch the AMEND/
DELETE key, and then perform the following steps:
1
Touch the PROGRAM key.
EXIT
PROGRAM
2
Touch the program you wish to edit or delete.
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
PROGRAM
SELECT PROGRAM TO AMEND/DELETE.
EXIT
PROGRAM FOR SHARP
EMAIL NEWS GROUP
ABYS FAX FORMAT A
ADDRESS
DIRECTORY
When you touch the program name, the edit/delete
screen for the selected program appears.
Touching the ADDRESS DIRECTORY key returns you
to the screen of step 1.
3
To edit the program, follow the same procedure
as for storing the program.
To delete the program, touch the DELETE key
and then touch the YES key in the confirmation
screen that appears.
NOTE
A timer setting (page 3-4) cannot be included in a program.
6-9
6
STORING A GROUP INDEX
Auto dial keys (one-touch keys and group keys) are normally stored in the ABC index. To make auto dial keys more
convenient to use, you can store a group of auto dial keys in a group index and assign a name to that index. When you
switch to the group indexes, USER 1, USER 2, USER 3, USER 4, USER 5, and USER 6 appear. You can assign any
name up to 6 characters long to each of the USER indexes.
The procedure for storing auto dial numbers in a group index is explained on page 6-3, and the procedure for switching
between the ABC index and the group indexes is explained on page 1-5.
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key, and then
touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key (refer to
steps 1 and 2 on page 6-2).
2
Touch the CUSTOM INDEX key.
DIRECT ADDRESS / PROGRAM
CUSTOM INDEX
3
Touch an index key (USER 1 to USER 6).
You can enter a name for the selected index.
CUSTOM SETTINGS
CUSTOM INDEX
SELECT THE KEY TO BE CUSTOM NAMED.
OK
USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 USER 4 USER 5 USER 6
When touched, the letter entry screen appears.
4
Enter a maximum of 6 characters for the index
name.
Use the key to clear the displayed name and then
enter the desired name. Refer to page 6-15 for the
procedure for entering characters.
When finished, touch the OK key. The new name appears
in the screen of step 3.
5
If you wish to program another index name,
repeat steps 3 and 4.
When finished, touch the OK key.
To change a user index name, re-enter the name as
explained in step 4.
6-10
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key and then
touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key (refer to
steps 1 and 2 on page 6-2).
2
Touch the F-CODE MEMORY BOX key.
F-CODE MEMORY BOX
3
Touch one of the memory box keys (POLLING
MEMORY, CONFIDENTIAL, or RELAY
BROADCAST) on the top line (STORE).
POLLING MEMORY
CONFIDENTIAL
RELAY
BROADCAST
RELAY
BROADCAST
POLLING MEMORY CONFIDENTIAL
CUSTOM SETTINGS
F-CODE MEMORY BOX
OK
STORE
AMEND/DELETE
(POLLING MEMORY is touched in the example here.)
The F-code memory box programming screen appears.
4
Touch the BOX NAME key.
F-CODE MEMORY BOX / POLLING MEMORY
No.001
SUB ADDRESS
BOX NAME
POLLING TIMES
The "No." that automatically
appears is the lowest number
from 001 to 100 that has not
yet been programmed. When
the BOX NAME key is
touched, the letter-entry
screen appears. Enter up to
18 characters for the name.
Refer to page 6-15 for the procedure for entering letters.
5
Touch the SUB ADDRESS key.
F-CODE MEMORY BOX / POLLING MEMORY
No.001
SUB ADDRESS
BOX NAME FAX INFORMATION
POLLING TIMES
The sub-address/passcode
entry screen appears.
6
Use the numeric keys (0 through 9) to enter a
sub-address (max. 20 digits).
F-CODE MEMORY BOX / POLLING MEMORY
No.001
EXITNEXT
OKCANCEL
ENTER THE SUB ADDRESS / PASS CODE VIA THE 10-KEY PAD, THEN PARESS [OK].
214341434
PASS CODE
SUB ADDRESS / PASS CODE
The characters " " and "#" cannot be used in a sub-
address.
If you enter an incorrect digit, press the C key and re-
enter the correct digit.
If you do not wish to enter a passcode, proceed to step 9.
7
To set a passcode, touch the PASS CODE key.
OKCANCEL
THE 10-KEY PAD, THEN PRESS [OK].
PASS CODE
A slash (/) appears after the
sub-address.
If you make a mistake,
press the C key to clear the
mistake.
PROGRAMMING, EDITING, AND DELETING F-
CODE MEMORY BOXES
The procedure for programming a memory box for F-code transmission is explained here. There are three types of F-
code memory boxes: F-code polling memory (page 4-4), F-code confidential transmission (page 4-6), and F-code
relay broadcast (page 4-8). Memory boxes are programmed, edited, and deleted as follows.
PROGRAMMING AN F-CODE MEMORY BOX
A box name, sub-address/passcode, and function must be programmed in a memory box.
NOTES
• When programming a new memory box, a sub-address that is being used for another box cannot be used. The passcode,
however, can be the same as a passcode used in another box.
• A passcode can be omitted.
• Up to 100 F-code memory boxes can be programmed. If 100 F-code memory boxes have already been programmed, a
warning message will appear and you will not be able to program a new box. First delete an unneeded F-code memory box
(page 6-13) and then program the new box.
6-11
6
PROGRAMMING, EDITING, AND DELETING F-CODE MEMORY BOXES
8
Use the numeric keys to enter a passcode (max.
20 digits).
F-CODE MEMORY BOX / POLLING MEMORY
No.001
EXITNEXT
OKCANCEL
ENTER THE SUB ADDRESS / PASS CODE VIA THE 10-KEY PAD, THEN PRESS [OK].
214341434/351212
PASS CODE
SUB ADDRESS / PASS CODE
In addition to numbers, the characters " " and "#" can
be used in a passcode.
If you make a mistake, press the C key to clear the
mistake.
9
Touch the OK key.
OKCANCEL
10-KEY PAD, THEN PRESS [OK].
PASS CODE
You will return to the
memory box programming
screen. The entered sub-
address and passcode are
displayed. REGISTRATION
IS COMPLETED appears to
the right of the box number.
Continue programming the settings that are
particular to each type of memory box. Refer to the
following pages:
● F-code polling memory (this page)
● F-code confidential transmission (next page)
● F-code relay broadcast transmission (page
6-13)
SETTING FOR F-CODE POLLING MEMORY BOXES (NUMBER
OF TRANSMISSIONS)
You can select whether to have document data that was scanned into an F-code polling memory box automatically
cleared after one transmission, or to leave the document data in the box and allow an unlimited number of transmissions
when polled. (The initial setting is "ONCE". Change the setting as needed.)
1
Touch the POLLING TIMES key.
SUB ADDRESS
BOX NAME
FAX INFORMATION
ONCE
214341434/351212
POLLING TIMES
2
Touch the key for the desired number of
transmissions.
If you wish to leave the document data in the box, touch
the UNLIMITED key to highlight it.
F-CODE MEMORY BOX / POLLING MEMORY
POLLONG TIMES
No.001
ONCE
UNLIMITED
EXIT
OK
NEXT
3
Touch the OK key.
You will return to the programming screen for the F-code
polling memory box. The selected number of
transmissions appears.
6-12
PROGRAMMING, EDITING, AND DELETING F-CODE MEMORY BOXES
SETTING FOR F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
MEMORY BOXES (PRINT PIN.)
Program the print PIN. (Personal Identification Number) that is used to print a document that has been received to an
F-code confidential memory box. For information on using a print PIN., refer to page 4-7.
NOTES
• Program a 4-digit number for the print PIN.. The characters "
" and "#" cannot be used.
• The print PIN. can be omitted.
• Take care not to forget the print PIN. you have programmed. If you forget the passcode, consult your Sharp dealer.
1
Touch the PRINT PIN key.
SUB ADDRESS
BOX NAME
FAX INFORMATION
55112233/481221
PRINT PIN
2
Use the numeric keys to enter a 4-digit number.
F-CODE MEMORY BOX / CONFIDENTIAL
PRINT PIN
ENTER THE PRINT PIN VIA THE 10-KEY PAD, THEN PRESS [OK].
No.003
EXIT
OKCANCEL
NEXT
If you make a mistake, press the C key. All digits will be
cleared, so you will need to re-enter the number from
the first digit.
To cancel entry of the print PIN., touch the CANCEL
key. You will return to the screen of step 1 without
programming a print PIN..
3
Touch the OK key.
You will return to the programming screen for the F-code
confidential transmission memory box. The print PIN. you
entered is displayed.
6-13
6
SETTING FOR F-CODE RELAY BROADCAST MEMORY
BOXES (END RECEIVING MACHINES)
Program the end receiving machines to which document data received in the F-code relay broadcast memory box will
be transmitted when your machine is a relay machine.
1
Touch the RECIPIENT key.
SUB ADDRESS
BOX NAME
FAX INFORMATION
123456/987654
RECIPIENT
The address selection
screen appears.
2
Touch the one-touch keys you wish to include
as end receiving machines, touching indexes
and the keys as needed.
F-CODE MEMORY BOX / RELAY BROADCAST
SELECT ADDRESS.
PRODUCTS PLANNING
FREQUENT USE ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC GROUP
SHANE COFFEY
MARKETING GROUP CLIFF QUIROGA
DANIEL ERNY
ADDRESS REVIEW
The selected one-touch keys are highlighted and
programmed as end receiving machines. If you touch
an incorrect key, touch the key again to remove the
highlighting and delete the destination.
3
To check the destinations that have been
selected as end receiving machines, touch the
ADDRESS REVIEW key.
OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC GROUP
ADDRESS REVIEW
The destinations selected
as end receiving machines
are displayed.
You can delete a destination
by touching it. When the
confirmation message
appears, touch the YES key
to delete the destination.
4
Touch the outer OK key.
OK
OK
You will return to the
programming screen for the
F-code relay broadcast
memory box. The number of
selected end receiving
machines appears.
PROGRAMMING, EDITING, AND DELETING F-CODE MEMORY BOXES
EDITING AND DELETING A MEMORY BOX
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key and then
touch the ADDRESS CONTROL key (refer to
steps 1 and 2 on page 6-2).
2
Touch the F-CODE MEMORY BOX key.
3
Touch a memory box key (POLLING MEMORY,
CONFIDENTIAL, or RELAY BROADCAST) on the
bottom line (AMEND/DELETE).
4
Touch the memory box key that you wish to edit
or delete.
MEMORY BOX / AMEND/DELETE
SELECT MEMORY BOX TO AMEND/DELETE.
POLLING MEMORY
REPORT
FAX INFORMATION
EXIT
The memory box edit/delete screen appears.
A "
" mark indicates that data has been stored.
A memory box cannot be edited or deleted when data is
stored in the box.
5
Touch the keys as needed to edit or delete the
information.
F-CODE MEMORY BOX / POLLING MEMORY
No.005
SUB ADDRESS
BOX NAME
REPORT
UNLIMITED
22233311/351212
POLLING TIMES
EXITDELETE
● Edit a memory box in the same way as you
programmed it.
● To delete a memory box, touch the DELETE key
at the upper right of the screen (a message will
appear asking you to confirm the deletion).
● The print PIN. must be entered to edit or delete
a confidential memory box.
● A memory box cannot be edited or cleared while
it is being used for transmission.
NOTES
• Up to 30 end receiving machines (30 one-touch keys or group keys) can be programmed. If you attempt to program more
than this number, a message will appear and programming will not be possible.
• Only destinations that have been programmed in auto dial keys (one-touch keys or group keys) can be selected. If you need
to include a destination that has not been programmed in an auto dial key, first program it in a one-touch key (page 6-3) and
then program the destination as an end receiving machine.
6-14
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key.
2
Touch the LIST PRINT key.
Y
ST
S
L
LIST PRINT
RECEIVE MODE
3
Touch the SENDING ADDRESS LIST key.
SENDING ADDRESS LIST
PRINTER TEST PAGE
ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
4
Touch the key of the list you wish to print.
GS
SS LIST
INDIVIDUAL
LIST
GROUP LIST PROGRAM LIST
MEMORY BOX
LIST
PROCESSING PRINT
DATA appears in the
message display and
printing begins.
To cancel printing, touch the
CANCEL key.
NOTES
• The list is printed before other print jobs are printed.
• If you attempt to print a list when no data exists, a warning message will appear.
PRINTING PROGRAMMED INFORMATION
You can print out lists of the one-touch keys, group keys, programs, and memory boxes that have been stored in the
machine.
6-15
6
■ Entering alphabetical characters
(Example: Sharp äÄ)
1
Touch the S key.
Characters cannot be
entered beyond the " " mark.
To switch between upper case and lower case, touch
the ABC
abc key. When ABC is highlighted, upper
case letters are entered.
2
Touch the ABC abc key.
S
3
Touch the "h" key, "a" key, "r" key, and "p" key.
Shar
If you make a mistake, touch the key to move the cursor
(
■
) back one space and then enter the correct character.
You can also press the AB/ab
12#$% key during entry
to enter a number or symbol.
4
Touch the SPACE key.
Sharp
The cursor (
■
) moves forward and a space is entered.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
To enter or edit characters in setting screens such as auto dial key programming screens, follow the steps below.
Characters that can be entered are alphabetical characters, special characters, numbers, and symbols.
5
Touch the ÃÄÂ/ãäâ key.
Sharp
6
Touch the "ä" key.
Sharp
To switch between upper case and lower case, touch
the ÃÄÂ
ãäâ key. When ãäâ is highlighted, lower case
letters are entered.
7
Touch the ÃÄÂ ãäâ key.
Sharp ä
8
Touch the "Ä" key.
Sharp ä
You can press the ABC/abc key during entry to return to
alphabetical character entry. You can also enter numbers
and symbols.
9
When finished, touch the OK key.
Sharp äÄ
You will exit the character entry screen and return to the
programming screen. If you touch the CANCEL key, you
will return to the programming screen without storing
the entered characters.
6-16
■ Entering numbers and symbols
1
Touch the AB/ab 12#$% key.
When the characters "12#$%" are highlighted, number/
symbol entry mode is selected.
2
Enter the desired number or symbol.
Numbers and symbols that can be entered are as follows:
Screen 1/2
Screen 2/2
* Change screens by touching the key or key
displayed in the screen. If you make a mistake, touch
the
key to move the cursor (■) back one space
and then enter the correct character.
You can continue touching keys to enter characters.
You can also touch another character type selection
key (
ÃÄÂ /ãäâ key or AB/ab 12#$% key) to enter
characters other than numbers and symbols.
3
When you have finished entering characters,
touch the OK key.
1&1
You will exit the character entry screen and return to the
programming screen. If you touch the CANCEL key, you
will return to the programming screen without storing
the entered characters.
NOTE
If you are going to use the Web page to edit or delete the
stored name at a later time, do not use the characters ", <,
or >. These characters cannot be displayed in the Web page.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
7-1
CHAPTER 7
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter contains information to help you make efficient use of the
fax features of the machine, including solutions to common problems.
Page
WHEN A TRANSACTION REPORT IS PRINTED ..................................7-2
VIEWING THE COMMUNICATION ACTIVITY REPORT .......................7-3
WHEN AN ALARM SOUNDS AND A WARNING MESSAGE IS
DISPLAYED ............................................................................................. 7-3
PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS...............................................................7-4
7-2
WHEN A TRANSACTION REPORT IS PRINTED
The machine has been set to automatically print a Transaction Report when a transmission is not successful or when
the Broadcast transmission function is used. The Transaction Report informs you of the result of the operation. When
the machine prints a Transaction Report, be sure to check the contents.
The initial settings (factory settings) for printing Transaction Reports are indicated by shading below. You can
use the key operator program to change the settings (page 8-5).
• Single sending: Print out all report / Print out error report only / No printed report
• Receiving: Print out all report / Print out error report only / No printed report
• Broadcasting: Print out all report / Print out error report only / No printed report
• Confidential reception: Print out notice page / Not print out notice page
The Transaction Report shows the date of transmission, the time transmission began, the other party's name, the
duration of the operation, the number of pages, and the result.
NOTES
• The list count appears in the "#" column of the Transaction Report and a serial number appears in the FILE column. (These
numbers are not related to the transaction.)
• When a transmission error occurs, a portion of the original document is printed along with the Transaction Report. You can
set the machine to not print the original using the key operator program (page 8-5).
■ Information appearing in the TYPE/NOTE column
Information such as the type of transmission and type of error appears in the TYPE/NOTE column of the Transaction
Report. The following notes may appear.
Note Explanation
OK The transaction was completed normally.
G3 Communication took place in G3 mode.
ECM Communication took place in G3 ECM mode.
SG3 Communication took place in Super G3 mode.
FW. The received data was forwarded.
NO RESPONSE No response from the receiving party.
BUSY Transmission was not possible because the other party was already using the line.
CANCEL A transmission was canceled while in progress, or a stored transmission job was canceled.
P. FAIL A power failure occurred during the transaction.
MEMORY OVER The memory became full during quick on-line transmission.
MEM. FULL The memory became full during reception.
LENGTH OVER The transmitted document was over 59" long and therefore could not be received.
ORIGINAL ERROR Manual transmission was not successful because a jam occurred.
PASS# NG The connection was broken because the polling passcode was not correct.
NO RX POLL The machine that was polled does not have a polling function.
RX POLL FAIL The other machine refused the polling operation, or your machine broke the connection
when polled because no data was in memory.
NO F-CODE POLL The other machine refused an F-code polling operation, or your machine broke the connection
when polled because no data was in its F-code memory polling box.
RX POLL# NG Your machine broke the connection because the other machine specified an F-code polling
sub-address that does not exist in your machine.
F PASS# NG
Your machine broke the connection because the other machine sent an incorrect passcode for F-code polling.
BOX NO. NG
Your machine broke the connection because the specified sub-address for an F-code memory box does not exist.
F POLL PASS# NG
Your machine broke the connection because an incorrect passcode was sent for an F-code transmission.
RX NO F-CODE POLL
F-code polling was attempted, however, the other machine did not have an F-code polling memory box.
NO F FUNC
F-code transmission was attempted, however, the other machine does not support F-code communication.
NO F-CODE
An F-code transmission was refused by the other machine because of an incorrect sub-address or other reason.
M. BOX: [xxxxxx] Data was received to a confidential or relay broadcast memory box, or data was sent from a
•••••• memory polling box.
The name of the memory box appears in [xxxxxx], and the type of F-code operation (relay
request reception, polling memory transmission, or confidential reception) appears in •••••• .
FAIL xx(xxxx) The communication handshake signals or image signals were distorted due to line conditions
or other reasons, and communication was not successful.
First two digits of communication error number: Error code from 00 to 31 appears.
Last four digits of communication error number: Codes for use by service technicians.
7-3
7
WHEN AN ALARM SOUNDS AND A WARNING MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
Alarms and display messages alert you to the condition of the machine during operation. If one of the following
messages appears, respond as indicated in the table.
Meaning of message
Printing cannot take place because the
machine is out of suitable paper.
The machine is out of toner and the
received document cannot be printed.
The original jammed in the scanner unit
while being scanned.
The memory became full while the
original was being scanned.
The other party's line is busy.
Polling is not possible because there is
not enough space in memory.
The party you attempted to poll was not
a fax machine.
The transmission did not end normally
due to a communication error and a
Transaction Report was printed.
The transmission did not end normally
due to a communication error and a
Transaction Report was printed.
Manual reception was not possible
because there was not enough free
space in memory.
The indicated cover is open.
The self-diagnosis function has activated
and automatically stopped operation. An
error code appears in xx-xx.
Action
Add the indicated paper.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Reload the indicated
original.
Send only the pages that were
already scanned, or cancel the
entire transmission.
Try the transmission again.
Try polling again after
currently stored jobs are
completed.
Check to make sure the
number you are dialing is
a fax number.
Check the contents of the
Transaction Report and then
try the transmission again.
Check the contents of the
Transaction Report and then
try the transmission again.
Try manual reception again
after currently stored jobs
have been completed.
Close the indicated cover.
Turn off the power and then
turn it back on. If the same
message still appears,
contact your dealer.
Page
Printer
manual, 1-16
Printer
manual, 1-25
1-7
2-4
2-4
-
1-5
7-2
7-2
-
-
7-3 and 7-4
Message screen (Alarm)
OPEN TRAY x AND ADD xxxxxxxx
PAPER.
THE LINE WAS BUSY. FAX TRANSMISSION
WAS SUSPENDED.
PLEASE RETURN xx ORIGINALS TO THE
DOCUMENT TRAY, THEN PRESS [START].
THE MEMORY BECOMES FULL.
SEND SCANNED DATA? OR CANCEL THE JOB?
CHANGE THE TONER CARTRIDGE.
CLOSE THE xxxx COVER.
CLOSE THE DOCUMENT FEEDER.
CLOSE THE LOWER RIGHT SIDE COVER.
CALL FOR SERVICE. CODE:xx-xx
FAX FUNCTION TROUBLE.
POLLING IS NOT POSSIBLE WITH
THE AVAILABLE MEMORY.
POLLING IS AVAILABLE ONLY FOR FAX.
THE FOLLOW DATA COULD NOT BE SENT.
PLEASE GIVE THIS TRANSACTION REPORT TO SENDER.
TRANSMISSION ERROR OCCURRED AT SOME RECEIVERS.
PLEASE GIVE THIS TRANSACTION REPORT TO SENDER.
MANUAL RECEIVE IS DISABLED
DUE TO OUT OF MEMORY.
VIEWING THE COMMUNICATION ACTIVITY REPORT
Your machine keeps a record of the most recent 50 transactions (both transmissions and receptions) that were
performed. The record includes the date of the transaction, the other party's name, the duration, and result. You can
have the report automatically printed when the number of transactions exceeds 50, or at a specified time. This allows
you to check the machine's activity at regular intervals.
The machine is initially set (factory setting) to not print the report. To have the report printed, change the setting with
the key operator program (page 8-5).
NOTES
• After printing, the data is cleared from memory, so the report cannot be printed a second time.
•
Refer to the table in "When a Transaction Report is printed" on the previous page for the notes that appear in the TYPE/NOTE column.
* Printer manual : "Operation manual (for printer operation and general information)"
7-4
PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
If the fax features do not operate normally, please check the following.
Check
Is the fax power switch turned on?
Is the correct dial mode set for your
line?
Is the telephone line properly connected?
Is the main switch turned on?
Is the machine in fax mode?
Does the receiving fax machine have
paper?
Does the receiving machine support
G3 transmission?
Are the sub-address and passcode correct?
Is the receiving machine ready to receive?
Is the original within the range of
transmittable documents?
Was the original placed so that the
correct side is scanned?
If the receiving machine is using
thermal paper, was the thermal paper
loaded with the wrong side out?
Were line conditions poor due to
thunder or another reason?
Were the resolution and exposure
settings suitable?
Is the machine's clock set to the
correct time?
Does a message appear in the display
instructing you to add toner or paper?
(Printing is not possible.)
Was the wrong side of the original
scanned in the transmitting machine?
Is the original faint?
Were line conditions poor due to
thunder or another reason?
Is the document glass or the scanner
in the scanning unit dirty?
Is the volume set to "low"?
Has the ringer volume been turned
off?
Solution
Turn on the fax power switch.
Check your line and set the
correct dial mode.
Check the connections.
Turn the main switch on.
Press the IMAGE SEND key to
set the machine to fax mode.
Check with the operator of the
receiving machine.
Check the transmittable sizes.
Make sure the original is
placed so that the correct side
is scanned.
Check with the operator of the
other machine.
Try the transmission again.
Check the resolution and
exposure settings.
Set the clock to the correct
time.
Restore printing capability as
instructed by the display
message. Printing will begin.
Check with the operator of the
transmitting machine.
Ask the other party to re-send
the document using a suitable
exposure setting.
Ask the other party to send the
document again.
Clean the document glass or the
scanner in the scanning unit.
Set the speaker volume to
"medium" or "high".
Set the ringer volume to "low",
"medium", or "high".
Page
0-1
8-4
Printer manual,0-7
Printer manual,1-4
1-3, 2-2
-
1-8
1-7
-
-
1-9 and 1-10
Printer
manual, 3-15
7-3
-
-
-
Printer
manual, 4-12
8-5
8-5
Problem
The machine does not operate.
Dialing is not possible.
Transmission is not
possible.
The transmitted image
prints out blank at the
receiving side.
The transmitted image is
distorted.
Transmission does not take
place at the specified time.
Printing does not take place
after reception.
A received image prints out
blank.
The received image is faint.
The received image is
distorted.
White or black lines appear
in the transmitted image.
A dial tone is not heard
through the speaker.
A ringing sound is not
made.
Telephone
* Printer manual : "Operation manual (for printer operation and general information)"
8-1
CHAPTER 8
KEY OPERATOR
PROGRAMS
This chapter explains the key operator programs used by key operators.
Key operators should read this chapter well to ensure correct use of the
programs.
Page
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS...............................................................8-2
●KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST ................................................. 8-2
●USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS ..................................8-2
●SETTING PROGRAMS ....................................................................8-3
●PRINTING OUT SETTINGS ............................................................. 8-10
8-2
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
This section explains the key operator programs for the fax features of the machine. For key operator programs that
are related to the printer and copy functions of the machine, refer to the KEY OPERATOR'S GUIDE and "Operation
manual (for copier)".
NOTES
• You may not be able to use all of the programs in the key operator program list. Programs that you can use will depend on
what peripheral devices are installed on the machine.
• Settings established with the key operator programs can be verified by printing them out (page 8-10).
USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
To use a key operator program, follow the procedure on page 6 of KEY OPERATOR'S GUIDE. (Please carefully read
"Supplementary explanation of key operation for key operator programs" on the same page. ) For explanations of each
setting, refer to the following pages.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST
Program name Page
Image send settings
Operation settings
Default display setting 8-3
The number of direct address keys displayed setting
8-3
Must input next address key at broadcast setting
8-3
Initial resolution setting 8-3
Default verification stamp 8-3
Fax default settings
Own number and name set 8-4
Dial mode setting 8-4
Auto wake up print 8-4
Pause time setting 8-4
Speaker volume setting 8-4
Original print on send error report 8-5
Remote reception number setting 8-5
Transaction report print select setting 8-5
Activity report print select setting 8-5
ECM 8-5
Distinctive ring detection 8-5
Fax send settings
Auto reduction sending setting 8-6
Rotation sending setting 8-6
Printing page number at receiver 8-6
Call timer at memory sending 8-7
Date/own number print position setting 8-7
Recall in case of line busy 8-7
Recall in case of communication error 8-7
Times of recall setting in case of line busy
8-7
Interval of recall setting 8-7
Quick on line sending 8-7
Fax receive settings
Auto receive reduce setting 8-8
Number of calls in auto reception 8-8
Duplex reception setting 8-8
Print style setting 8-8
Set the telephone number for data forwarding
8-8
Fax separator page 8-8
Output tray setting 8-8
Fax polling security
Polling security setting 8-9
Passcode number setting 8-9
Set number of times public box may be polled
8-9
8-3
8
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
SETTING PROGRAMS
The setting programs for the fax feature of the machine
are explained here. Explanations of the setting programs
used for the copy feature, setting programs used for the
network scanner feature, and setting programs that are
related to the printer feature can be found in the copy,
network scanner, and printer manuals.
Operation settings
The following operation settings are available:
●Default display setting
●The number of direct address keys displayed setting
●Must input next address key at broadcast setting
●Initial resolution setting
●Default verification stamp
Default display setting
You can select the initial display that appears when
you press the IMAGE SEND key to change to fax
mode or when you press the CA key in fax mode.
Normally the initial display is set to the condition setting
screen (page 1-4).
The following three selections are available:
• Condition setting screen
• Address directory (ABC)
• Address directory (Group)
When an address directory (ABC or Group) is
selected, the selected index of that address directory
(page 1-5) is set as the initial screen.
The number of direct address keys
displayed setting
The number of one-touch keys displayed in each
address directory screen can be changed from 8
(the normal setting) to 6 or 12.
Touch 6, 8, or 12 to select the desired number.
NOTE
For the key name that appears in each one-touch key, a
maximum of 18 characters can appear when the number
of one-touch keys displayed is set to 6 or 8. A maximum of
10 characters can appear when the number of one-touch
keys displayed is set to 12.
Must input next address key at
broadcast setting
You can select whether the NEXT ADDRESS key must
be pressed before entering the next destination when
performing a broadcast transmission (page 3-2).
Normally the machine is set so that touching the NEXT
ADDRESS key can be omitted except when the
numeric keys are used to enter one full fax number
after another full fax number.
Example: Normal setting (factory setting)
XXXX NEXT ADDRESS One-touch NEXT ADDRESS One-touch
Dial
Can be omitted Can be omitted
XXXX NEXT ADDRESS XXXX
Dial
Dial
Cannot be omitted.
If the box is checked, it will no longer be possible to
omit the NEXT ADDRESS key as shown in the
above example. Even if the next destination to be
entered is a one-touch key, the NEXT ADDRESS
key must be touched before the one-touch key can
be entered.
If you attempt to enter a subsequent destination
without touching the NEXT ADDRESS key, the
destination will not be entered.
Initial resolution setting
This setting is used to change the default resolution
setting for fax mode from STANDARD to FINE,
SUPER FINE, or ULTRA FINE. HALF TONE can
also be selected for the latter three resolution
settings. STANDARD is normally selected for the
initial resolution setting. If you wish to select HALF
TONE for the selected resolution setting, touch the
HALF TONE key to highlight it.
NOTES
• HALF TONE cannot be selected for STANDARD
resolution.
• For more information on each of the resolution settings,
refer to page 1-9.
Default verification stamp
(Can only be selected if the optional verification
stamp unit is installed.)
Select this setting if you wish to always have a
verification mark stamped on originals that are
scanned using the scanner unit. Normally this setting
is not selected.
To select this setting, check the box.
8-4
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Fax default settings
The default fax settings can be changed as necessary
to meet your faxing needs.
The default fax settings are as follows:
●Own number and name set
●Dial mode setting
●Auto wake up print
●Pause time setting
●Speaker volume setting
●Original print on send error report
●Remote reception number setting
(only when extension phone is connected)
●Transaction report print select setting
●Activity report print select setting
●ECM (This setting is only effective if the other
machine is a G3 machine that supports ECM)
●Distinctive ring detection
Own number and name set
Use this setting to enter the fax number of the
machine and the name of the user. The entered
name and number are printed at the top of each fax
page you send. The number is also used as a
passcode when performing polling reception (page
3-5).
You can check your entries by printing out the Sender
List. Refer to page 8-10.
1
Touch the NAME key and enter the name.
The name entry screen appears.
Up to 20 characters can be entered for the name. Refer
to page 6-15 for the procedure for entering characters.
2
Touch the FAX No. key and enter the fax number.
Enter up to 20 digits for the number using the numeric
keys.
To enter a "+", press the "
" key.
To enter a space, press the SPACE key.
If you make a mistake, press the C key and re-enter the
correct digit.
3
Touch the OK key.
You will return to the OWN NUMBER AND NAME SET screen.
The number you entered appears. Make sure it is correct.
Dial mode setting
(Setting your line type)
Select the appropriate setting for your line type. "Tone"
is normally selected.
It is also possible to have the machine automatically
select the line type. Make sure that the telephone line
is connected to the machine, and then press the AUTO
SELECT key at the lower right. The machine will
automatically select "Tone" for a tone dial line, or
"Pulse" for a pulse dial line.
Auto wake up print
Use this setting to select how the machine responds
if a fax is received when the main switch is turned
off (the fax switch is turned on).
Auto wake up print is normally turned on, which
means that the machine automatically activates and
prints the received fax. If you turn off this setting,
received faxes will not be printed until the main switch
is turned on.
Pause time setting
This setting is used to select the duration of pauses
that are inserted in destination fax numbers.
Normally the setting is 2 seconds, which means that
each time the PAUSE key is touched when dialing
or storing a fax number, a pause of 2 seconds is
inserted. You can select any number of seconds from
1 to 15.
8-5
8
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Speaker volume setting
This setting lets you adjust the volume of the dial
tone heard through the speaker, the ringer, and the
line monitor. These are normally set to medium.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
SPEAKER VOLUME SETTING
SPEAKER
RINGER VOLUME
LINE MONITOR
OK
Volume: Volume: Volume:
Off
Low Medium High
To change the volume, touch the desired volume key.
Original print on send error report
This setting is used to select whether a portion of the
first page of the original is included on the Transaction
Report that is printed after a memory transmission
error occurs. The machine is normally set to include a
portion of the original.
Remote reception number setting
(only when extension phone is connected)
Fax reception can be activated from an extension
phone connected to the machine by entering a 1-digit
number and pressing " " twice on the phone's keypad.
This number is called the remote reception number,
and you can set it to any number from "0" to "9". The
number is normally set to "5".
Transaction report print select setting
This setting is used to select the conditions for printing
out Transaction Reports. Conditions can be selected
for normal transmissions, broadcast transmissions,
receptions, and confidential receptions.
SINGLE SENDING BROADCASTING
PRINT OUT ALL REPORT PRINT OUT ALL REPORT
PRINT OUT ERROR REPORT ONLY PRINT OUT ERROR REPORT ONLY
NO PRINTED REPORT NO PRINTED REPORT
Touch the key to display the next two settings.
Select the print conditions for receptions and
confidential receptions
RECEIVING
CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION
PRINT OUT ALL REPORT PRINT OUT NOTICE PAGE
PRINT OUT ERROR REPORT ONLY
NOT PRINT OUT NOTICE PAGE
NO PRINTED REPORT
The normal settings are indicated by shading
above.
Activity report print select setting
You can select whether to have the activity report
automatically printed out after 50 transactions (both
transmissions and receptions) have been recorded,
or specify a time that the report is to be automatically
printed out (once a day only). Both settings can be
selected if desired.
The machine is initially set to not print the report. To
have the report automatically printed every 50
transactions, check the AUTO PRINT AT MEMORY
FULL box. To have the report automatically printed at
a specified time, check the PRINT DAILY AT
DESIGNATED TIME box and then select the time with
the HOUR and MINUTE keys that appear.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
ACTIVITY REPORT PRINT SELECT SETTING
AUTO PRINT AT MEMORY FULL
PRINT DAILY AT DESIGNATED TIME
OK
HOUR MINUTE
13 01
Touch the HOUR key and then set the hour by
touching the and keys. Set the minute in the
same way. When finished, touch the OK key.
NOTES
• If you only select the PRINT DAILY AT DESIGNATED
TIME setting and the number of recorded transactions
exceeds 50 before the specified time, each new
transaction will delete the oldest transaction (the oldest
transaction will not be printed).
• The activity report can also be printed out on demand
(page 8-10).
ECM
(This setting is only effective if the other machine is
a G3 machine that supports ECM)
Line conditions can sometimes distort a transmitted
fax image. When ECM (Error Correction Mode) is
turned on, pages that are distorted are automatically
re-transmitted. This setting is initially turned on. If
turned off, distorted images will be transmitted
without being corrected.
NOTE
If the other machine supports Super G3, ECM will function
regardless of the setting.
8-6
Fax send settings
The fax transmission settings allow you to adjust certain
parameters for sending faxes to better suit your needs.
The fax send settings are as follows:
●Auto reduction sending setting
●Rotation sending setting
●Printing page number at receiver
●Call timer at memory sending
●Date/own number print position setting
●Recall in case of line busy
●Recall in case of communication error
●Times of recall setting in case of line busy
●Interval of recall setting
●Quick on line sending
Auto reduction sending setting
This setting lets you select whether to have a transmitted
document reduced to match the size of the other
machine's printing paper. Auto reduction is normally
turned on. If the setting is turned off, documents are
sent in their original size. Because the size is not
adjusted to match the size of the printing paper, part of
the received document may be cut off.
Rotation sending setting
When transmitting a document, this setting allows
you to rotate a vertically oriented 8-1/2"x11"
document to a horizontal orientation (8-1/2"x11"R),
or rotate a 5-1/2"x8-1/2R" document to 5-1/2"x8-1/
2". The setting is normally turned on, and documents
are rotated counterclockwise. (8-1/2"x11"R
documents are not rotated.)
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
ROTATION SENDING SETTING
ORIGINAL
SET
SENDING
DIRECTION
OK
8 X11R
1
/
2
5 X8 R
1
/
2
1
/
2
5 X8
1
/
2
1
/
2
8 X11
1
/
2
Rotation settings can be separately established for
different document sizes. To turn off a rotation setting,
touch the checkbox of the appropriate setting to
remove the checkmark.
Printing page number at receiver
This setting lets you select whether page numbers
are printed at the top of fax pages by the receiving
machine. The normal setting is to have page
numbers printed.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Distinctive ring detection
If multiple telephone numbers have been assigned to
your telephone line, the number called can be identified
by its ringing pattern. By using one number for voice
calls and another number for faxes, you can tell which
type of call you are receiving by the ringing pattern.
You can set your machine to automatically receive
faxes when your fax number is called by setting the
pattern that corresponds to your fax number. Six
selections are available. Normally OFF is selected.
8-7
8
Call timer at memory sending
When sending a fax by automatic transmission, this
setting lets you select the amount of time that the
machine waits before breaking the connection when
the other machine does not respond to your
machine's calling tone. If the other machine does
not respond within this set time, your machine will
automatically break the connection. Time selections
are 30 seconds, 45 seconds, and 60 seconds. This
setting is normally set to 45 seconds.
Date/own number print position setting
This setting lets you select the position (inside or
outside the original image) of the sender's name
and number that are printed at the top of each fax
page you send. Normally OUTSIDE THE ORIGINAL
IMAGE is selected. To have your name and number
printed inside the original image, select INSIDE THE
ORIGINAL IMAGE. For more detailed information
on the position of each setting, refer to page 3-9.
Recall in case of line busy
When sending a document, this setting is used to
select whether your machine will automatically re-
attempt the call when the other machine fails to
answer or the line is busy. Normally your machine is
set to re-attempt the call, and you can set the number
of attempts and the interval between attempts with
the "times of recall setting in case of line busy" and
"interval of recall" settings below.
NOTE
Even if this setting is turned on, your machine will not re-
attempt the call when a document is sent by manual
transmission.
Recall in case of communication error
When sending a document, this setting is used to
select whether your machine will re-attempt the call if
the transmission fails due to a line error. Normally your
machine is set to not automatically re-attempt the call.
To set the machine to automatically re-attempt the
call, touch the box so a checkmark appears, and then
adjust the "interval of recall" setting below. Note that
only one re-attempt is made (the number of re-
attempts cannot be selected).
NOTE
Even if this setting is turned on, your machine will not re-
attempt the call when a document is sent by manual
transmission.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Times of recall setting in case of line busy
If you have set the machine to re-attempt a call when
a fax transmission is not successful due to the line
being busy, this setting lets you select the number
of times the machine re-attempts the call. You can
select any number from 1 to 14. Normally the number
is set to "2".
Interval of recall setting
If you have set the machine to re-attempt a call when
a fax transmission is not successful due to the line
being busy or a communication error, this setting
lets you select the interval at which the machine re-
attempts the call (the attempt is stored as a
transmission job). You can select any number of
minutes from 1 to 15. Normally the number of
minutes is set to "3".
Quick on line sending
When this setting is turned on, the machine will call
the other machine and start transmitting the
document as soon as the first page is scanned.
Transmission therefore takes place at the same time
as any further pages are being scanned. Normally
this setting is turned on.
If you turn the setting off, transmission will not begin
until all pages of the document have been scanned.
Note that this setting does not apply to manual
transmission.
8-8
Print style setting
This setting determines the selection condition for
paper when printing received documents. Select one
of the three conditions below. AUTO SIZE SELECT
is normally selected.
• PRINT ACTUAL SIZE CUT OFF DISABLED
Each received image is printed at actual size
without splitting the image onto multiple sheets of
paper. If there is no paper available that is the same
size as the image or greater, the entire document
is temporarily stored in memory.
• PRINT ACTUAL SIZE CUT OFF ENABLED
Each received image is printed at actual size. If
necessary, the image is split onto multiple sheets
of paper.
• AUTO SIZE SELECT
Each received image is printed at actual size when
possible. When not possible, the image is
automatically reduced before printing.
Set the telephone number for data forwarding
When a problem prevents the machine from printing
a received fax, the transfer function (page 3-12) can
be used to forward the received fax to another fax
machine. Use this setting to program the fax number
of the destination fax machine. Only one fax number
can be programmed (maximum of 64 digits).
If you wish to specify an F-code confidential memory
box in the destination machine, touch the SUB
ADDRESS key after entering the fax number to enter
a slash "/", and then enter the sub-address. Enter a
passcode as well if needed.
Fax separator page
This setting is used to have the machine output a
blank sheet of paper after printing each received
fax. The blank sheet acts as a separator between
received faxes, making it easy to distinguish where
one fax ends and another begins. This setting is
normally turned off.
If you wish to have the machine insert separator
sheets between faxes, touch the box to remove the
checkmark.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
FAX SEPARATOR PAGE
DISABLE FAX SEPARATOR PAGE
PLAIN PLAIN
TRANSPARENCY PLAIN
COLOR
BYPASS
11X17
OK
8 X11
1
/
2
8 X11
1
/
2
5 X8
1
/
2
1
/
2
When the setting is turned on, the tray keys can be
touched. Select the tray from which you would like
the separator paper to be drawn.
Output tray setting
This setting is used to select the output tray for
received faxes. The trays that can be selected will
vary depending on what peripheral devices have
been installed.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Fax receive settings
The fax reception settings allow you to adjust certain
parameters for receiving faxes to better suit your needs.
Settings that can be adjusted depend on the peripheral
devices installed.
The fax receive settings are as follows:
●Auto receive reduce setting
●Number of calls in auto reception
●Duplex reception setting
(only when the duplex module is installed)
●Print style setting
●Set the telephone number for data forwarding
●Fax separator page
●Output tray setting
Auto receive reduce setting
When you receive a fax that includes the sender's
name and number, the received image is slightly larger
than the standard size. This setting lets you select
whether to have the received image automatically
reduced before printing to fit the standard size.
Normally automatic reduction is turned on.
NOTE
If you turn automatic reduction off, the overall printed image
may be larger than the original and in some cases must
be split onto two pages. However, the printed image of the
original itself will be the same size as the original, and
thus clearer.
Number of calls in auto reception
This setting is used to select the number of rings on
which the machine automatically receives a call and
begins fax reception when the reception mode is set
to auto. You can select a number of rings from 0 to 15.
Normally "2" is selected.
NOTE
If you select "0" for the number of rings, the machine will
immediately answer and begin fax reception without ringing
in auto reception mode.
However, do not select "0" when an extension phone is
connected to the machine.
Duplex reception setting
(only when the duplex module is installed)
When the duplex module is installed, you can use this
setting to select whether received documents are
printed on both sides of the paper. Normally this setting
is turned off. If turned on, received documents will be
printed on both sides of the paper whenever the
received document consists of two or more pages of
the same paper size.
8-9
8
Deleting a passcode
1
Touch the DELETE key.
The passcode delete screen appears.
2
Touch the key of the number you wish to delete.
Touch the YES key in the message that appears to delete the
number. If you touch the NO key, you will return to the passcode
delete screen without deleting the number.
Set number of times public box may be polled
This setting is used to select whether the document
stored in the Public Box is automatically cleared after
one polling transmission (polling memory), or
whether the document is left in the Public Box to
allow polling an unlimited number of times.
Normally the machine is set to automatically clear
the document after transmission (the ONCE key is
highlighted), so that polling can only take place once.
If you wish to leave the document in the Public Box
to allow polling an unlimited number of times, select
the UNLIMITED key.
Fax polling security
These settings are for using the Public Box for polling
memory. Note that they do not apply to F-code polling
memory.
The fax polling security are as follows:
●Polling security setting
●Passcode number setting
●Set number of times public box may be polled
Polling security setting
When performing polling memory, this setting is used
to select whether any machine will be allowed to
poll your machine, or only machines that have been
programmed in your machine. Polling security is
normally turned on (a checkmark appears in the box).
To allow any machine to poll your machine, touch
the box to remove the checkmark.
Passcode number setting
When the polling security setting is turned on, use
this setting to program (or delete) the fax numbers of
the machines that are allowed to poll your machine.
Programmed fax numbers are called passcodes. Up
to 10 fax numbers can be programmed.
Programming passcode numbers
1
Touch the ENTER key.
The passcode entry screen appears.
2
Touch a blank key (a key in which no number
appears).
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
PASSCODE NUMBER SETTING
ENTER
0666211221
0743535521
OKCANCEL
Keys with numbers cannot be touched.
If numbers have been stored in all of the keys, a message will
appear and no further numbers can be stored. First delete a
number that is no longer needed and then store the new
number.
3
Press the numeric keys to store the fax number.
Up to 20 digits can be entered.
To enter a space, touch the SPACE key. To enter a "+",
press the "
" key.
If you make a mistake, press the C key.
4
Touch the OK key.
You will return to the screen of step 2 and the stored fax
number will appear. To store another number, repeat steps 2
through 4.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
8-10
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
PRINTING OUT SETTINGS
Settings established with the key operator programs can be verified by printing them out.
1
Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key.
2
Touch the KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS key.
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
RECEIVE MO
LIST PRIN
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
ADDRESS
CONTROL
3
Touch the LIST PRINT key.
ON
GS
END
GS
DEVICE CONTROL
LIST PRINT
4
Touch the ALL KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
LIST key.
IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT
SENDER LIST
ALL KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS LIST
PROCESSING PRINT DATA
appears in the message
screen and printing begins.
To cancel printing, touch the
CANCEL key.
NOTES
• The list is printed before other jobs waiting to be printed.
• In the screen of Step 4, you can touch the SENDER LIST key to print the Sender List. This allows you to check the name and
fax number you programmed in "Own number and name set" on page 8-4.
• In the screen of Step 4, you can touch the IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT key to print an activity report (transmissions
and receptions). Print this list when you wish to check the activity record.
9-1
CHAPTER 9
APPENDIX
This chapter contains reference information regarding the fax features of
the machine.
Page
SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................9-2
9-2
SPECIFICATIONS
For information on power requirements, power consumption, dimensions, weight, and other specifications that are common to all
features of the machine, refer to page 6-2 of "Operation manual (for printer operation and general information)".
For the specifications of the scanner unit, refer to "Operation manual (for copier)".
Applicable telephone line Public switched telephone network
Compression method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Transmission modes Super G3, G3 (the machine can only send faxes to and receive faxes from machines
that support G3 or Super G3)
Scanning method CCD flatbed scanning
Scanning resolution 200 x 100 dpi (Standard)
(Supports ITU-T standards) 200 x 200 dpi (Fine, Fine-Halftone)
300 x 300 dpi (Super Fine, Super Fine - Halftone)
400 x 400 dpi (Ultra Fine, Ultra Fine - Halftone)
Printing method Electrophotographic system (laser)
Transmission speed 33.6 kbps
2.4 kbps Automatic fallback
Transmission time*
1
2 seconds (Super G3 mode / 33.6 kbps, JBIG), 6 seconds (G3 ECM mode / 14.4
kbps, MMR)
Paper sizes 11"x17" to 5-1/2"x8-1/2", A3, B4, A4, B5, A5
Effective print width 11" max. (11"x17" printing)
Input document size 11"x17" to 5-1/2"x8-1/2" (5-1/2"x8-1/2": Vertically-oriented feeding); Maximum length:
31-1/2" (using DSPF)
*Refer to pages 2 - 4 for transmission of 5-1/2"x8-1/2" size documents.
Effective scanning width 11.7" maximum
Halftone transmission Yes (256 levels)
Contrast adjustment Automatic (dark and light by manual adjustment)
Extension telephone connection
Possible (1 telephone)
Auto dialing Combined total of 500 one-touch and group keys, redialing (automatic)
Timer transmission Yes
Program function Yes (8 programs)
F-code support Yes (can transmit and receive SUB/SEP (sub-address) and SID/PWD (passcode)
signals)
Automatic document feeding Yes (50 pages; 8-1/2"x14" or larger sizes: 30 pages)
Image memory 2 MB*
2
Error Correction Mode (ECM) Yes
*1Transmission speed is for an 8-1/2"x11" document with approximately 700 characters at standard resolution
(8x3.85 lines/mm) sent in high speed mode (33.6 kbps (JBIG) or 14.4 kbps (MMR)). This is only the time required
to transmit the image information; the time required to send protocol signals is not included. Actual transmission
times will vary depending on the contents of the document, the receiving machine type, and telephone line conditions.
*2Image memory can be expanded by installing the optional fax expansion memory (8 MB).
Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine.
9-3
9
NOTE
9-4
NOTE
LASER PRINTER
Operation Manual
(for facsimile)
Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to gain
the maximum benefit from the product.
Before installing this product, be sure to read the installation
requirements and cautions sections of the "Operation manual
for printer operation and general information".
Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference
including this manual, the "Operation manual for printer
operation and general information" and operation manuals for
any optional equipment which has been installed.
350LP,450LP,350M,450M,3500,
3501,3551,4500,4501,4551
Operation manual for facsimile
SHARP CORPORATION
PRINTED IN CHINA
2001D
KS1
TINSE2114FCZZ
LASER PRINTER
Operation manual
(for printer operation and general information)
Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to
gain the maximum benefit from the product.
Before installing this product, be sure to read the
installation requirements and cautions sections.
Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference
including this manual, the "Operation manual for printer
operation and general information" and operation manuals
for any optional equipment which has been installed.
The power switch positions are marked “
I
” to indicate power “ON” and “ ” to indicate stand-by.
In the stand-by position, power is being supplied to a drying heater within the optical system of the copier.
Caution:
For complete electrical disconnection, pull out the main plug.
The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
FOR YOUR RECORDS ...
To protect against loss or theft, record and retain for reference the printer’s serial number located on the back
of the unit.
Model Number
Serial Number
Date of Purchase
Place of Purchase
Authorized Sharp Printer
Service Department Number
Warranty
While every effort has been made to make this document as accurate and helpful as possible, SHARP
Corporation makes no warranty of any kind with regard to its content. All information included herein is
subject to change without notice. SHARP is not responsible for any loss or damages, direct or indirect,
arising from or related to the use of this operation manual.
© Copyright SHARP Corporation 2001. All rights reserved. Reproduction, adaptation or translation without
prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under copyright laws.
Trademark Acknowledgments
Microsoft Windows, MS-DOS, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and
other countries.
Macintosh, Power Macintosh, Mac OS, LaserWriter, and AppleTalk are registered trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc.
IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
PCL is a trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
0-1
1. The machine should be installed near an accessible
power outlet for easy connection.
2. Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power
outlet that meets the specified voltage and current
requirements. Also make certain the outlet is properly
grounded.
●
For the power supply requirements, see the name
plate of the main unit.
3. Do not install your machine in areas that are:
●
damp, humid, or very dusty
●
exposed to direct sunlight
●
poorly ventilated
●
subject to extreme temperature or humidity
changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater.
4. Be sure to allow the required space around the
machine for servicing and proper ventilation.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Improper installation may damage this product. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the
machine is moved.
31-1/2"
(80cm)
23-5/8"
(60cm)
23-5/8" (60cm)
11-13/16" (30cm)
A small amount of ozone is produced within the printer during operation. The emission
level is insufficient to cause any health hazard.
NOTE:
The present recommended long term exposure limit for ozone is 0.1 ppm (0.2 mg/m
3
)
calculated as an 8 hr. time-weighted average concentration.
However, since the small amount that is emitted may have an objectionable odor, it is
advisable to place the copier in a ventilated area.
0-2
Moving this machine
Lift this machine at the positions shown in the illustration below and carry it horizontally.
CAUTION
Two people are required to lift and carry this machine.
The center of gravity of the machine is slightly to the left of the center of the machine when viewed from the front. If a
duplex module is installed the center of gravity will be even further shifted to the left. When lifting the machine be
careful to steady it to prevent it from toppling. Also be sure that all covers and the duplex module are securely closed
and latched before lifting.
If a duplex module is installed, do not lift the machine by the module as it may come off causing it and the machine
to drop.
Remove the multi purpose drawer and lift at the positions shown in the illustration.
For removal and installation of the multi purpose drawer, see page 4-4. To avoid injury be sure to completely remove the
multi purpose drawer.
Front side Rear side
If the machine has been placed on a stand/paper drawer:
The stand/paper drawer is on casters for moving. Unlock the adjusters of the stand/paper drawer and gently move the
machine taking care to steady it to prevent it from toppling.
For locking and unlocking the adjusters, see page 0-3.
CAUTION
The center of gravity of this machine is a little deviated to the left from the center. If the machine is not equipped with
a multi purpose drawer or a stand/paper drawer, take care in opening the left side cover (or the duplex module) not
to cause toppling of the machine.
Remove the multi
purpose drawer
in advance.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
0-3
Fusing unit
Adjuster
Lock Release
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS MACHINE CONTAINS A MANGANESE DIOXIDE BATTERY WHICH MUST BE DISPOSED
OF PROPERLY. CONTACT YOUR SHARP DEALER OR SERVICER FOR INSTRUCTIONS.
This product utilizes tin-lead solder, and a fluorescent lamp containing a small amount of mercury.
Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations.
For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries
Alliance: www.eia.org
CAUTIONS
1. Do not touch the photoconductive drum. Scratches
or smudges on the drum will cause dirty prints.
2. The fusing unit is extremely hot. Exercise care in
this area.
3. Do not look directly at the light source of the scanner
module. Doing so may damage your eyes.
4. Five adjusters are provided on all optional stand/
paper drawer units. These adjusters should be
lowered until they contact the floor.
5. Do not make any modifications to this machine.
Doing so may result in personal injury or damage to
the machine.
6. Since this machine is heavy, it is recommended that
it be moved by more than one person to prevent
injury.
7. When connecting this machine to a computer, be
sure to first turn both the computer and the machine
off.
8. Do not print anything which is prohibited from printing
by law. The following items are normally prohibited
from printing by national law. Other items may be
prohibited by local law.
●
Money
●
Stamps
●
Bonds
●
Stocks
●
Bank drafts
●
Checks
●
Passports
●
Driver's licenses
0-4
CAUTIONS
Cautions on laser
Wave length
785 nm
+10 nm
−15 nm
Pulse times North America: 35 cpm model: (4.1 µs ± 4.1 ns)/7 mm
45 cpm model: (5.7 µs ± 5.7 ns)/7 mm
Europe: 35 cpm model: (3.8 µs ± 3.8 ns)/7 mm
45 cpm model: (4.4 µs ± 4.4 ns)/7 mm
Output power 0.2 mW - 0.4 mW
At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.4
MILLIWATT PLUS 8 % and is maintained constant by the operation of the Automatic
Power Control (APC).
Caution
This product contains a low power laser device. To ensure safety do not remove any cover or attempt to gain
access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.
For North America:
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This Digital Equipment is rated Class 1 and complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the
CDRH standards. This means that the equipment does not produce hazardous laser radiation. For
your safety, observe the precautions below.
●
Do not remove the cabinet, operation panel or any other covers.
●
The equipment's exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches. Do not bypass any
safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into switch slots.
Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
0-5
For Europe:
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT
CAUTION
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION
WHEN OPEN INTERLOCKS
DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE
TO BEAM.
VORSICHT
UNSICHTBARE
LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN
ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG
ÜBERBRÜCKT. NICHT DEM
STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
ADVARSEL
USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING
VED ÅBNING, NÅR
SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER
UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ
UDSAETTELSE FOR
STRÅLNING.
VAROITUS!
LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN
MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ
KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA
MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA
ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN
TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1
YLITTÄVÄLLE
NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE
LASERSÄTEILYLLE.
VARNING
OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ
ANNAT SÄTT ÄN I DENNA
BRUKSANVISNING
SPECIFICERATS, KAN
ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTAS FÖR
OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING,
SOM ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN
FÖR LASERKLASS 1.
CAUTION
VORSICHT
ADVARSEL
ADVERSEL
VARNING
VARO!
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
Laserstrahl
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERERÜCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING, NÅR SIKKERHEDSAFBRYDERE ER
UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR STRÅLNING.
USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES OG SIKKERHEDSLÅS BRYTES.
UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.
OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRRAR ÄR
URKOPPLADE. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.
AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTÖNTÄ
LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
CAUTIONS
0-6
FACSIMILE FEATURE
To extend the capabilities of this product to include facsimile functions, an optional facsimile expansion kit must be
installed. Refer to the facsimile operation manual for details on using the facsimile features.
■■
■■
■ Line connection
Use the telephone cable supplied with the facsimile expansion kit to
connect the machine to a telephone line. Connect the cable so that
the connector nearest to the noise suppression core is inserted into
the socket located of the expansion kit box. Insert the other end into
the telephone line socket.
■■
■■
■ Fax power switch
For the facsimile features to function, the power switch located on
the expansion kit box must be turned on.
TEL
LINE
Line connector
Core
TEL
LINE
OFF
ON
Fax power
switch
0-7
CONTENTS
Page
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-1
●
Carrying this machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
FACSIMILE FEATURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7
CHAPTER 1
BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
MAIN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
●
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
●
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
●
Part names and functions of
peripheral devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
●
Operation panel of the main unit. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
●
Operation panel of the scanner module . . . . . 1-12
●
Touch panel (on the scanner module) . . . . . . . 1-13
LOADING PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
●
Loading paper in paper tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
●
Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 . . . . . 1-16
●
Specifications of paper trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
●
Setting the paper size and type . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
●
Loading paper in the multi purpose drawer . . . 1-21
●
Specifications (multi purpose drawer). . . . . . . 1-23
●
Loading paper in the stand/
3 x 500 sheet paper drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
●
Specifications
(stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer) . . . . . . . . 1-23
●
Loading paper in the stand/
MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
●
Specifications
(stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer) . . . . 1-24
ADDING TONER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
STORAGE OF SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
CHAPTER 2
PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER
CONNECTING TO A COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
SOFTWARE FOR WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS AND
PRINTER UTILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
UNINSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS AND
PRINTER UTILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS USING PLUG &
PLAY OR THE “ADD PRINTER WIZARD” . . . . . . 2-4
●
Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
SETTING THE PRINTER DRIVER. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
●
Printer driver settings under Windows
(selecting and setting print conditions) . . . . . . . 2-5
PRINTER CONFIGURATION THROUGH
THE NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
●
Environment required for accessing
Web pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
●
Accessing Web pages and displaying help. . . . 2-6
●
Items and outline of menu frame of
Web pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
JOB CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
●
“JOB CONTROL” operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
●
Hold job list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
●
Printer account control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
USING THE MACHINE AS A POSTSCRIPT
PRINTER ............................................................ 2-13
●
Using the printer in the Windows
environment .................................................... 2-13
●
Using the printer in the Macintosh
environment .................................................... 2-15
CHAPTER 3
PRINTER BASIC SETTINGS
MAKING CONFIGURATION SETTING . . . . . . . . 3-2
●
Operation procedure common to all printer
configuration settings (items that can be set
from the operation panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
●
Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
●
PCL settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
●
PostScript settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
CUSTOM SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
●
Operation procedure common to all custom
settings (items that can be set from the
operation panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
●
Setting items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
0-8
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 4
TROUBLESHOOTING AND
MAINTENANCE
MISFEED REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
●
General misfeed removal procedure . . . . . . . . . 4-2
●
Misfeed removal guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
●
Misfeed in the paper feed area . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
●
Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area,
and exit area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
●
Misfeed in the duplex module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
USER MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
●
Cleaning the scanner module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
CHAPTER 5
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
DUPLEX MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
●
Part names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
●
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
●
Loading paper in the bypass tray . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
●
Setting the printer driver for duplex module,
bypass tray and exit tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
●
Copying in the duplex mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
●
Troubleshooting (concerning the duplex module) 5-5
MAIL-BIN STACKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
●
Part names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
●
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
●
Specifying mail bins to receive printed output . 5-7
●
Setting in the printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
●
Misfeed in the mail-bin stacker . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
FINISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
●
Part names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
●
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
●
Finisher functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
●
Using the finisher functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
●
Staple cartridge replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
●
Misfeed in the finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
●
Troubleshooting finisher problems . . . . . . . . . 5-15
●
Stapling position quick reference guide for
duplex output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
●
Part names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
●
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
●
Saddle stitch finisher functions . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
●
Using the saddle stitch finisher . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
●
Staple cartridge replacement and
staple jam removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
●
Misfeed in the saddle stitch finisher. . . . . . . . 5-24
●
Troubleshooting
(concerning the saddle stitch finisher) . . . . . . 5-26
●
Stapling position quick reference guide for
duplex output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
●
Relation between print image and
saddle stitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
CHAPTER 6
APPENDIX
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
●
List of principal printer driver functions . . . . . . . 6-3
LIST OF COMBINATION OF
PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
NOTICE PAGE PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
PRINT AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
1-1
CHAPTER 1
BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT
This chapter describes basic information that should be read before using
this product.
Page
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................... 1-2
MAIN FEATURES .................................................................................. 1-3
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS ......................................................... 1-4
● Exterior ............................................................................................ 1-4
● Interior ............................................................................................. 1-5
● Part names and functions of peripheral devices ............................ 1-6
● Operation panel of the main unit..................................................... 1-9
● Operation panel of the scanner module ......................................... 1-12
● Touch panel (on the scanner module)............................................ 1-13
LOADING PAPER.................................................................................. 1-16
● Loading paper in paper tray 1......................................................... 1-16
● Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 ........................................ 1-16
● Specifications of paper trays ........................................................... 1-17
● Setting the paper size and type ...................................................... 1-19
● Loading paper in the multi purpose drawer.................................... 1-21
● Specifications (multi purpose drawer) ............................................ 1-23
● Loading paper in the stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer ............... 1-23
● Specifications (stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer) ........................ 1-23
● Loading paper in the stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer....... 1-24
● Specifications (stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer) ............... 1-24
ADDING TONER ................................................................................... 1-25
STORAGE OF SUPPLIES ..................................................................... 1-25
1-2
INTRODUCTION
To gain the maximum benefits in using this product, it is recommended that the user read this manual to become
familiar with all the features and functions of the basic product and the precautionary information contained in the
manual.
NOTE
In this manual, American spellings are used.
This product is a high speed laser printer that can be extended to become multifunctional through the installation of
optional peripheral devices. The product can be extended to include copier, network scanning, facsimile or network
printing capabilities. This manual describes the basic use of the product as a printer and does not contain use information
for any of the optional peripheral devices. Separate operation manuals are included with each of the optional peripheral
devices. Refer to these manuals for their operation.
Original and paper sizes
This machine allows use of standard sizes in both the inch and AB systems.
The standard sizes available in this machine are shown below.
Sizes in the inch system Sizes in the AB system
When the machine is being When the machine is being
operated from the operation operated from the touch panel on
panel on the main unit: a scanner module:
LEDGER 11 x 17 A3
LEGAL 8-1/2 x 14 B4
FOOLSCAP 8-1/2 x 13 A4
LETTER 8-1/2 x 11 B5
EXECUTIVE 7-1/4 x 10-1/2 A5
INVOICE 5-1/2 x 8-1/2
In this manual, the indications for the scanner module touch panel as shown in the table above are used.
The meaning of “R” in original and paper size indications
Some original and paper sizes can be placed in either the portrait or landscape orientations. To differentiate between
landscape and portrait, the landscape orientation size indication will contain an “R”. These are indicated as 8-1/2 x 11R,
5-1/2 x 8-1/2R, A4R, B5R, etc. Sizes that can be placed only in the landscape orientation (11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x
13, A3, B4) do not contain the “R” in their size indication.
Size indication with “R” Size indication without “R”
Landscape orientation Portrait orientation
1-3
1
MAIN FEATURES
Laser printer able to accept a range of peripherals allowing it to be configured to specific needs
This product is a laser printer that can be used as a local printer which can be configured by the addition of
peripheral devices to extend its capabilities to include copier, network printer, network scanner or facsimile features.
A range of optional units to enhance productivity
Optional additions such as duplex units for producing two-sided output, additional paper feed units to increase the
variety of available paper sizes and paper capacity, paper output units to sort and otherwise organize the output
and a scanner module for automatically scanning documents.
600 dpi high resolution printing
High-definition and high quality printing with 600 dpi resolution can be performed. Also high image quality equivalent
to 1200 dpi can be output by using a smoothing function.
High speed monochrome printing
Depending upon the model chosen, high speed printing at 35 letter (A4) size pages/minute or 45 letter (A4) size
pages/minute is available.
PostScript compatible
Installation of a PS3 expansion kit gives PostScript compatibility (PostScript level 3).
Energy saving features
This product has the following two power reducing modes that conform to the
Energy Star guidelines which help to conserve natural resources and reduce
environmental pollution.
Preheat mode
The preheat mode is the first level of power reduction. The power is reduced
to the fuser unit a preset time after the machine has completed a job and no
further machine operations have been made. The machine can recover to
the ready condition within a short period of time. The preset time to enter
the mode can be set by a key operator program.
Auto power shut-off mode
The auto power shut-off mode is the second level of power reduction. In this
mode power is shut off to the fusing unit and the touch panel. In this state
more energy is saved than in the preheat mode but the time to recover to
the ready condition will be longer. The preset time to enter this mode can be
set by a key operator program.
When this product is used as a printer, and either of the above modes is active, the mode will be deactivated
automatically by an incoming job and the machine will automatically warm up and start to print when it has
reached the ready temperature.
When this product is configured for multi-function operation, and either of the above modes is active, the mode
will be deactivated as above by either an incoming print job or received facsimile data. Either mode will also be
deactivated by any key operation on the operation panel or by the action of an original being placed for copying
or facsimile transmission.
As an
ENERGY STA R
®
Partner, SHARP has
determined that this
product meets the
ENERGY STAR
®
guidelines for energy
efficiency.
1-4
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Exterior
Bypass tray paper guide
Exit tray*
Duplex module/bypass tray*
Module for two-sided printing
Upper paper output area
Finished sheets are deposited here.
Upper exit tray extension*
Provides support for large size paper.
Operation panel (See page 1-9.)
Front cover
Open to add toner .
Main switch
Press to turn power on and off.
Paper tray 1
Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer* (See page 1-23.)
Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer* (See page
1-24.)
Multi purpose drawer* (See page 1-21.)
* , , , , , and are peripheral devices. For description of these devices, see page 1-7. One of devices ,
, and must be installed. If you install or , a power supply unit (page 1-8) must also be installed.
1-5
1
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Interior
* For replacement and installation of cartridges, refer to the Operation Manual (Read this document before installing the
product.).
Duplex module side cover
Open when a misfeed has occurred in the duplex
module.
Side cover latch
Push up to open the side cover when a misfeed has
occurred in the main unit.
Fusing unit
Lift up to open the side cover when a misfeed has
occurred in the main unit.
CAUTION
The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing misfed
paper.
Developer cartridge*
This cartridge contains developer and must be
removed and replaced by a new cartridge when
indicated on the operation panel.
Toner cartridge (drum/toner cartridge)*
The toner cartridge must be replaced when indicated
on the operation panel.
Photoconductive drum
Images are formed on the photoconductive drum.
NOTE
Do not touch or damage the photoconductive drum.
Cartridge lock lever
When replacing the drum, toner or developer cartridge,
turn down this lever and pull it out.
1-6
Part names and functions of peripheral devices
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
1-7
1
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Some peripheral devices cannot be installed together while others may require the installation of one or more others to
be functional. See page 6-4, “LIST OF COMBINATION OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES.”
Peripheral devices are basically optional, but some are provided as standard equipment for some models.
B/W scanner module/DSPF (AR-EF1)
This unit is a monochrome scanner that uses two
scanning modes. In one mode, sheet originals are
fed and scanned by the action of the moving originals.
In this mode either one side of an original can be
scanned or both sides of an original can be scanned
at the same time. The other mode of scanning uses
a moving mirror for scanning originals placed on the
glass platen.
Upper exit tray extension (AR-TE4)
Mount this unit to the upper paper exit tray. This
extension is needed to support large size paper.
Finisher (AR-FN6)
Output sheets can either be sorted in page order or
grouped by page. Sorted sets or groups are offset
stacked for easy separation when removed. Sorted
sets can be delivered either stapled or unstapled.
Mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1)
This unit is an output sorter that has seven receiving
bins.
The bin to receive printed output can be selected in
the printer driver. Each bin can be assigned to receive
printed output by an individual person or by groups
of people so that their prints are separated from other
users making them easy to retrieve.
When this unit is installed, any copies or facsimile
prints will be sent to the top tray and not into the
mail bins.
Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer (AR-D13)
This paper feed unit contains an upper multi-purpose
drawer (see item
) and a lower drawer which can
hold a maximum of 2000 sheets of 20 lbs. (80 g/m
2
)
paper.
Multi purpose drawer (AR-MU1)
Up to 500 sheets of 20 lbs. (80 g/m
2
) paper can be
loaded. Also special papers such as envelopes
(standard sizes only) and postcards can be set.
Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer (AR-D14)
This paper feed unit contains an upper multi-purpose
drawer (see item
) and two lower drawers each of
which can hold a maximum of 500 sheets of 20 lbs.
(80 g/m
2
) paper.
Saddle stitch finisher (AR-FN7)
The saddle stitch finisher can automatically place
two staples for centerline binding of prints or copies
and fold them along the centerline.
An optional hole punch module (AR-PN1B) is
available for installation into the finisher.
Duplex module (AR-DU3)
An optional duplex module must be installed for
automatic two-sided printing.
Duplex module/bypass tray (AR-DU4)
This module is basically the same as
above with
the addition of a manual bypass paper feed unit.
Exit tray (AR-TE3)
Mounted to the paper output port of a duplex module.
1-8
■■
■■
■ Other optional equipment
●
Scanner rack (AR-RK1)
This rack is required to support the scanner module
above the printer.
●
Power supply unit (AR-DC1)
Some peripheral devices require the installation of
this power supply.
●
Print server card (AR-NC5J)
A NIC (network interface card) is necessary for
connecting the printer to a network.
●
Multi-function controller board (AR-M11)
This print controller is necessary to provide copier,
facsimile and network scanning capabilities.
●
PS3 expansion kit (AR-PK1)
This kit provides compatibility of PostScript level 3
to the printer.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
●
Hard disk drive (AR-HD3)
Extends the image storing capacity for the printer
and copier features. This unit is required for the job
retention function (see page 2-9) to operate.
●
Facsimile expansion kit (AR-FX5)
This kit is required to add facsimile features.
●
Additional fax memory (8 MB) (AR-MM9)
●
Network scanner expansion kit (AR-NS2)
This kit is required to add the network scanning
feature.
1-9
1
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Operation panel of the main unit
The display and indicators show the current status of the printer. All printer settings are made by using the keys and
display panel.
Message display
Displays the current status of the printer.
[ i ] displayed in any message indicates that the
[INFORMATION] key should be pressed.
[ERROR] indicator
Lights up when paper or toner must be added or when
a misfeed has occurred in the machine. Blinks when
an abnormal condition has occurred in the machine.
[DATA] indicator
Lights up or blinks when print data is being received
or output. Also lights up when job data is stored by
the job retention function (page 2-9).
[READY] indicator
Print data can be received when this indicator is lit.
[MENU] key
Press to select a menu group such as printer
configuration menu (page 3-2), custom settings (page
3-5) or execution of print jobs held by the retention
function (page 2-9). Also, press to return to the job
status screen from the setting screen of each job
status group.
[ / ] keys
Press to select menu or function items or to set
numerical values for those items.
[BACK/C] key
Use this key to return to the previous screen in each
menu selection, to cancel and delete the current job
or to delete a reserved job that has been selected.
[OK] key
Press to register the selected menu or function.
[INFORMATION] key
When [ i ] is displayed with a message indicating a
paper misfeed, the relevant operation procedure can
be displayed by pressing the [INFORMATION] key.
If the [INFORMATION] key or the [BACK/C] key is
pressed while the operation procedure is displayed,
the information mode will be canceled. If you press
and hold down this key while printing is being
performed or in standby, the total number of printed
pages and quantity of toner remaining (as a
percentage) will be displayed.
1-10
PRINT JOBS ON HOLD
SET OPERATIONS
CONDITIONS
CUSTOM SETTINGS
KEY OPERATOR
PROGRAMS
Job status screen
The message "WARMING UP" will be displayed when the power is turned on
and a list of the current job plus reserved jobs or a list of completed jobs will
be displayed on the job status screen. Examples of the various messages
which will be displayed are shown below.
(Display example)
[ADD PAPER]
When the status display shows [ADD PAPER], paper is required to
complete a job in progress. In this case, printing of the job will be
suspended until the required paper is added or another paper is
selected (see "Setting the paper size and type" on page 1-19).
While a current job is suspended, the printer will print a reserved
job if paper is available from another source for that job but will not
print any other jobs.
The printer is warming up.
The printer is ready to print.
The printer is currently printing.
Out of toner. Replace the toner
cartridge. See the separate
operation manual entitled
"Operation Manual (Read this
document before installing the
product.)".
A misfeed has occurred. (See
page 4-2.)
Out of paper. Load paper. (See
page 1-16.)
Print hold
If the job retention function is used from your computer, print data will
be stored in the printer as a hold job.
The job retention function can be used only if the printer is equipped
with a hard disk drive unit. (See page 2-9.)
Condition settings
The printer condition settings are used for basic printer settings. (See
page 3-2.)
Custom settings
Custom settings are used to make settings based on use patterns.
(See page 3-5.)
Key operator programs
These are settings used by key operators (administrators of this
product). For the use of these programs, see the Key Operator's
Guide.
[MENU] key
[MENU] key
[MENU] key
[MENU] key
[MENU] key
READY.
WARMING UP.
READY.
FROM TRAY #
CHANGE THE TONER
CARTRIDGE.
PAPER JAM.
ADD PAPER.*
*
Menu group and explanation of the use of the keys on the main unit operation panel
The menu groups are classified into five groups and are selected consecutively by pressing the [MENU] key. If the
[OK] key is pressed when the desired menu screen is displayed, a message will appear to indicate the next required
operation.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
1-11
1
Canceling a print job and deleting print data
●●
●●
●
To cancel a print job in progress and delete the print data:
Press the [BACK/C] key during printing. Printing will stop and a message asking for confirmation to delete the job
will appear. To delete the data, press the [OK] key.
To cancel deletion, press the [BACK/C] key. Printing will resume.
●●
●●
●
To delete print data of a reserved job (jobs stored in the printer):
Print data transmitted from computers will be stored in this printer (up to 99 jobs) and will be printed sequentially. To
delete print data of a reserved job before starting printing, press the [ ] or [ ] key to display the desired data in the
message display. If you press the [BACK/C] key at this time, a confirmation message for deletion will appear. To
delete the data, press the [OK] key.
To cancel deletion, press the [BACK/C] key. Printing will resume.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
1-12
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Operation panel of the scanner module
When the printer is equipped with a scanner module, the operation panel on the main unit will become inoperative and
the panel on the scanner module must be used.
Touch panel
The machine status, messages and touch keys are
displayed on the panel. The display will change to
show the status of print, copy, network scan or fax
according to which of those modes is selected. For
details see the next page.
Mode select keys and indicators
Use to switch the display mode of the touch panel.
[PRINT] key/READY indicator/DATA indicator
Press to enter the print mode. (See next page.)
●●
●●
●
READY indicator
Print data can be received when this indicator is
lit.
●●
●●
●
DATA indicator
Lights up or blinks when print data is being
received. Also lights up or blinks when printing is
being performed.
[IMAGE SEND] key/LINE indicator/DATA indicator
Press to enter the network scan/fax mode. (See the
facsimile operation manual.)
[COPY] key
Press to select the copy mode.*
[JOB STATUS] key
Press to display the current job status. (See page
1-14.)
[CUSTOM SETTINGS] key
Use to adjust the contrast of the touch panel or to
set key operator programs. (See page 3-5.)
Numeric keys
Use to enter number values for various settings.
[ ] key ([ACC.#-C] key)
Use for account control for copying and fax sending.
[#/P] key*
This key is used as a program key for copy features
and in dialing for fax features.
[C] key*
This key is active for copy and fax features.
Start key*
Use to start copying and fax jobs.
[CA] key*
Functions in the copy and fax modes.
* See the operation manual for copier operation.
1-13
1
SELECT JOB.
PRINT HOLD JOB LIST
Sharp 005
Sharp 006
Microsoft Word - Test001
EXCEL1
1/1
CONDITION
SETTINGS
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Touch panel (on the scanner module)
Print mode screen
This screen is displayed when the print mode is selected.
(The display varies with the mode. For the display in other modes, see their respective operation manuals.)
Message display
Job status screen (See next page.)
Print hold job list
If the job retention function (see page 2-9) is used,
the list of stored print jobs is displayed here (up to
100 jobs). The job retention function can be used
only if the printer is equipped with a hard disk drive
unit. If the main switch is turned off, stored print
data will be cleared.
Display scroll keys
Use these keys to view the job hold list when it is
contained on more than one screen.
[CONDITION SETTINGS] key
Use to switch the display to the printer configuration
menu (see page 3-2).
1-14
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Job status screen (common to print, copy, network scan, and fax modes)
This screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed.
A job list showing the current job at the top of the job queue or a list showing completed jobs can be displayed. The
contents of the jobs can be viewed, moved up to the highest priority in the job queue or deleted from the queue.
Job list
A job list which indicates the current job and reserved
jobs or a job list which indicates completed jobs is
displayed. The icons to the left of the jobs in queue
represent the job mode.
Print mode Copy mode
Network scan mode
Fax mode Fax mode
(transmission job) (reception job)
When a job list which indicates the current job and
reserved jobs is displayed, the displayed jobs
themselves are operation keys. To cancel printing or
to give a job the highest print priority, touch the
relevant job key to select the job and execute the
desired operation using the keys described in
,
, and .
*“PAPER EMPTY” in the job status display
When a job status display indicates “PAPER EMPTY”,
the specified size paper is not loaded in any tray to run
that job.
In this case, printing is suspended for that job until the
required paper is loaded.
Until the required paper is loaded another reserved job
data will be printed if possible.
(If paper runs out during printing, another job will not be
printed.) If you wish to change the paper size because
you do not have the specified size paper, you can
change the size by touching the current job key to
select it and touch the [DETAIL] key described in
.
Mode switching key
Use to switch the job list between “JOB QUEUE”
and “COMPLETE”.
“JOB QUEUE”: Displays the list of the current job
and the reserved jobs.
“COMPLETE”: Displays the list of completed jobs.
[PRINT JOB] key
Use to display the print job list for all modes (print,
copy, network scan, and fax).
[E-MAIL/FTP] key
Use to display the list of jobs that use the network
for sending e-mail by SNMP protocol or sending to
an ftp site or desktop by ftp protocol.
[FAX JOB] key
Use to display the fax communication status and
the reserved transmission job status.
Display switching keys
Use to switch the page of the displayed job list.
[STOP/DELETE] key
Use to cancel or delete the current job or delete the
selected reserved job. Received fax print jobs that
have been reserved, however, cannot be deleted.
[PRIORITY] key
If you select a job among the reserved jobs in the
“JOB QUEUE” job list to which you wish to give the
highest priority and touch this key, the job will move
to the highest priority reserved job.
[DETAIL] key
Use to display the detailed information of the selected
job. The paper size for printing can be changed from
the specified size.This function, however, cannot be
used when a fax reception print job is selected.
JOB QUEUE
COPY
SHARP001
054234
COPYING
PAPER EMPTY*
WAITING
STATUS
003 / 000
PRINT JOB E-MAIL/FTP FAX JOB
JOB QUEUE
COMPLETE
DETAIL
PRIORITY
STOP/DELETE
003 / 000
010 / 000
1/1
SETS / PROGRESS
1-15
1
Copier feature Facsimile feature
Dual page copy
Job build
Polling
Dual page scan
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Using the touch panel
■■
■■
■ How to use the touch panel
[Example 1]
JOB QUEUE
SETS / PRO
SHARP001
054234
COPY
003 / 00
010 / 00
003 / 00
Beep
tone
Items on the touch panel
are easily selectable by
touching the key associ-
ated with the item with a
finger. Selection of an
item will be accompanied
with a beep tone to
confirm the item was
selected. Also, the key
area for the item will be
highlighted for visual
confirmation.
[Example 2]
1/13
COMPLETE
Keys which are grayed
out on any screen are not
selectable. If a grayed out
key is touched, a double
beep will be sounded.
The confirmation beeps can be disabled by a key
operator program. (See page 9 of the Key Operator’s
Guide.)
■■
■■
■ Selection of function
[Example 1]
Items which are highlighted at the time a screen
appears are already selected and will be registered
to function if the [OK] key is touched.
[Example 2]
MULTI SHOT
DUAL PAGE
COPY
When the machine is
used in the copy or fax
modes, the functions
shown below can only be
set on the special feature
screen. They can be set
or cancelled by alternate
touches on the panel.
[Example 3]
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.
When the machine is
used in the copy or fax
modes and a special
feature is selected, a
corresponding icon
representing the feature
will appear on the touch
key and on the main
screen of the mode
selected. If this icon is
touched, the setting
screen of the function (or
a menu screen) will
appear, allowing the
settings to be checked or
adjusted and the function
to be canceled easily.
READY TO SEND.
SPECIAL MODES
RESOLUTION
ORIGINAL
AUTO
STANDARD
010 / 000
WAITING
PLAIN
TRANSPARENCY
PLAIN
PAPER SELECT
OK
2.
1.
3.
11
17
11
8
1
2
11
8
1
2
1-16
LOADING PAPER
The message “ADD PAPER” or “OPEN TRAY AND ADD PAPER” will appear when paper runs out during operation.
Follow the procedure below to load paper.
NOTES
●
Do not use curled or folded paper. Doing so may cause a misfeed.
●
For best results use paper supplied by SHARP. (See page 1-18.)
●
When you change the paper type and size in paper tray 1, set the paper type and size referring to “Setting the
paper size and type” (page 1-19).
●
Do not place heavy objects or press hard on any tray which is pulled out.
1
Pull out paper tray 1.
Gently pull the tray out
until it stops.
2
Load paper into the tray.
Do not load paper above
the maximum height line
(approximately 500
sheets of 20 lbs.
(80
g/m
2
)
paper).
3
Gently push tray 1 into the machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.
4
Set the paper type.
If you change the paper type, be sure to set the
paper type referring to “Setting the paper size and
type” (page 1-19).
5
Loading paper in paper tray 1 is now
complete.
Loading paper in paper tray 1
1
Pull out paper tray 1.
If paper remains in the tray, remove it.
2
Adjust the guide plates A and B in the tray
to the length and width of the paper.
The guide plates A and B
are slidable. Adjust them
to the paper size to be
loaded while squeezing
their lock levers.
3
Load paper into the tray.
4
Gently push tray 1 into the machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.
5
Set the paper size.
Be sure to set the paper size and paper type
referring to “Setting the paper size and type” (page
1-19).
If this is not done, paper misfeeds will occur.
6
Changing paper size in paper tray 1 is now
complete.
Changing the paper size in paper tray 1
For paper tray 1, 8-1/2" x 11", A4 or B5 size paper can be set. Use the following procedure to change the size as
needed.
1-17
1
LOADING PAPER
Specifications of paper trays
The specifications for types and sizes of paper for loading paper trays are shown below.
Tray
Tray No.
(tray name)
Applicable paper types Applicable paper sizes
Paper
weight
Paper tray 1
Multi purpose
drawer/bypass tray
Tray 1
Tray 2/bypass tray
Tray 2 Same as multi purpose drawer
Plain paper (Refer to the next
page for applicable plain papers.)
Plain paper (Refer to the next
page for applicable plain papers.)
Plain paper (Refer to the next
page for applicable plain papers.)
Plain paper (Refer to the next
page for applicable plain papers.)
8-1/2 x 11, A4, B5
●
If "AUTO-INCH" is selected in setting the
paper size and type (page 1-19), the
following paper sizes can be used with the
automatic detection function:
11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 11, 8-1/2 x 11R,
7-1/4 x 10-1/2R, 5-1/2 x 8-1/2R
If "AUTO-AB" is selected in setting the
paper size and type (page 1-19), the
following paper sizes can be used with the
automatic detection function:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2 x 13
Non-standard sizes
If "AUTO-INCH" is selected in setting the
paper size and type (page 1-19), the
following paper sizes can be used with the
automatic detection function:
11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 11, 8-1/2 x 11R,
7-1/4 x 10-1/2R, 5-1/2 x 8-1/2R
If "AUTO-AB" is selected in setting the
paper size and type (page 1-19), the
following paper sizes can be used with the
automatic detection function:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2 x 13
●
●
●
If "AUTO-INCH" is selected in setting the
paper size and type (page 1-19), the
following paper sizes can be used with the
automatic detection function:
8-1/2 x 11, 8-1/2 x 11R
If "AUTO-AB" is selected in setting the
paper size and type (page 1-19), the
following paper sizes can be used with the
automatic detection function:
A4, A4R, B5, B5R
Non-standard sizes smaller than 8-1/2 x 11
or A4
●
Japanese official postcard
●
●
Applicable standard size envelopes:
COM-10, Monarch, DL, C5, ISO B5
Non-standard size
●
●
●
●
8-1/2 x 11, A4
●
●
●
●
16 to 28 lbs.
or 60 to 105
g/m
2
16 to 28 lbs.
or 60 to 105
g/m
2
16 to 28 lbs.
or 60 to 105
g/m
2
16 to 34 lbs.
or 60 to 128
g/m
2
See the
remarks for
special paper
on the next
page.
Special paper
(Refer to the
next page for
applicable
special
papers.)
Thick paper
Labels,
transparency
film
Postcard
Envelopes can
only be fed from
the multi-purpose
drawer.
Applicable paper
stock weight for
envelopes is 20
to 23 lbs. or 75 to
90 g/m
2
.
Stand/3 x
500 sheet
paper
drawer
Stand/
MPD &
2000
sheet
paper
drawer
Upper
Tray 2 Same as multi purpose drawer
Upper
Tray 3
Tray 3
Middle
Tray 4
Lower
Lower
1-18
LOADING PAPER
■ Applicable plain paper
For satisfactory results, plain paper must conform to the following requirements.
Paper in AB system Paper in inch system
A5 to A3 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 to 11 x 17
Plain paper 16 to 28 lbs. or 60 to 105 g/m
2
Recycled, colored, pre-punched, pre-printed and letterhead papers must conform to the same conditions as above.
■ Applicable special paper
For satisfactory results, special paper must conform to the following requirements.
Type Remarks
Special paper Thick paper
●
For 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 to 8-1/2 x 11 or A5 to A4 sizes, thick
paper ranging from 16 to 34 lbs. or 60 to 128 g/m
2
can be
used.
●
For sizes larger than 8-1/2 x 11 or A4, thick paper ranging
from 16 to 28 lbs. or 60 to 105 g/m
2
can be used.
●
Other thick papers
Index stock (65 lbs. or 176 g/m
2
) can be used.
Cover stock (110 lbs. or 200 to 205 g/m
2
) can be used but
only for 8-1/2 x 11, A4 paper in the portrait orientation.
●
For 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 or A5 paper, the orientation must be
landscape.
Transparency film, labels,
●
Use SHARP recommended paper. Do not use labels other
and tracing paper than SHARP recommended labels. Doing so may leave
adhesive residue in the printer, causing paper misfeeds,
smudges on prints or other machine trouble.
Postcards
●
Japanese official postcards can be used.
Envelopes
●
Applicable standard envelopes: COM-10, Monarch, DL, C5,
ISO B5
●
Envelopes can only be fed from the multi-purpose drawer.
Applicable paper stock weight for envelopes is 20 to 23
lbs. or 75 to 90 g/m
2
.
1-19
1
Setting the paper size and type
For the specifications for types and sizes of paper for loading paper trays, see page 1-17.
Setting the paper size and type from the operation panel on the main printer
When the paper size or type is changed in a paper tray, set them referring to the following procedure.
1
Press the [MENU] key repeatedly until
“CUSTOM SETTINGS” appears in the
message display.
2
Press the [OK] key.
When the [OK] key is
pressed,“TRAY SETTING”
will appear in the message
display.
3
Press the [OK] key.
When the [OK] key is
pressed,the message
shown to the left will
appear in the message
display.
4
Select the desired paper tray.
Press the or key
repeatedly until the
desired paper tray is
indicated in the display.
5
Press the [OK] key.
The paper size and paper type of the tray selected
in step 4 will appear.
If TRAY 1 is selected in
step 4, the message
shown to the left will
appear in the display.
6
Press the key.
If TRAY 1 is selected in
step 4, the message
shown to the left will
appear in the display.
7
Press the [OK] key.
To cancel the setting change, press the [BACK/C]
key to return to step 4.
8
Select the paper type that has been set in
the tray.
Press the or key
repeatedly until the paper
type that has been set
appears.
NOTE
Special paper such as thick paper, transparency film,
labels, and postcards can be set for tray 2 and the
bypass tray.
Envelopes can be set only for tray 2.
9
Press the [OK] key.
10
Ensure that the desired paper size is
selected.
Press the key or key
repeatedly until the
desired paper size
appears.
●
Depending on the selected tray, a selection for
“AUTO-AB” and “AUTO-INCH” may appear.
“AUTO-AB”: Select when you have set AB system
paper.
“AUTO-INCH”: Select when you have set inch
system paper.
When the paper system is changed from the inch
system to the AB system or vise versa, the paper
type must be designated. Select the paper type.
●
If you have set paper of non-standard size, select
“NON STANDARD”. This size can be selected
when tray 2 or the bypass tray has been selected
in step 4.
11
Press the [OK] key to complete the setting.
TRAY SETTING
TRAY1
LETTER
OK?
LETTER
PLAIN
LOADING PAPER
CHANGE TRAY1
SETTING OK?
PLAIN
OK?
1-20
LOADING PAPER
Setting the paper type and size from the touch panel
1
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
The custom setting menu
screen will appear.
2
Press the [TRAY SETTINGS] key.
TOTAL COUNT
TRAY SETTINGS
The paper tray selection
screen will appear.
3
Select the paper tray for which the setting
is to be made.
TRAY 1
TRAY 2
TRAY 3
PLAIN / AUTO-INCH
RECYCLED / AUTO-INCH
TYPE / SIZE
PLAIN / 8 X11
1
/
2
If the desired tray is not
on the display, use [ ]
or [ ] key to scroll the
display until it appears.
4
Select the paper type and the paper size.
●
If TRAY 1 has been selected in step 3:
CUSTOM SETTINGS
TRAY 1 TYPE/SIZE SETTING
TYPE SIZE
LETTER HEAD
B5
PRE-PRINTED
RECYCLED COLOR
PRE-PUNCHED
OK
PLAIN
A4
11
8
1
2
The highlighted keys indicate the current selections.
To change either type or size or both, touch the
desired keys to highlight the selections.
Paper types
Special papers such as transparency film and
labels can be set for tray 2 and the bypass tray.
Envelopes can be set only for tray 2.
Paper sizes
●
Depending on the selected tray, a selection for
“AUTO-AB” and “AUTO-INCH” may appear.
“AUTO-AB”: Select when you have set AB system
paper.
“AUTO-INCH”: Select when you have set inch
system paper.
When the paper system is changed from the inch
system to the AB system or vise versa, the paper
type must be designated. Select the paper type.
●
If you have set paper of non-standard size, select
“NON STANDARD SIZE”. This size key appears
when tray 2 or the bypass tray has been selected
in step 3.
5
Touch the [OK] key to complete the setting.
SIZE
A4
OK
1-21
1
Loading paper in the multi purpose drawer
The method of loading paper into the multipurpose drawer is the same as for paper tray 1 described on page 1-16.
For specifications of paper, see page 1-17. When loading envelopes, postcards or transparency film, follow the
descriptions below.
●
Two maximum height lines are indicated: one for plain paper and one for special paper.
Maximum height line for plain paper
Do not exceed this line when loading plain paper.
Maximum height line for special paper (red line)
Do not exceed this line when loading special paper.
■ How to change the paper size
To change the paper size or paper type when paper is loaded into a tray, refer to page 1-19 for details.
■ Setting envelopes or postcards
When setting envelopes or postcards in the multi purpose drawer, set them in the orientation shown below.
LOADING PAPER
Loading postcards
Load postcards print side up to the rear left of the tray
as shown.
Loading envelopes
Envelopes can only be printed on the address side. Be
sure to place envelopes with the address side up and
the top of the envelope to the rear.
Printing onto envelopes or postcards
●
Attempting to print onto both sides of envelopes or postcards may result in misfeeds or poor prints.
●
Do not use pre-printed envelopes.
●
To avoid wrinkling, misfeeds or poor printing, make sure the postcard stock is not curled.
1-22
Printing onto envelopes
●
Do not use envelopes that have metal clasps, plastic snaps, string closures, windows, linings, self-adhesive patches
or synthetic materials. Attempting to print on these may cause misfeeds, inadequate toner adherence or other
trouble.
●
Envelopes of which the surface is not flat because of embossing may cause the prints to become smudged.
●
Under high humidity and temperature conditions the glue flaps on some envelopes may become sticky and be sealed
closed when printed.
●
Use only envelopes which are flat and crisply folded. Curled or poorly formed envelopes may be poorly printed or may
cause misfeeds.
1
Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to
the left.
Unlatch the module and
gently move the module
away from the machine.
If the machine is not
equipped with a duplex
module, open the side
cover similarly.
2
Lower the two fusing unit pressure
adjusting levers marked A and B in the
illustration.
A
B
Normal position
Lower pressure position
A:
Rear side of
fusing unit
B:
Front side of
fusing unit
3
Gently close the duplex module.
If the machine is not
equipped with a duplex
module, close the side
cover.
LOADING PAPER
Fusing unit pressure adjusting levers
When feeding envelopes from the multi purpose drawer, damage to the envelopes or smudges on prints may occur
even if envelopes within specification are used. In this case, the problem may be reduced by shifting the fusing unit
pressure adjusting levers from the normal position to the lower pressure position. Follow the procedure below.
NOTE
Be sure to return the lever to the normal position when finished feeding envelopes. If not, inadequate toner adherence,
paper misfeeds or other trouble may occur.
1-23
1
LOADING PAPER
Loading paper in the stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer
Upper paper tray:
The upper tray is the same as the multi-purpose drawer. Use the upper tray according to the instructions for the multi-
purpose drawer on page 1-21.
Middle and lower paper trays:
Up to 500 sheets of SHARP recommended plain paper can be loaded in these trays. The method of loading paper is the
same as for paper tray 1 in the main unit. See the description (page 1-16).
NOTE
If the paper size or paper type is changed in either paper tray, the tray settings must be changed in custom settings. Refer
to
“Setting the paper size and type” on page 1-19.
■■
■■
■ Loading transparency film
Be sure to load the transparency film with the white label side up. Make sure no image will be printed on the label.
Printing on the label may cause smudges on prints. Transparency film must be set in the portrait orientation.
Specifications (multi purpose drawer)
Name Multi purpose drawer
Paper size/weight See specifications of paper trays on page 1-17.
Paper capacity 500 sheets (20 lbs. (80 g/m
2
)) of paper, 40 envelopes, 20 postcards
Dimensions 25-3/4" (W) x 22-21/64" (D) x 5-43/64" (H)
(654 mm (W) x 567 mm (D) x 144 mm (H))
Weight Approximately 24.3 lbs. or 11 kg
Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.
Specifications (stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer)
Name Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer
Paper size/weight See specifications of paper trays on page 1-17.
Paper capacity 500 sheets (20 lbs. (80 g/m
2
)) each
(ordinary paper)
Dimensions 24-3/8" (W) x 26-5/32" (D) x 15-29/32" (H)
(619 mm (W) x 664 mm (D) x 404 mm (H))
Weight Approximately 70.6 lbs. or 32 kg
1-24
Loading paper in the stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer
Upper paper tray:
The upper paper tray is equivalent to the multi purpose drawer. The method of loading paper and the paper that can be
used are the same as for the multi purpose drawer. Refer to the description of the multi purpose drawer (see page 1-21).
Lower paper tray:
The lower paper tray is a large capacity tray that holds 2,000 sheets of 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 paper (20 lbs. (80 g/m
2
)). Use
the following procedure to load paper in the large capacity tray.
NOTE
If the paper size or paper type is changed in either paper tray, the tray settings must be changed in custom settings. Refer
to
“Setting the paper size and type” on page 1-19.
LOADING PAPER
1
Pull out the large capacity tray.
Gently pull the tray out
until it stops.
2
Load paper onto the right and left paper
feed tables.
●
Load paper onto the
right paper feed table.
The right table holds
approximately 1,200
sheets.
●
Raise the paper guide
and load paper onto the
left paper feed table.
The left table holds ap-
proximately 800 sheets.
After loading paper, be
sure to return the paper
guide.
3
Gently push the large capacity paper tray
into the printer.
Push the tray firmly all the
way into the printer.
4
Set the paper type.
If you have changed the paper size from the AB
system to the inch system or vice versa, select
the relevant type referring to “Setting the paper
size and type” on page 1-19.
5
Loading paper in the stand/MPD & 2000
sheet paper drawer is now complete.
Specifications (stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer)
Name Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer
Paper sizes/weight See specifications of paper trays on page 1-17.
Paper capacity Upper tray: 500 sheets (20 lbs. (80 g/m
2
)), Lower tray: 2,000 sheets (20 lbs. (80 g/m
2
))
(ordinary paper)
Dimensions 24-3/8" (W) x 26-5/32" (D) x 15-29/32" (H)
(619 mm (W) x 664 mm (D) x 404 mm (H))
Weight Approximately 75 lbs. or 34 kg
1-25
1
ADDING TONER
When toner runs out, the message “CHANGE THE TONER CARTRIDGE” will appear on the display indicating that the
toner cartridge must be replaced. For some models, a message to replace the developer cartridge may appear.
For the procedure for replacement of these cartridges, see the separate “Operation manual (Read this document before
installing the product.).”
GENUINE SUPPLIES
1 Store the supplies in a location that is:
●
clean and dry,
●
at a stable temperature,
●
not exposed to direct sunlight.
2 Store paper in the wrapper and lying flat.
●
Paper stored in packages standing up or out of
the wrapper may curl or become damp, resulting
in paper misfeeds.
NOTE
If you press and hold down the [INFORMATION] key or the [COPY] key while printing is being performed or in standby,
the quantity of toner remaining (as a percentage) will be displayed. When the percentage becomes 25 - 0 %, prepare
a new toner cartridge.
STORAGE OF SUPPLIES
Standard supplies for this product that are to be replaced by the user include paper, toner cartridge (drum/toner
cartridge), developer cartridge*, and staple cartridge for the finisher.
*For some models, developer cartridges are not replaced by users.
For best copying results, be sure to use only Sharp Genuine Supplies which are designed,
engineered, and tested to maximize the life and performance of Sharp products. Look for the
Genuine Supplies label on the toner package.
■■
■■
■ Proper storage
1-26
2-1
CHAPTER 2
PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER
This chapter describes how to install and how to use the printer drivers
and printer utilities on a computer. This chapter also describes the job
retention function that allows a print start operation from the operation
panel of the printer.
Page
CONNECTING TO A COMPUTER ........................................................ 2-2
SOFTWARE FOR WINDOWS................................................................ 2-2
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS AND PRINTER UTILITIES ............. 2-3
UNINSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS AND PRINTER UTILITIES ........ 2-3
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS USING PLUG &
PLAY OR THE “ADD PRINTER WIZARD” ............................................ 2-4
● Before installation ........................................................................... 2-4
SETTING THE PRINTER DRIVER ........................................................ 2-5
● Printer driver settings under Windows
(selecting and setting print conditions) ........................................... 2-5
PRINTER CONFIGURATION THROUGH THE NETWORK.................. 2-6
● Environment required for accessing Web pages ........................... 2-6
● Accessing Web pages and displaying help.................................... 2-6
● Items and outline of menu frame of Web pages ............................. 2-7
JOB CONTROL ...................................................................................... 2-9
● “JOB CONTROL” operation............................................................. 2-9
● Hold job list...................................................................................... 2-10
● Printer account control .................................................................... 2-12
USING THE MACHINE AS A POSTSCRIPT PRINTER .......................... 2-13
● Using the printer in the Windows environment............................... 2-13
● Using the printer in the Macintosh environment ............................. 2-15
2-2
SOFTWARE FOR WINDOWS
When using this product in a Windows environment, you must install a printer driver in your computer system. Use the
CD-ROM supplied with this unit for the installation. This product can be connected through a parallel interface connector
as described above, or connected as a network printer through a print server card (network interface card).
The print server card may be installed as a standard component or an optional component depending upon the specific
printer model.
The following software for Windows is contained in the CD-ROM.
●
Printer drivers
●
Printer utilities
●
Installer
This is software for installing the printer drivers and printer utilities. If you use Plug and Play or the “Add Printer
Wizard” to install the driver without using the installer, see instructions on page 2-4.
■■
■■
■ Printer drivers
1
18
36 19
Parallel interface connector
●
PCL printer drivers (PCL5e and PCL6)
●
Optional PostScript printer driver (compatible to
PostScript 3) and PPD files (PostScript Printer
Description files)
■■
■■
■ Printer utilities
●
Printer Administration Utility
●
Printer Status Monitor
●
PCL Display Font
1. Printer drivers
Printer driver software converts print data from any application into data understood by the printer.
2. Printer utilities
Printer Administration Utility* provides setting and monitoring of printers on a computer. The Printer Status Monitor
provides monitoring of printer status, display and notification on a computer for network environment. (only in the
Windows environment)
For use of Printer Administration Utility and Printer Status Monitor, see the help file.
* Printer Administration Utility is software for system administrators.
CONNECTING TO A COMPUTER
1. Using this machine as a local printer
When using this machine as a local printer, connect your computer to the parallel interface connector as shown in
the illustration.
The cable is not supplied with the printer. A shielded cable which conforms to both the printer specifications and
your computer specifications must be obtained. Consult your computer manual for the computer connection
requirements.
The parallel interface of the printer conforms to IEEE-STD-1284-1993.
The connector type on the printer is a 36-pin DDK 57LE-40360-730B (D29)
female connector or equivalent.
For the specifications of the parallel interface
connector on the computer, see the computer
manual.
2. Using this machine as a network printer
For using this machine as a network printer, a print server card is needed.
See the operation manual supplied with the print server card.
For a network cable, use a shielded cable.
2-3
2
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS AND PRINTER UTILITIES
The following software can be installed from the installer
supplied in the CD-ROM :
●
PCL printer drivers (PCL5e and PCL6)
●
PCL display font
●
Printer Administration Utility
●
Printer Status Monitor
UNINSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS
AND PRINTER UTILITIES
When uninstalling a printer driver that has been installed from the Add Printer wizard, right-click the printer to be deleted
from “Printers” of “Control Panel” and select [Delete]. When uninstalling a printer driver that has been installed using the
installer, the Printer Administration Utility or the Printer Status Monitor, use “Add/Remove Programs” of “Control Panel”.
Use the Windows standard operation for each case.
1
Start Windows.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into a CD-
ROM drive of your computer.
If your computer is configured for auto start on the
CD-ROM, the language select or user select screen
described in step 5 will appear. (Steps 3 and 4 are
not needed.)
3
On the [Start] menu, click “Run.”
4
Enter the CD-ROM drive and setup
command. Then click the [OK] button.
Example:If the CD-ROM drive is designated as drive
R, enter “R:\SETUP.EXE”.
5
Read the text of Readme First and then click
the [Next] button.
6
Select the tools to be installed and click the
[Next] button.
●
If you select general user tools, you can install
the following software.
PCL5e printer driver, PCL6 printer driver, PCL
display font, Printer Status Monitor
●
If you select administrator tools, you can install
the following software.
Printer Administrator Utility
7
The printer drivers and printer utilities that
can be installed from the CD-ROM will be
listed. Select the check boxes of the desired
drivers and utilities and click the [Next]
button.
If you click the icon next to a check box and click
the [display README] button, the information of
the specified software will be displayed. When
installing the Printer Administration Utility and the
Printer Status Monitor, read the README text and
check to see if the computer system requirements
are satisfied.
NOTE
The Printer Administration Utility and the Printer
Status Monitor can be used only if this product is
used as a network printer.
8
Click the [Start] button.
The installation screen of the file selected with a
check box will appear. Follow the instructions on
your screen to install the selected printer drivers
and utilities.
9
When installation is complete, the message
“Setup has finished installing your selected
package(s).” will appear. Click the [Close]
button.
NOTE
Restart of your computer may be needed
depending on the system. Click [Yes] to restart
the computer.
Windows software
PCL printer drivers
PCL display font
Network administrator
Network Administration Utility
Windows client
Printer Status
Monitor
Execute installation from the CD-ROM using the following procedure.
2-4
INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS USING PLUG &
PLAY OR THE “ADD PRINTER WIZARD”
Before installation
Before installing the printer drivers, check the following items.
●
Ensure that your computer system meets the following requirements.
Computer type:
IBM PC/AT or compatible computer
Hardware requirements of the operating system must
be satisfied.
When using Plug and Play or using the “Add Printer Wizard” to install printer drivers, enter the directory name
indicated below as a source directory.
Path for using PCL5e driver under Windows 2000
R:\Option\English\2k_pcl5e
Path for using PCL6 driver under Windows 2000
R:\Option\English\2k_pcl6
Path for using PCL5e driver under Windows 95/98/Me
R:\Option\English\9x_pcl5e
Path for using PCL6 driver under Windows 95/98/Me
R:\Option\English\9x_pcl6
Path for using PCL5e driver under Windows NT
R:\Option\English\Nt_pcl5e
Path for using PCL6 driver under Windows NT
R:\Option\English\Nt_pcl6
■ Example of installation of a printer driver using the “Add Printer Wizard” under Windows 98
The installation method of a printer driver under Windows 98 is shown below.
The installation example is described assuming that the printer is connected as a local printer (see “Using this
machine as a local printer” on page 2-2) and that the CD-ROM drive is designated as drive R. The procedure may
differ depending on the system environment.
1
Start Windows 98.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive.
If your computer is configured for auto start on the
CD-ROM, the Readme First screen will appear. Click
[Cancel] to close the screen.
3
On the [Start] menu, select [Settings] and
then [Printers].
The Printer window will appear.
4
Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
5
Click the [Next] button.
6
Check the [Local Printer] radio button and
then click the [Next] button.
7
Click the [Have Disk] button.
The “Install From Disk” dialog box will appear.
Enter the file path as follows:
R:\Option\English\9x_pcl5e or
R:\Option\English\9x_pcl6
8
Click the [OK] button.
9
Select the printer model to be used and
click the [Next] button.
Follow the instructions displayed by the “Add Printer
Wizard.”
■ Installing PCL display fonts
The PCL display fonts are the fonts displayed on your computer screen. The CD-ROM supplied with this product
contains the PCL display fonts that correspond to the resident fonts of this product. These display fonts can be
installed to your computer (Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000) from the installer. Installation of the PCL display fonts can
be specified in step 6 of “INSTALLING PRINTER DRIVERS AND PRINTER UTILITIES” on page 2-3.
To install the PCL display fonts by Windows basic operation without using the installer(Start Settings Control
Panel Fonts Install New Font), specify the following path.
R:\Option\PCLFont
The CD-ROM drive is designated as drive R as an example.
Operating system:
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows 2000
Windows NT 4.0
Windows Me
2-5
2
SETTING THE PRINTER DRIVER
This section describes the method of changing the printer driver settings from your computer.
If no printer driver has been installed, use the supplied CD-ROM to install it referring to “INSTALLING PRINTER
DRIVERS AND PRINTER UTILITIES” on page 2-3.
Printer driver settings under Windows (selecting and setting print conditions)
Change the settings using the printer properties.
■ Windows 95 / 98 / Me
Screens for Windows 98 are used in the description
below.
1
On the [Start] menu, select [Settings] and
then [Printers].
The Printer window will appear.
2
Right-click the installed printer driver and
select [Properties].
This example is the screen displayed by selecting
AR-P350PCL5e.
3
Set each item.
For setting items, see
the printer driver help.
4
Click the [OK] button.
■ Windows NT 4.0 / 2000
Screens for Windows NT 4.0 are used in the
description below.
1
On the [Start] menu, select [Settings] and
then [Printers].
The Printer window will appear.
2
Right-click the installed printer driver and
select [Document Defaults].
This example is the screen displayed by selecting
AR-P350PCL5e.
3
Set each item.
For setting items, see
the printer driver help.
4
Click the [OK] button.
NOTE
For the setting concerning optional peripheral devices such as the duplex module, finisher, and stand/3 x 500 sheet
paper drawer, right-click the installed printer, select [Properties], and then open the [Configuration] tab. If you use
this product as a network printer and you have installed the Printer Status Monitor, the configuration of peripheral
devices will be automatically set by clicking “Auto Configuration”. If you click the [Update Tray Status] button in the
[Tray Status] dialog box of the [Paper] tab, the current tray information (paper size, paper type, and quantity of
paper remaining) will be displayed.
2-6
PRINTER CONFIGURATION
THROUGH THE NETWORK
If you access the Web pages of this product from your computer using a Web browser such as Netscape Navigator and
Internet Explorer, various settings can be adjusted through the network.
Environment required for accessing Web pages
The following products and computer system requirements are needed for accessing the Web pages of this product.
●
Optional print server card (network interface card)
●
Recommended Web browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or later or equivalent
Netscape Navigator 4.0 or later or equivalent
NOTE
The following characters cannot be input in the Web pages when setting the Web pages in the Web server
located in this product. Input characters are case-sensitive.
●
Characters that cannot be input: < > ”
●
Examples of improper input: <abc> <abc “abc” “abc abc”
Accessing Web pages and displaying help
Use the following procedure to access the Web pages. If the help button under the menu frame is clicked, the help
screen for description of various function settings that can be operated remotely from the Web pages for this product
through the network will appear. For the setting of each function, see the detailed description.
1
Open the Web browser on your computer.
2
Input the IP Address previously specified
for this product to the ADDRESS field of
the browser.
Input the IP address
previously specified in
this product. (See page 13
of the Key Operator’s
Guide
.)
When the connection is
completed, the Web page
information of this product
will be displayed.
3
Click the [Help] button under the menu
frame.
For details of each
function setting, see the
help under the menu
frame. The configuration
settings are described in
detail.
4
Close the help.
Click the button. The
display will return to the
Web page information of
this product.
2-7
2
Items and outline of menu frame of Web pages
Destination Management
The basic screen on which you can add, modify, or delete the destinations for image data scanned by the network
scanner. The recipient information for facsimile and Internet facsimile features (destination address, facsimile number,
etc.) is described below.
●
Up to 500 destinations in total can be registered. In addition, up to 100 destinations can be registered in the file
server and desktop in total.
■■
■■
■ Setting E-mail Destinations
Sets the destination information for E-mail delivery from the network scanner.
Destination E-mail addresses and file types as well as information for destination control (destination name, index,
name for front panel display, etc.) are configured by this control.
■■
■■
■ Setting FTP Destinations
Sets the storage location information for file server storage scan of network scan data. File server information (such
as host name) and file types as well as information for destination control (destination name, user index, name for
front panel display, etc.) are configured by this control.
■■
■■
■ Setting Desktop Destinations
Sets the destination information for desktop delivery of network scan data. Destination computer information (such
as host name) in which the network scanner tool/Sharpdesk has been installed and file types as well as the information
for destination control (destination name, user index, name for front panel display, etc.).
■■
■■
■ Setting Fax Destinations
Sets the fax destination. Fax numbers of recipients and communication mode as well as information for destination
control (destination name, index, name for front panel display, etc.).
■■
■■
■ Setting i-Fax Destinations
Sets the Internet fax destination information. E-mail addresses of destination and file types as well as information
for destination control (destination name, index, name for front panel display, etc.).
■■
■■
■ Setting Group Destinations
Sets destination groups for transmitting data at a time by collecting destinations that have been set as E-mail
destination, fax destination and i-fax destination.
■■
■■
■ Delete Destination
Screen for checking to see if deletion may be executed after selecting a destination to be deleted from the destination
list on the destination management screen and clicking the Delete button. The destination data will be deleted when
the Yes button is clicked.
Fax Memory Box Management
Basic screen for setting the memory area (memory box) for fax images. The memory box has the following three
functions. Up to 100 items in total can be registered for these functions.
●
Polled memory box control
●
Relay broadcasting
●
Confidential reception
■■
■■
■ Polled Memory Box Control
Original data that has been stored in this machine can be transmitted to another facsimile machine when the remote
facsimile machine requests transmission.
■■
■■
■ Confidential reception
Data to be printed is sent to this machine and held until released for printing from the operation panel of this
machine.
■■
■■
■ Relay broadcasting
Memory box information for transmitting received data can be configured by this control.
PRINTER CONFIGURATION THROUGH THE NETWORK
2-8
PRINTER CONFIGURATION THROUGH THE NETWORK
Access setup
The restriction on access to the Web pages and basic settings for using the network scanner and the status/alert E-
mail function are described below.
■■
■■
■ Network Card Setup
A link to the network card Web page for configuring the print server card (network interface card) is provided.
The Admin password is the same as the Web Page password of the network card.
■■
■■
■ Password Setup
Password access to the Web pages can be set. Two types of passwords (user and administrator) are configurable.
The Admin password is the same as the Web Page password of the network card.
■■
■■
■ Network Scanning Setup
Basic setting screen for the network scanner. E-mail subject for scanner delivery, file name, etc. are set. To use the
network scanner, you must set up E-mail & DNS Setup. This screen displays the E-mail & DNS Settings and
provides a link to E-mail & DNS Setup.
■■
■■
■ Status & Alert E-mail Setup
Basic setting screen for the status & alert E-mail system. Machine name, machine code, and machine installation
location are set. To use the status & alert E-mail function, you must set up E-mail & DNS Setup. This screen
displays the settings of E-mail & DNS Settings and provides a link to E-mail & DNS Setup.
■■
■■
■ E-mail & DNS Setup
Basic setting screen for transmitting E-mail. E-mail server, system administrator address, DNS server, etc. are set.
■■
■■
■ Sender E-mail Setup
The sender of E-mail transmissions from the network scanner is configured. The sender will be set as the “From”
item of the E-mail header. Up to 20 senders can be registered and a sender can be selected among them from the
operation panel.
■■
■■
■ Custom Directory Setup
User index names in the display list on the operation panel are set.
■■
■■
■ Status Message Parameters Setup
The parameters used when the current counter information of this machine such as print count, copy count, and
total output is delivered in accordance with the specified schedule by an E-mail status message.
■■
■■
■ Alerts Message Parameters Setup
The parameters for the alert message address information are registered by alert message setup. The alert message
is transmitted when a problem such as a supplies requirement (toner or paper) or errors(device failure or paper
misfeed) occur.
■■
■■
■ SNMP Trap Setup
IP addresses, trap community, and authentic community are set.
2-9
2
JOB CONTROL
This section describes the operation procedure required for “JOB CONTROL”. To use job control in your print job, select
“Properties” on the printer driver screen, open the “Main” tab, and click “Job control.” The job hold function can be used
only if your printer is equipped with the hard disk drive option.
“JOB CONTROL” operation
1
Normal print
(For “Normal print”, no input from the operation panel
of the printer is needed.)
The print setting in this mode is the basic print
operation. If no problem such as a paper misfeed
and empty toner occurs in the printer, the print start
operation is completed on the computer and printing
will be executed on the printer.
2
Hold after print
In this mode, print data will be held in the hold job
list even after printing is complete. Printing can be
executed again from the operation panel of the
printer if needed. Also the data can be deleted from
the operation panel if it is not necessary.
3
Hold before print
This print mode can reduce the possibility of
missing printout. If printing is made in this mode
from the computer, print data will not be output
immediately and will be stored in the printer as a
hold job until released from the operation panel.
Print start operation can be made on the operation
panel of the printer as needed. Also you can delete
the data without executing printing. (See step 7 on
page 2-10 or step 5 on page 2-11.)
4
Proof print
This mode can prevent a high-volume misprint when
a lot of sets must be printed. If printing is executed
in this mode, only one set will be printed and the
remaining sets will be held as a hold job.
After checking the finished printout including print
position on paper and stapling position, you can
start printing of the remaining sets from the
operation panel of the printer. Also you can delete
the data without executing printing. (See step 7 on
page 2-10 and step 5 on page 2-11.)
5
Password (5 digits)
Password
Password
If a password is set in the printer driver setting, a
password entry is needed to start printing of a
password protect job. This mode can increase the
security of hold jobs.
●
Hold After Print mode with password:
Password entry on the operation panel of the
printer is needed for additional printing the hold
job.
●
Hold Before Print mode with password:
Password entry on the operation panel of the
printer is needed to start printing.
●
Proof Print mode with password:
Password entry on the operation panel of the
printer is needed for printing remaining sets after
printing one set. The first set is printed without
password entry.
2-10
Hold job list
If “Print after hold”, “Print before hold” or “Proof print” operation is performed on the computer, print data will be held as
a hold job. (Up to 100 jobs can be held.
If the main switch is turned off, the stored data of all jobs in hold will be
cleared.
)
If the number of jobs exceeds 100, the job is processed as follows.
●
If Hold After Print is executed:
Printing will be executed but the job will not be held. (A notice page will be printed. See page 6-5.)
●
If Hold Before Print is executed:
Printing will not be executed and the job will not be held. (A notice page will be printed. See page 6-5.)
●
If Proof Print is executed:
Printing of one set will be executed but the job will not be held. (A notice page will be printed. See page 6-5.)
When the machine is being operated from the operation panel on the main unit:
●
For operation from the operation panel with touch panel, see the next page.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
“PRINTJOBS ON HOLD”
will appear in the mes-
sage display.
2
Press the [OK] key.
When the [OK] key is
pressed, a user name and
a file name o
f the print
data stored as a hold
job will appear.
3
Select the desired data.
Press the or key on
the operation panel
repeatedly until the
desired print job is
displayed.
4
Press the [OK] key.
5
Enter the first digit of the password and
press the [OK] key.
(needed only if a password has been set)
Be sure to enter the same number that has been
entered on the computer. If no password has been
set, operation of steps 5 and 6 is not needed.
(Proceed to step 7.)
When you press the [OK]
key to register the first
digit after entering it using
the
or key on the
operation panel, “ ” will
appear and “-” at the
second digit will blink
. If
you press the [BACK/C]
key, you can correct the
entered number.
6
Use the same procedure as step 5 to enter
the password from the second digit to the
fifth digit and then press the [OK] key.
7
Select execution of printing, cancellation
of printing or data retention after printing,
and then press the [OK] key.
Deletion or retention of data after printing can be
selected. Alternatively deletion of data without
printing can be selected. Press the or key until
the desired choice appears
●
Data will be deleted
after printing.
●
Data will be held after
printing.
●
Data will be deleted
without printing.
If this item is selected,
the operation will be
complete. Steps 8 and
9 are not needed.
JOB CONTROL
ARAI
WORD-1
PIN
-----
PIN
----
PRINT AND DELETE THE
DATA-OK?
PRINT AND SAVE THE
DATA-OK?
DELETE THE DATA-OK?
NOTE:
The password is entered
one digit at a time starting
with the first digit. The
inactive digits are shown as
“-”.
2-11
2
8
Verify that the desired number of copies is
set.
The number of copies can
be changed by using the
or key on the
operation panel.
9
Press the [OK] key.
●
Printing will start. If printing of another job is being
executed, however, your job will be registered as
a print job. Printing of the job will start after
preceding jobs are completed.
10
Operation is now complete.
To continue operation, repeat steps 1 to 9.
When the machine is being operated from the touch panel on a scanner module:
1
Press the [PRINT] key to display the printer
basic screen.
2
Select the desired data.
PRINT HOLD JOB LIST
SHARP001
SHARP002
SHARP003
SHARP004
To switch the screen,
touch the or key.
3
Use the [Numeric] keys to enter the 5-digit
password.
(needed only if a password has been set)
ENTER PIN VIA THE 10-KEY.
CANCEL
Be sure to enter the
password that has been
entered on the computer.
If no password has been
set, operation of this step
is not needed.
NOTE:
Each time a number is entered, “–” will change to “
”.
4
Ensure that the desired number of prints
is set.
PRIN
NUMBER OF PRINTS
(1 999)
PR
1
The number of prints can
be changed by using the
or key.
5
Execute printing.
To delete the print data
after completing the print
job, touch the [PRINT
AND DELETE THE DATA]
key. To keep the print
data after printing, touch
the [PRINT AND SAVE
THE DATA] key. To cancel
printing and clear the print
data, touch the [DELETE]
key.
●
If you select execution
of the print job, printing
will start. If printing of
another job is being
executed, your job will
be registered as a print
job. Printing of the job
will start after preceding
jobs are completed.
6
Operation is now complete.
JOB CONTROL
COPIES
10SET
PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA
DELETE
CANCEL
PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA
2-12
Printer account control
If the key operator program “Auditing mode” is set, the number of printed pages can be accumulated for each account.
The accounts for auditing are the accounts that have been set for counting the number of pages for the printer with a
key operator program. For registration of account numbers, see the Key Operator’s Guide (page 7).
When executing print operation from the computer, you must enter an account number on the setting screen of the
printer driver. The account number entry screen will be displayed by clicking “Job control” in the “Main” tab of the printer
driver.
When an invalid account number is entered or no account number is entered, if key operator program “Cancel jobs of
invalid accounts” has been set, printing will not be performed. To perform printing in any case, disable program “Cancel
jobs of invalid accounts”. In this case, the number of printed pages will be accumulated to “OTHERS”.
The job control screen will always appear when print operation is executed from the printer driver if the “Auto Job
Control review” check box in the “Main” tab of the printer driver is set.
JOB CONTROL
2-13
2
USING THE MACHINE AS A POST-
SCRIPT PRINTER
If an optional PS3 expansion kit (AR-PK1) is installed, this machine can be used as a PostScript compatible printer.
The machine can be used in the Macintosh environment as well as in the Windows environment when used as a
PostScript printer. In the Macintosh environment, however, the printer can be connected only through a network.
Using the printer in the Windows environment
To use this machine as a PostScript printer, the PostScript printer driver or the PPD files (PostScript Printer Description
files) must be installed to your computer. For installation of the printer driver, use the PRINTER UTILITIES CD-ROM
supplied with an optional PS3 expansion kit AR-PK1).
■Installing the PostScript printer driver
1
Insert the PRINTER UTILITIES CD-ROM of
the PS3 expansion kit to a CD-ROM drive
of your computer.
2
On the [Start] menu, click “RUN”.
To install the PostScript printer driver using the “Add Printer” wizard in place of using the installer, enter the directory
name of the file as follows. The directory names for PPD files are also shown in the illustration.
Directory information of the PS3 expansion kit PRINTER UTILITIES CD-ROM
(The CD-ROM drive is assumed to be drive R.)
<Windows 2000>
<Windows 95/98/Me>
<Windows NT>
Path for using PostScript driver
R:\Option\English\2k_PS
Path for using PostScript driver
R:\Option\English\9x_PS
Path for using PostScript driver
R:\Option\English\NT_PS
Path for using PPD files
R:\Option\English\NT_PSPPD
Path for using PPD files
R:\Option\English\2k_PSPPD
Path for using PPD files
R:\Option\English\9x_PSPPD
■ Installing the PPD files (PostScript printer description files)
Insert the PRINTER UTILITIES CD-ROM of the PS3 expansion kit to a CD-ROM drive of your computer. The installation
procedure is basically the same as the procedure described on page 2-4 that is performed by using the “Add Printer”
wizard for installing a printer driver. The following items, however, are different.
●
The PRINTER UTILITIES CD-ROM of a PS3 expansion kit is used.
●
The path of the PPD files must be entered in step 7 on page 2-4. The path for each Windows version is shown below.
(The CD-ROM drive is assumed to be drive R.)
●
Windows 2000
R:\Option\English\2k_PSPPD
●
Windows 95/98/Me
R:\Option\English\9x_PSPPD
●
Windows NT
R:\Option\English\NT_PSPPD
●
When selecting the printer model in step 9 on page 2-4, select the PPD file name with your printer model.
3
Enter the CD-ROM drive and setup
command. Then click the [OK] button.
Example: If the CD-ROM drive is designated as
drive R, enter “R:\SETUP.EXE”.
4
Follow the instructions on the screen to install
the desired software.
2-14
■ PS display font
The PRINTER UTILITIES CD-ROM of a PS3 expansion kit contains PS display fonts. Install the PS display fonts
as needed when the PostScript printer driver is installed. To install the PS display fonts, select it when installing the
PostScript printer driver using the installer.
■ Installing the resident font information for PPD (Windows 95/98/Me)
After installing the PPD files, follow the procedure below to install the resident font information.
NOTES
●
Before installing the resident font information, be sure to install the PPD files.
●
When installing the resident font information, be sure to close all other open applications.
●
When the printer is used as a network printer, if you have changed the port for the printer from Properties of
the printer driver, reinstall the resident font information.
The screens in the Windows 98 environment are used below as examples.
1
Start Windows.
2
Insert the PRINTER UTILITIES CD-ROM of
a PS3 expansion kit into a CD-ROM drive.
If your computer is configured for auto start on the
CD-ROM, the package selection screen will appear.
Click the [Cancel] button.
3
On the [START] menu, click “RUN”.
4
Enter the CD-ROM drive and
“Option\English\9x_psppd\Pfmsetup.exe”,
and click the [OK] button.
If the CD-ROM drive is designated as drive R, type
“R:\Option\English\9x_psppd\Pfmsetup.exe”
and click the [OK] button.
The following window will appear.
5
Click the [OK] button.
The following window will appear.
If the PPD files have not been installed, a message
indicating it will appear and the resident font
information cannot be installed.
6
Click the [OK] button.
7
After installing the resident font, restart
Windows.
Installation of the resident font is complete.
USING THE MACHINE AS A POSTSCRIPT PRINTER
2-15
2
Using the printer in the Macintosh environment
To use the printer in the Macintosh environment, the PPD files (PostScript printer description files) for Macintosh
contained in the PRINTER UTILITIES CD-ROM of an optional PS3 expansion kit must be installed. The printer can be
used as a PostScript compatible printer. The printer, however, must be connected to the computer through a network.
An optional Print Server Card (AR-NC5J) is needed for network connection. Also the Macintosh computer must be
equipped with an Ethernet port. If your computer is not equipped with an Ethernet port, install an Ethernet interface.
NOTE
If this printer is connected to the computer via a cross cable, be sure to turn on the Macintosh computer before
turning on this printer. If not, the printer cannot be recognized as a network printer.
■ PPD files
The PPD files for Macintosh are the files which a Macintosh computer refers to when using its LaserWriter printer
driver for printing.
■ SHARP PPD Utility
The SHARP PPD Utility is used to register account numbers and passwords when the auditing mode (page 7 of the
Key Operator’s Guide) or the job retention function with password (page 2-9) is used. This utility is also used to
change the registered account numbers and passwords.
■ Display fonts
The PRINTER UTILITIES CD-ROM contains the display fonts for Macintosh. If you use the PPD files, install the
display fonts as needed.
■ Before installing the PPD files and the PPD Utility
Before installing the software above, check the hardware and software requirements.
Computer: Apple Macintosh series
Apple Power Macintosh series
Operating system: Mac OS 8.51 to 9.x
Printer driver: LaserWriter 8 version 8.4.1 or later
For other conditions such as CPU and RAM capacity, requirements of the operating system must be satisfied.
Ensure that LaserWriter 8 has been installed in the Macintosh system. If not, install it from the system CD-ROM
supplied with your Macintosh computer.
USING THE MACHINE AS A POSTSCRIPT PRINTER
2-16
■ Installing the utilities
The screens in the Mac OS 9.0 environment are used below as examples. The display varies with the operating
system and printer driver versions.
1
Turn on the computer and start the
operating system.
2
Insert the supplied SHARP PS3 Expansion
Kit AR-PK1 PRINTER UTILITIES CD-ROM
into a CD-ROM drive.
The AR-PK1 icon will appear on the desktop.
3
Close all other applications and double-
click the AR-PK1 icon on the desktop.
The files contained in the CD-ROM will be displayed.
The Printer Manual is not for this product.
4
Double-click the Installer icon.
The installer screen will appear.
5
Click [Reference] of steps 2 and 3 to read
the text.
Be sure to read the descriptions, which contain
information on use of this product as a printer.
6
Click the [Install] button of step 4.
The SHARP Installer dialog box will appear.
Ensure that “Easy Install” is selected, select the
drive, and click the [Install] button.
NOTES
●
“Easy Install” is recommended.
●
To cancel the installation, click the [Cancel]
button.
●
When uninstalling the PPD files from your
computer, select “Custom Remove” on the
installation type selection window, select the
features to be removed, and click the [Remove]
button.
7
After installation is complete, click the
[Quit] button and remove the CD-ROM.
USING THE MACHINE AS A POSTSCRIPT PRINTER
2-17
2
■ Selecting the printer
Follow the procedure below to select the printer.
1
Ensure that the printer is connected to the
network to which your computer is
connected.
2
Select the Chooser from the Apple Menu.
3
Click the LaserWriter 8 icon.
●
The names of connected printers are displayed in
the right hand box. If multiple AppleTalk zones are
displayed, select the zone which includes the desired
printer.
4
Select the desired printer.
●
The default printer name of this product is
“SCXXXXXX” (XXXXXX: 6 alphanumeric characters).
The printer name can be changed by adjusting the
setting for the Print Server Card (AR-NC5J).
5
Click ‘Create’, ‘Setup’ or ‘Setup...’.
(Phrase depends on the version of MAC OS installed)
●
If you are setting this printer for the first time:
When the “Select a PostScript Printer Description
File:” dialog box appears, select the PPD file name
with your printer model name and click ‘Select’.
●
If you are setting this printer again:
1) Click ‘Auto Setup’.
2) When the “Select a PostScript Printer Description
File:” dialog box appears, select the PPD file
name with your printer model name and click
‘Select’.
3) Click ‘OK’.
●
Printer configuration will be automatically set.
6
Click the Close box to close the Chooser.
USING THE MACHINE AS A POSTSCRIPT PRINTER
2-18
■ Paper setting
1
Select “Page Setup” from the [File] menu
of application software.
The following display will appear. (The display varies
with the operating system versions, printer driver
versions, and application software.)
2
Adjust each setting.
●
Paper size, reduction/enlargement, and orientation
can be set.
3
Click the [OK] button.
■ Print condition setting
1
Select “Print” from the [File] menu of
application software.
The following display will appear. (The display varies
with the operating system versions, printer driver
versions, and application software.)
2
Adjust each setting.
Number of copies, page range, and other settings can
be made.
If the printer has been configured for the auditing mode,
an assigned 5-digit account number must be specified.
To use the job retention with password, specify a five-
digit password.
To specify an account number or a password for the job
retention function, click “
” to the right of ‘General’ and
select ‘Job Control’.
●
The account numbers used for printing are common
to those for copying. The account numbers for printing
must be registered to the computer using the PPD
utility.
3
Click the [Print] button.
USING THE MACHINE AS A POSTSCRIPT PRINTER
2-19
2
■ Installing the display fonts
The display fonts for Macintosh are contained in the Font folder of the AR-PK1 PRINTER UTILITIES CD-ROM.
Install the display fonts as needed.
Copy the required display font files to the Fonts folder under the System folder of your computer.
NOTE
If any malfunction occurs due to the installation of display fonts, delete the fonts from the system.
1
Click the [Select] button and select the PPD
files for your printer.
2
To register an account number for the
computer, click the [Add] button for
Account Number. The Account Number
screen will appear. Enter a 5-digit account
number and click the [OK] button.
To delete a registered account number, select the
account number in the box and click the [Delete] button.
■ Using the SHARP PPD Utility
Before using the printer auditing mode or the job retention function with password from a Macintosh computer, you
must use the PPD Utility to register account numbers and passwords. The PPD Utility is installed together with the
PPD files using the installer for Macintosh contained in the SHARP PS3 Expansion Kit AR-PK1 PRINTER UTILITIES
CD-ROM.
This utility allows up to 20 account numbers to be registered for the computer. The account numbers are the same
as those for the copier auditing mode and must be registered using one of the key operator programs for the copier
feature. When printing in the auditing mode, one of the registered account numbers must be specified on the screen
used for setting print conditions. Also use this utility to change the registered account numbers.
When using the job retention function with password, a password must be specify when printing. This utility allows up
to 20 passwords to be registered. One of the passwords must be specified when you set the print conditions.
To start this utility, select SHARP AR-PK1 Extras folder and then double click the PPD Utility icon.
NOTE
Do not use the AR230_270 PPD Utility. This utility is not for this model.
3
To register a security password for the job
retention function, click the [Add] button
for Confidential Print Password. The
Confidential Print Password screen will
appear. Enter a 5-digit number in the box
and click the [OK] button.
To delete a registered security password, select the
password in the box and click the [Delete] button.
4
To save the registered account numbers
and passwords and to exit the utility, click
the [Save & Quit] button.
5
If the PPD file is changed using this utility,
be sure to select the printer again through
the Chooser. Use the procedure described
in “Selecting the Printer” on page 2-17.
USING THE MACHINE AS A POSTSCRIPT PRINTER
2-20
3-1
CHAPTER 3
PRINTER BASIC SETTINGS
This chapter describes the following items.
1. Printer configuration settings
2. Custom settings based on the customer’s operating conditions.
Page
MAKING CONFIGURATION SETTING .................................................. 3-2
● Operation procedure common to all printer configuration settings
(items that can be set from the operation panel) ............................ 3-2
● Default settings................................................................................ 3-4
● PCL settings .................................................................................... 3-4
● PostScript settings........................................................................... 3-4
CUSTOM SETTINGS ............................................................................. 3-5
● Operation procedure common to all custom settings
(items that can be set from the operation panel) ............................ 3-5
● Setting items.................................................................................... 3-7
3-2
MAKING CONFIGURATION SETTING
The printer configuration setting allows basic printer settings to be made. The items set with the printer configuration
settings are shown below.
● Default settings ............................... Basic settings used in printing (See page 3-4.)
● PCL settings ................................... Sets a PCL symbol set. (See page 3-4.)
● PostScript settings*......................... Sets whether a PostScript error page is printed or not when a PostScript error
has occurred. (See page 3-4.)
* An optional PS3 expansion kit is needed.
Operation procedure common to all printer configuration settings
(items that can be set from the operation panel)
When the machine is being operated from the operation panel on the main unit:
1
Press the [MENU] key to display the
configuration setting menu screen.
Press the [MENU] key
repeatedly until “SET
OPERATIONS CONDI-
TIONS” appears.
Any print jobs held in the
printer and any job
currently transmitted to
the printer will be printed
in the former print
conditions.
2
Press the [OK] key.
3
Press the or key to display the desired
setting item.
4
Press the [OK] key.
5
Press the or key to display the desired
setting.
For the details of each setting item, see the
description on and after page 3-4.
6
Press the [OK] key.
“ ” will be displayed to
the right of the selected
item and setting will be
registered. To set another
item, press the [BACK/C]
key to return to step 3 and
repeat the procedure to
step 6.
7
When setting is complete, press the
[MENU] key to return to the basic screen.
NOTE
If the [BACK/C] key is pressed after each setting is
complete, the display that has called the setting
will appear again. If selection of a number is mistaken
during setting operation, press the [BACK/C] key to
correct the selected number.
3-3
3
When the machine is being operated from the touch panel on a scanner module:
MAKING CONFIGURATION SETTING
1
Touch the [CONDITION SETTINGS] key on
the printer screen to display the
configuration setting menu screen.
CONDITION
SETTINGS
Any print jobs held in the
printer and any job
currently transmitted to
the printer will be printed
in the former print
conditions.
2
Touch the key of the desired item to display
its setting screen.
CONDITION SETTINGS
DEFAULT SETTINGS
PostScript SETTINGS
PCL SETTINGS
DEFAULT SETTINGS
PCL SETTINGS
PostScript SETTINGS
Detailed descriptions for configuration setting start
on the next page.
3
Touch the desired setting on the setting
screen of the desired item and touch the
[OK] key.
To set another item, repeat steps 2 and 3.
4
To finish the setting operation, touch the
[EXIT] key.
CONDITION SETTINGS
DEFAULT SETTINGS
PostScript SETTINGS
PCL SETTINGS
DEFAULT SETTINGS
PCL SETTINGS
PostScript SETTINGS
Supplementary explanation of key operation
for configuration setting
(when using the touch panel)
1/2
A4P
1
DEFAULT SETTINGS
SMOOTHING
ORIENTATION
DEFAULT OUTPUT TRAY
COPIES
DEFAULT PAPER SIZE
DEFAULT PAPER TYPE
OK
These keys and indicator are available on setting
screens that require the entry of numerical values.
20
(1-999)
The name of the configuration category or particular item to be set will appear on the touch key. A touch of the
key will select the item displayed.
Check mark boxes are touch keys that show the status of selections. A box with a check mark means the
function is “on” (enabled) and an unchecked box means the function is “off” (disabled). Alternate touches of a
box will change the on/off status.
● If a configuration step requires more than one screen to display all available settings for a configuration step,
[ ] and [ ] arrow touch keys on the setting screens allow access to the available selections on all screens. If a
selection is accepted on one of the screens by a press of the [OK] key, the display will return through the
previous selection screens within the same setting step to confirm the settings. After all settings are confirmed,
the [OK] key must be pushed again to advance to the next step.
The currently set numerical value is displayed.
Numerical values can be set by touching the [ ] and [ ] keys.
3-4
Default settings
The default settings allow detailed print conditions to be set for printing without any printer driver (for example, printing
from MS-DOS and printing from a computer without any printer driver installed). The setting items are shown below.
NOTE
When some items can be set both in the printer driver and on the operation panel, the values set in the printer
driver override those set on the operation panel. For items that can be set in the printer driver, perform setting
in the printer driver.
■■
■■
■ Smoothing
SMOOTHING reduces jaggies seen at roundish
curved portions of characters and images to be
printed and improves pseudo resolution.
Default setting: On
Smoothing on or off can be selected.
■■
■■
■ Copies
COPIES is set when the number of copies to be
printed is set.
Default setting: 1
The number of copies can be set from 1 to 999.
■■
■■
■ Orientation
ORIENTATION allows portrait orientation or
landscape orientation to be selected for printing.
Default setting: PORTRAIT
PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE can be set.
■■
■■
■ Default paper size
The paper size to be used for printing in the normal
conditions is set.
Printing will be performed onto the specified size
paper unless otherwise specified.
Default setting: 8-1/2 x 11 or A4
11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 13, 8-1/2 x 11, 7-1/4 x 10-1/2, 5-1/
2 x 8-1/2, A3, B4, A4, B5 or A5 can be set.
(If the operation panel on the main unit is used, the
sizes are displayed as follows in the display:
LEDGER, LEGAL, FOOLSCAP, LETTER,
EXECUTIVE, INVOICE, A3, B4, A4, B5, and A5.)
■■
■■
■ Default paper type
The paper type to be used for printing in the normal
conditions is set.
Printing will be performed onto the specified type
paper unless otherwise specified.
Default setting: PLAIN
Plain paper, pre-printed paper, recycled paper,
transparency film letter head paper, pre-punched
paper or color paper can be set.
■■
■■
■ Default output tray
The output tray to be used for printing in the normal
conditions is set. Printed sheets will be output to the
specified tray unless otherwise specified by
application software.
Default setting: Depends on installation of peripheral
devices.
The trays that can be selected depend on installation
of peripheral devices. This item itself may not be
selected.
MAKING CONFIGURATION SETTING
PCL settings
PCL SETTINGS is used to assign a part of character codes to characters of a country in the PCL symbol set. (Used
when different symbols are used depending on the country.)
Default setting: “1” (Roman-8)
For setting items of the symbol set, see page 6-6.
The list of the numbers to be set and their corresponding symbol sets can be printed using “PCL symbol set list
printing” (see page 3-7).
When using the operation panel on the main unit, select the desired symbol set item and register it. When using the
operation panel with touch panel, select the number that corresponds to the desired symbol set and register it.
PostScript settings
This setting specifies whether an error page describing the cause of an error is printed or not when a PostScript error
has occurred.
Selections are available to choose printing or not printing of error pages.
Default setting: Not print
■■
■■
■ 2-SIDED PRINT
Printing mode, 1-SIDED or 2-SIDED, to be used for
printing in the normal condition is set.
This key can not be selected on the printer without
the duplex module.
Default setting: 1-SIDED
1-SIDED, 2-SIDED (BOOK) or 2-SIDED (TABLET)
can be set.
3-5
3
CUSTOM SETTINGS
Custom settings are used for various settings based on the customer operating conditions. The items that can be set
with the custom settings are shown below.
● Total count....................................... The number of printed pages and the like are displayed. (See page 3-7.)
● Display contrast*
1
............................ The display contrast of the operation panel is adjusted. (See page 3-7.)
● List print .......................................... Used to print a list of settings that have been made or a font list. (See page
3-7.)
● Clock............................................... The date and time of the built-in clock of the printer are set.
● Tray settings.................................... The paper type and paper size for each tray are set.
● Auto tray switching.......................... Used to switch automatically the paper tray of the same paper size when
paper runs out in continuous printing.
For the items below, detailed setting procedure is described in the facsimile operation manual.
● Address control*
3
........................ Used to register destination E-mail addresses, fax numbers, and Internet
fax addresses. Also group entry, memory box entry, custom index entry,
and scanner sender entry can be set.
● Receive mode*
2
.......................... The fax receive mode (automatic or manual) is set.
● Fax data forward*
2
....................... Received fax data in memory can be forwarded to another destination.
● Key operator programs .................... Setting programs are provided for key operators (administrators of this machine).
If this product is equipped with a scanner module, this key will appear in the
CUSTOM SETTINGS menu screen. For settings, see the Key Operator’s Guide.
*
1
Can be set if this product is equipped with a scanner module.
*
2
Can be set if this product is equipped with a scanner module and the facsimile feature can be used.
*
3
Can be set if this product is equipped with a scanner module and the facsimile feature or the network scanner feature
can be used.
Operation procedure common to all custom settings (items that can be set
from the operation panel)
When the machine is being operated from the operation panel on the main unit:
1
Press the [MENU] key to display the custom
settings menu screen.
Press the [MENU] key
repeatedly until the
message “CUSTOM
SETTINGS” appears.
Any print jobs held in the
printer and any job
currently transmitted to
the printer will be printed
in the former custom
setting conditions.
2
Press the [OK] key.
3
Press the or key to select the desired
setting item.
4
Press the [OK] key.
5
Press the or key to select the desired
setting.
For details of each setting item, see the description
on and after page 3-7.
3-6
When the machine is being operated from the touch panel on a scanner module:
1
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key when
the printer screen is displayed to display
the custom settings menu screen.
Any print jobs held in the
printer and any job
currently transmitted to
the printer will be printed
in the former custom
setting conditions.
2
Touch the key of the desired item to display
its setting screen.
TOTAL COUNT
TRAY SETTINGS
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
CLOCK
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
ADDRESS
CONTROL
FAX DATA
FORWARD
RECEIVE MODE
LIST PRINT
CUSTOM SETTINGS
Detailed descriptions for custom settings start on
the next page.
TRAY SETTINGS
TRAY 1
TRAY 2
TRAY 3
PLAIN / AUTO-INCH
RECYCLED / AUTO-INCH
TYPE / SIZE
PRINT
OK
1/2
COPY FAX
PLAIN / 8 X11
1
/
2
CUSTOM SETTINGS
Depending on the setting item, additional item setting
keys may be displayed and page switching keys
may be displayed.
Check mark boxes are touch keys that show the
status of selections. A box with a check mark means
the function is “on” (enabled) and an unchecked box
means the function is “off” (disabled). Alternate
touches of a box will change the on/off status.
3
Touch the desired setting on the setting
screen of the desired item and touch the
[OK] key.
TRAY SETTINGS
TRAY 1
TRAY 2
TRAY 3
PLAIN / AUTO-INCH
RECYCLED / AUTO-INCH
TYPE / SIZE
PRINT COPY FAX
OK
1/2
PLAIN / 8 X11
1
/
2
CUSTOM SETTINGS
To set another item, repeat steps 2 and 3.
4
To finish the setting operation, touch the
[EXIT] key.
TOTAL COUNT
TRAY SETTINGS
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
CLOCK
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
ADDRESS
CONTROL
FAX DATA
FORWARD
RECEIVE MODE
LIST PRINT
CUSTOM SETTINGS
6
Press the [OK] key.
“ ” will be displayed to
the right of selected item,
and the setting will be reg-
istered. Depending on the
setting item, additional
item selection and regis-
tration operation may be
needed. In this case, use
the or key to select
an item and press the
[OK] key to register it. To
set another item, press
the [BACK/C] key and
repeat steps 5 and 6.
CUSTOM SETTINGS
7
When setting is complete, press the
[MENU] key to return to the basic screen.
NOTE
If the [BACK/C] key is pressed after each setting
is complete, the display that has called the setting
will appear again. If selection of a number is
mistaken during setting operation, press the [BACK/
C] key to correct the selected number.
3-7
3
Setting items
■■
■■
■ Total count
The number of total printed pages in this product
can be displayed and printed.
If the product is equipped with an optional scanner
to include copying and facsimile functions, the
number of copies made and facsimile images sent
can also be displayed or printed.
■■
■■
■ Display contrast
Can be set if this product is equipped with a scanner
module.
This item is used to adjust the contrast of the touch
panel display.
■■
■■
■ List print
Test pages such as a list of setting items configured
in this product and a list of the resident fonts for
checking can be printed.
The types of test pages are shown below.
● All custom setting list
The settings in the printer feature (condition
settings and custom settings) are printed. The
key operator program settings are not printed.
● Printer test page
●
PCL font list printing: A list of fonts that can be
used with the PCL printer drivers is printed.
●
PCL symbol set printing: A PCL symbol set list
is printed.
●
NIC page printing: A list of settings used by the
NIC (Network Interface Card), namely the print
server card, is printed.
●
PostScript font list printing: A list of fonts that
can be used with the PostScript printer driver is
printed.
NOTE
If test page printing is disabled with key operator
program “DISABLE TEST PAGE PRINTING” (page
11 of the Key Operator’s Guide.), the printer test
pages cannot be printed.
■■
■■
■ Clock
The date and time of the built-in clock of this product
are set. These settings will be used for the functions
that require date and time information.
■■
■■
■ Tray settings
Paper type, paper size, operation mode, and use of
automatic tray switching are set for each tray.
For details on setting the paper type and paper size,
see pages 1-19 and 1-20.
“Operation mode” means copy, print or fax mode.
Use of a paper tray is set for each mode. This setting
is available when the machine is operated from the
touch panel on a scanner module.
When the machine is being operated from the
operation panel on the main unit, use the item “Auto
tray switching” described below for setting the
automatic tray switching function.
■■
■■
■ Auto tray switching
If the auto tray switching function is set and more
than one tray of the same paper size is installed in
this product, printing can be continued by switching
automatically the paper tray when paper of a tray
runs out. This item is used to enable the auto tray
switching function. When the machine is operated
from the touch panel on a scanner module, use the
item “Tray settings” to set this function.
CUSTOM SETTINGS
4-1
CHAPTER 4
TROUBLESHOOTING
AND MAINTENANCE
This chapter describes misfeed removal, user maintenance, etc.
Page
MISFEED REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
● General misfeed removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
● Misfeed removal guidance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
● Misfeed in the paper feed area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
● Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and exit area . . . . . . . . . 4-6
● Misfeed in the duplex module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
USER MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
● Cleaning the scanner module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-2
MISFEED REMOVAL
When the machine is being operated from the operation panel on the main unit:
●
If the machine is not equipped with a scanner, all messages will appear on the display panel of the main unit. For
machines equipped with a scanner, messages will appear on the touch panel display on the scanner module.
When a misfeed has occurred, printing will stop and the message shown below will appear. Follow the procedure below
to remove misfed paper.
PAPER JAM.
[i]
NOTES
●
Do not damage or touch the photoconductive drum.
(See pages 1-5 and 4-6.)
●
Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during
removal.
●
If paper is accidentally torn during removal, be sure
to remove all pieces.
Fusing unit
CAUTION
The fusing unit is hot. Take
care in removing paper.
General misfeed removal procedure
If the INFORMATION key is pressed when a misfeed has occurred, messages will appear giving guidance for
misfeed removal. The messages will appear in sequence and can be viewed by using the and keys.
1
Press the INFORMATION key.
2
Press the key.
Use the or keys on
the operation panel to
scroll through the
guidance messages.
The messages in the table below provide guidance for
misfeed removal. For more detailed guidance refer to
the pages indicated in the table.
Message Page
PULL OUT TRAY * AND CHECK THE PAPER.
OPEN THE LOWER LEFT COVER.
OPEN THE LEFT COVER.
REMOVE PAPER FROM BYPASS TRAY.
OPEN THE DUPLEX COVER.
OPEN THE MAIL-BIN COVER.
OPEN THE CENTER COVER.
OPEN THE FINISHER TOP COVER.
SLIDE THE FINISHER AWAY FROM MACHINE.
OPEN THE FINISHER FRONT COVER.
3
Press the INFORMATION key to close the
misfeed removal guidance.
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-7
5-8
5-8,5-14
5-14, 5-24
5-24
5-24
4-3
4
Misfeed in the transport area, fusing
area, and exit area (page 4-6)
Misfeed in the mail-bin
stacker (page 5-8)
Misfeed in paper tray 1 (page 4-4)
Misfeed in the multi purpose drawer
(page 4-5)
Misfeed in the stand/MPD & 2000
sheet paper drawer (page 4-5)
Misfeed in the stand/3 x 500 sheet
paper drawer (page 4-5)
Misfeed in the scanner module .
(See the operation manual for copier operation.)
Misfeed in the finisher (page 5-14)
Misfeed in the duplex module
(page 4-7)
Misfeed in the bypass tray (page 4-7)
Misfeed in the saddle
stitch finisher (page
5-24)
Misfeed in the
multi purpose
drawer (page
4-5)
When the machine is being operated from the touch panel on a scanner module:
When a misfeed has occurred during printing, the message “A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED.” will appear in the
touch panel display of the operation panel and printing including copying and facsimile output will stop. The
approximate misfeed locations are indicated with “
” shown in the illustration below. The page numbers for detailed
information on misfeed removal are also shown.
NOTES
●
Facsimile reception data is always temporarily stored in memory. After misfed paper is removed, any received
data in memory will be automatically printed.
●
If the machine is performing a scanning operation, vibrations resulting from hard operation of machine covers
or trays during misfeed removal will cause uneven scanning. Also if a hard disk drive unit is installed, it may
malfunction due to vibration.
NOTES
●
Do not damage or touch the photoconductive drum.
(See pages 1-5 and 4-6.)
●
Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during
removal.
●
If paper is accidentally torn during removal, be sure
to remove all pieces.
Fusing unit
CAUTION
The fusing unit is hot. Take
care in removing paper.
Misfeed removal guidance
Misfeed removal guidance can be displayed by touching the INFORMATION key on the touch panel after a misfeed
has occurred.
INFORMATION
MISFEED REMOVAL
4-4
Misfeed in the paper feed area
NOTE
Be sure to follow the misfeed removal sequence. Do not pull the paper tray out first as paper may be located
between the paper tray and the paper feed section. If the tray is pulled first, the misfed paper may be torn and
difficult to remove. The following procedure shows the removal sequence when the machine is equipped with a
duplex module. If the machine is not equipped with a duplex module or any output device, the procedure is
basically the same. The left side of the machine must be opened and cleared before the paper tray is pulled out.
■ Misfeed in paper tray 1
1
Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to
the left.
Unlatch the module and
gently move the module
away from the machine.
If the machine is not
equipped with a duplex
module, open the side
cover similarly.
2
Remove the misfed paper.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
NOTE
The paper may not be extending out far from inside
the machine but must be removed if it is possible to
grasp it. If it is not possible to grasp it, go to the next
step.
3
If misfed paper is not found in step 2, pull
out paper tray 1 and remove the misfed
paper.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
4
Gently close the paper tray.
Push the paper tray back
into the machine.
5
Gently close the duplex module.
If the machine is not
equipped with a duplex
module, close the side
cover.
After closing, confirm that
the misfeed message has
been cleared and the
normal display appears.
NOTE
If paper drops beyond the rear side of the paper tray
that has been pulled out, remove the paper tray and
then remove the paper. (For removal of the paper tray,
see the illustration below.)
After pulling out the
paper tray until it stops,
gently lift and pull the
tray to remove it. To
reinstall the paper tray,
insert it at an angle and
then push it into the
machine.
To remove a paper tray from a stand/paper drawer,
pull the tray out until it stops then rotate it to the left
to disengage it from the stand. When reinstalling it,
place the left rear or the drawer into the slot and rotate
the drawer to the right and into the stand.
Installation of trays in the stand/3x500 sheet
paper drawer
The middle and lower trays cannot be installed in
the upper tray position and the upper tray cannot be
installed to the middle and lower tray positions.
(These cannot be pushed into the machine.)
Take care not to install a tray to an improper position
after removing the tray.
MISFEED REMOVAL
4-5
4
■■
■■
■ Misfeed in the multi purpose drawer
1
Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to
the left.
Unlatch the module and
gently move the module
away from the machine.
If the machine is not
equipped with a duplex
module, open the side
cover similarly.
2
Open the left cover of the stand/paper
drawer.
Hold the knob and gently
open the cover.
If the machine is not
equipped with a stand/
paper drawer, open the left
cover of the multi purpose
drawer.
3
Remove the misfed paper.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
NOTE
The paper may not be extending out far from inside
the machine but must be removed if it is possible to
grasp it. If it is not possible to grasp it, go to the next
step.
4
Close the left cover of the stand/paper
drawer.
5
Gently close the duplex module.
If the machine is not
equipped with a duplex
module, close the side
cover.
After closing, confirm that
the misfeed message has
been cleared and the
normal display appears.
6
If misfed paper is not found in step 3, refer
to “Misfeed in paper tray 1” (steps 1 to 5 on
the previous page) to remove the misfed
paper.
■ Misfeed in the stand/3 x 500 sheet paper
drawer
For misfeed removal in the upper tray, follow the
procedure of “Misfeed in the multi purpose drawer”
shown to the left to remove the misfed paper.
■■
■■
■ Misfeed in the stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper
drawer
For misfeed removal in the upper tray, follow the
procedure of “Misfeed in the multi purpose drawer”
shown to the left to remove the misfed paper. For
misfeed removal in the lower large capacity tray, follow
the procedure below.
1
Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Misfeed in the multi
purpose drawer” shown to the left.
2
If misfed paper is not found in step 1, refer
to “Misfeed in paper tray 1” on the previous
page.
3
If misfed paper is not found in steps 1 and
2, pull out the large capacity tray (lower
tray) and remove the misfed paper as
shown in the illustrations below.
Raise the paper guide and
remove the misfed paper.
After removing the misfed
paper, be sure to return
the paper guide.
4
Gently close the large capacity tray.
Push the paper tray all the
way into the machine.
5
Gently close the duplex module.
If the machine is not equipped with a duplex module,
close the side cover.
After closing, confirm that the misfeed message
has been cleared and the normal display appears.
MISFEED REMOVAL
4-6
Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and exit area
CAUTION
The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper.
(Do not touch the metal parts.)
1
Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to
the left.
Unlatch the module and
gently move the module
away from the machine.
If the machine is not
equipped with a duplex
module, open the side
cover similarly.
2
Remove the misfed paper as shown in the
illustrations below.
Roller rotating knob A
If paper is misfed in the
transport area, turn roller
rotating knob A in the
direction of the arrow to
remove the misfed paper.
NOTE
Transfer roller
Do not touch or damage
the transfer roller.
Photoconductive drum
Do not touch or damage
the photoconductive
drum.
Roller rotating knob B
If paper is misfed in the
fusing area, turn roller
rotating knob B in the
direction of the arrow to
remove the misfed paper.
CAUTION
The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper.
(Do not touch any metal parts.)
Fusing unit open tab
If the misfed paper is
inside the fusing area,
turn down the fusing unit
open tab to open the
fusing unit and remove
the misfed paper.
If paper is misfed in the
exit area, remove it as
shown while taking care
not to tear the paper.
If the duplex module is
equipped with an exit tray
and paper is misfed in the
exit area, remove the
misfed paper as shown in
the illustration.
3
Gently close the duplex module.
If the machine is not
equipped with a duplex
module, close the side
cover.
After closing, confirm that
the misfeed message has
been cleared and the
normal display appears.
MISFEED REMOVAL
4-7
4
Misfeed in the duplex module
1
Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to
the left.
Unlatch the unit and
gently move the module
away from the machine.
2
If the duplex module has an exit tray, rotate
it up out of the way and open the cover of
the duplex module.
If no exit tray is attached,
just open the cover of the
duplex module and ignore
any reference to the tray
in the following steps.
3
While holding the exit tray up, remove the
misfed paper as shown in the illustrations
below.
If paper is misfed at the
upper part of the duplex
module, gently remove it
while taking care not to
tear the paper.
If paper is misfed at the
lower part of the duplex
module, gently remove it
while taking care not to
tear the paper.
4
Close the cover of the duplex module and
lower the exit tray.
5
Gently close the duplex module.
After closing the duplex
module, confirm that the
misfeed message has
been cleared and the
normal display appears.
■ Misfeed in the bypass tray
1
Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to
the left.
Unlatch the unit and
gently move the module
away from the machine.
2
Remove the misfed from the bypass tray.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
3
Gently close the duplex module.
After closing the duplex
module, confirm that the
misfeed message is
cleared and that the
normal display appears.
MISFEED REMOVAL
4-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Whenever the printer stops or operation is not possible, check the operation panel display for messages. In most
cases these messages will give sufficient information to return the machine to an operating condition. In cases where
this information is not enough, check the list below for more information.
This section describes problems concerning printer features.
For troubleshooting specific problems related to copier, facsimile, or network scanner features, see the separate
manuals provided for them. For problems related to peripheral devices, see chapter 5 of this manual.
Solution or causeCheck
Problem
Printer does not
operate.
Printer is on but data
is not received.
●
Printer plugged in? Plug the printer into a grounded outlet.
●
Main power switch on? Turn on the main power switch.
●
READY indicator off? The printer is warming up. (Warm-up time
is approximately 80 seconds.) Wait until
the READY indicator lights up.
●
Is the correct printer driver installed?
Install the appropriate printer driver. (page
2-3)
●
Message indicating need to load
paper displayed?
Load paper. (page 1-16)
●
Message indicating need to replace
the toner cartridge displayed?
(ERROR indicator lit at the same
time on the operation panel of the
main unit?)
Replace the toner cartridge.
See the separate "Operation manual
(Read this document before installing the
product.)."
●
Message indicating a paper misfeed
displayed? (ERROR indicator lit at
the same time on the operation
panel of the main unit?)
Remove misfed paper. (page 4-2)
●
Is the correct interface cable properly
connected between the printer and
your computer?
Ensure that the correct interface cable is
connected between the printer and your
computer. (page 2-2)
Data is received but
not printed.
Printer cannot be
selected from
computer.
The orientation of the
image is incorrect on
the print.
● Is paper of the specified and type
loaded in the printer?
Load paper, select another paper size or
cancel printing.
● Is the printer driver installed
correctly?
Install the printer driver correctly. (page
2-3)
● Is the orientation setting in the
printer driver correct?
Correct the orientation in the printer driver.
●
Has the printer been selected
properly in the application software
or, when the printer is being used as
a network printer, has it been
properly registered on the network?
Ensure that this printer is selected on the
application software or use an appropriate
utility to check that the printer is registered
on the network.
Image loss has
occurred. The image is
larger than the paper.
● Zoom printing?
Check the zoom setting in the driver.
4-9
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
Solution or causeCheck
Problem
Black pages
Black and white areas
are reversed.
Printer prints in
reverse order.
Printer stops in the
middle of a print job.
Printing is not on
desired paper size.
●
Iss a color on color image being
printed?
Some color on color images may be
printed as all black.
●
Negative image printing? Check print driver setting.
●
Has the resident font information
been installed?
Install (or reinstall) the resident font
information. (page 2-14)
●
Is the reverse order selected in the
application software?
Cancel the reverse order printing in the
application software.
●
Too much paper in the exit tray? Remove the paper from the exit tray.
●
Is the printer out of paper? Load paper.
●
Is paper selection of driver "Auto"? Ensure that the desired paper is set in a
paper tray of the printer and select "Auto"
in the paper selection of the printer driver.
Printer resident font
cannot be selected
from the application
software when the
PPD file of an optional
PS3 expansion kit is
used in Windows
(except NT)
environment.
Printer write error
occurs when printing
from the parallel port.
Only one set has been
output when more than
one set has been
specified.
Two-sided printing is
specified but only a
notice page is printed.
Printed image is too
light or too dark.
●
Is the size of the file being printed
too large for the available memory?
Check for a printed notice page.
The print file size exceeds storage
capacity of this printer. Print additional sets
one at a time. Installation of a hard disk
drive will enable printing of larger size files.
●
Two-sided printing of a large number
of pages is specified?
The print file size exceeds storage
capacity of this printer. Installation of a
hard disk drive will enable printing of large
size files.
●
Is the exposure control set properly? The printer exposure level can be adjusted
by using a key operator program. Contact
your key operator. (page 11 of the Key
Operator's Guide.)
●
Is the timeout time set to be too
short in the printer driver?
Set a longer time in the timeout setting in
the printer driver.
4-10
Check Solution or cause
Problem
Smudges on printed
sheets
Cannot select the
desired paper in the
printer driver or on the
copier operation panel.
Paper misfeeds
frequently.
Printed paper is
wrinkled or the image
rubs off easily.
The contrast on the
touch panel is too high
or too low.
Password entry is
requested.
Priority of reserved
print jobs cannot be
changed.
A notice page is
printed when a print
job is sent to the
printer for retention.
●
Is a message indicating a need of
maintenance or replacement of
developer cartridge displayed
([ERROR] indicator on the main unit
operation panel lit)?
See the Operation Manual (Read this
document before installing the product.).
●
Paper damp? Be sure to store paper in the wrapper in a
dry location and do not store paper in a
location that is
●
humid
●
at a high temperature or an extremely
low temperature.
●
Has the paper size and type been
set from the operation panel on the
printer?
Be sure to set the paper size referring to
"Setting the paper size and type" when
you change the paper size in tray 1. (page
1-19)
●
Paper curled or damp? Do not use curled or crimped paper. If you
do not use paper for a long time, store
paper in the wrapper in a dry location.
●
Paper curled and misfed in the
duplex module or finisher?
Paper may be curled when output
depending on the paper type and quality.
In some cases turning the paper over in
the tray will reduce misfeeding due to
curling.
●
Multiple sheets of paper fed
simultaneously?
Remove the paper
from the paper tray
or the bypass tray,
fan the paper as
shown in the
illustration, and
then load it again.
●
Is paper size or weight out of the
allowable range?
Use paper in the allowable range.
●
Has the number of job sreached the
maximum of 100 jobs in retention?
No further jobs can be retained until some
jobs already in retention are deleted.
●
Password set in the retention
function?
●
Has the paper to be used run out?
Password is needed when executing
printing. If the password is not known,
printing cannot be executed.
Load paper. (page 1-16)
●
Exit tray full? Remove paper from the exit tray if it is
full.
●
Is LCD contrast properly adjusted? Adjust the contrast using "DISPLAY
CONTRAST" of custom settings. (page
3-7)
TROUBLESHOOTING
4-11
4
USER MAINTENANCE
To ensure good service from this product over a long period of time, it is recommended that the following maintenance
be performed on a regular basis.
NOTE
When cleaning, do not use thinner, benzene, or
similar volatile cleaning agents.
Cleaning the scanner module
If the document glass, DSPF scanning section glass or document cover have dirty spots, these spots will become
part of scanned images. These will show up as defects when the images are printed. Clean these areas by wiping them
with a soft, clean cloth dampened with water or a small amount of a neutral detergent and then wipe them dry.
If black or white stripes
appear on printed images
of originals that were fed
through the DSPF, wipe
the scanning section
glasses shown as A and
B in the illustration.
Black stripes White stripes
5-1
CHAPTER 5
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
This chapter describes operating instructions for the Mail-Bin Stacker,
the Finisher, the Saddle Stitch Finisher, and the Duplex Module.
Page
DUPLEX MODULE ................................................................................ 5-2
● Part names ...................................................................................... 5-2
● Specifications .................................................................................. 5-2
● Loading paper in the bypass tray ................................................... 5-3
● Setting the printer driver for duplex module,
bypass tray and exit tray.................................................................. 5-4
● Copying in the duplex mode ........................................................... 5-4
● Troubleshooting (concerning the duplex module) ......................... 5-5
MAIL-BIN STACKER ............................................................................. 5-6
● Part names ...................................................................................... 5-6
● Specifications .................................................................................. 5-6
● Specifying mail bins to receive printed output ................................ 5-7
● Setting in the printer driver .............................................................. 5-7
● Misfeed in the mail-bin stacker ....................................................... 5-8
FINISHER .............................................................................................. 5-9
● Part names ...................................................................................... 5-9
● Specifications .................................................................................. 5-9
● Finisher functions ............................................................................ 5-10
● Using the finisher functions............................................................. 5-11
● Staple cartridge replacement.......................................................... 5-12
● Misfeed in the finisher ..................................................................... 5-14
● Troubleshooting finisher problems ................................................. 5-15
● Stapling position quick reference guide for duplex output ............. 5-16
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER ................................................................. 5-17
● Part names ...................................................................................... 5-17
● Specifications .................................................................................. 5-17
● Saddle stitch finisher functions ....................................................... 5-18
● Using the saddle stitch finisher ....................................................... 5-20
● Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal................... 5-21
● Misfeed in the saddle stitch finisher................................................ 5-24
● Troubleshooting (concerning the saddle stitch finisher) ................ 5-26
● Stapling position quick reference guide for duplex output ............. 5-27
● Relation between print image and saddle stitch ............................ 5-28
5-2
DUPLEX MODULE
If a duplex module is installed, printing onto both sides of paper can be performed.
Two types of duplex modules are available: duplex module/bypass tray and duplex module. The descriptions in this
manual are for the duplex module/bypass tray. For misfeed removal for these modules, see page 4-7.
Part names
Exit tray
The tray is extendable to support
large size paper. Extend the tray
when 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2"
x 13", A3 or B4 paper is being used.
For a duplex module (not duplex
module/bypass tray), the exit tray is
optional.
Bypass tray
This tray can also be used for special
papers including transparency film.
(See next page and page 1-17.)
Duplex module
NOTES
●
Do not press down on the bypass tray or the exit tray.
●
The duplex module requires the installation of other peripheral devices in order to be functional and cannot be
installed together with some other devices. The table on page 6-4 shows the configurations which are compatible.
NOTE
Automatic two-sided printing can
be done only onto plain paper.
Special papers cannot be used
for two-sided printing. (See page
1-18 for explanation on special
paper.)
Specifications
Name Duplex module or Duplex module/bypass tray
Paper size (for duplex copy)*
1
11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 13, 8-1/2 x 11, 8-1/2 x 11R, 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 R,
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, A5R
Paper weight (for duplex copy)*
1
16 to 28 lbs. or 60 to 105 g/m
2
Reference paper position Center
Bypass tray paper capacity*
2
100 sheets (8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size, 20 lbs. or 80 g/m
2
)
Dimensions Duplex module: 4-17/32" (W) x 16-15/64" (D) x 16-25/64" (H) (115 mm
(W) x 412 mm (D) x 416 mm (H))
Duplex module/bypass tray: 17-49/64" (W) x 17-19/64" (D) x 16-25/64"
(H) (451 mm (W) x 439 mm (D) x 416 mm (H))
Weight Duplex module: Approx. 11.1 lbs. (5 kg)
Duplex module/bypass tray: Approx. 16.6 lbs. (7.5 kg)
*
1
For paper size and paper weight for the bypass tray, see “Specifications of paper trays (types and sizes of
applicable papers for trays)” on page 1-17.
*
2
Duplex module/bypass tray only.
Name Exit tray
Paper output Print face down
Paper capacity 100 sheets (8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size, 20 lbs. or 80 g/m
2
)
Paper size Max. 11" x 17" or A3, Min. 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R or A5R
Paper type and weight to be Plain paper, 16 to 28 lbs. or 60 to 105 g/m
2
output
Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.
5-3
5
Loading paper in the bypass tray
The bypass tray can be used for plain paper and special papers including labels. Up to 100 sheets of standard paper
can be set. For paper types that can be used in the bypass tray, refer to page 1-17.
NOTE
If the paper type or size is changed, be sure to enter the paper type and size as in step 4.
1
Open the bypass tray.
When setting 11"x 17",
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13,
A3 or B4 paper, be sure
to extend the bypass tray
extension.
2
Set the bypass tray paper guides to the
width of the paper to be used.
3
Insert the paper all the way into the bypass
tray.
Set the paper face down.
If there is a clearance
between the paper and
the paper guides, the
paper may not be fed
correctly. Adjust the
guides so that they
contact the edges of the
paper.
NOTES
●
When using 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" paper, A5 paper or
postcards, be sure to load them with their shorter
edge into the feed slot as shown in the illustration.
●
When using special paper, postcards or
transparency film, be sure to feed them one
sheet at a time. If you set more than one sheet,
a paper misfeed may occur.
●
When adding paper, first remove remaining
paper, combine it with the paper to be added,
and then reload as a single stack. Adding paper
without stacking it correctly may cause a paper
misfeed.
●
When printing onto transparency film, remove
the output sheets as soon as possible.
●
For transparency film, use SHARP recom-
mended film.
4
Set the type and size of the loaded paper.
When the paper system is changed from the inch
system to the AB system or vise versa or when the
paper type is changed, the paper type must be
designated. For setting the paper size and type, see
page 1-19.
5
Loading paper in the bypass tray is now
complete.
DUPLEX MODULE
Bypass tray extension
5-4
Setting the printer driver for duplex
module, bypass tray and exit tray
When using the duplex module (including the bypass
tray and the exit tray) for printing, select “Properties”
and make selections as follows for the print job.
The screens used in the following descriptions are for a
PCL driver in the Windows 98 environment.
■■
■■
■ Two-sided printing
Open the “Main” tab and check the radio button of
the desired two-sided printing mode.
■■
■■
■ Using the bypass tray
Open the “Paper” tab shown in the illustration below
and select “Bypass Tray” in the “Paper Selection” drop
down.
■■
■■
■ Using the exit tray mounted to the duplex
module
Open the “Paper” tab shown in the illustration below
and select “Left Side Tray” in the “Output” drop down.
NOTES
●
The settings screens above will appear only if
the devices have been set properly in the printer
driver configuration (see NOTE on page 2-5).
●
The combination of paper selection and other
functions may not be compatible. For instance,
if heavy paper, envelopes, label stock, etc. are
selected, it will not be possible to select duplex,
offset tray, saddle stitch, etc. For details, see
printer driver help.
DUPLEX MODULE
Copying in the duplex mode
For copying in the duplex mode, press the COPY key
on the operation panel and make all selections on the
copy mode basic screen.
■■
■■
■ Automatic duplex copying
Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key on the copy mode
basic screen. A selection screen for two-sided
copying will appear.
■■
■■
■ Using the bypass tray
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key on the copy mode
basic screen. A selection screen for paper source
will appear. Select the bypass tray on this screen.
■■
■■
■ Using the exit tray
Touch the [OUTPUT] key on the copy mode basic
screen. A selection screen for output will appear.
Select the exit tray mounted to the duplex module
on this screen.
5-5
5
Troubleshooting (concerning the duplex module)
Check the list below before calling for service.
DUPLEX MODULE
Solution or cause
Special paper cannot be used for two-sided
printing. Use a paper type adequate for two-sided
printing. (See pages 1-18 and 5-2.)
Use a paper size adequate for two-sided printing.
(See pages 1-18 and 5-2.)
Open the Configuration tab in the printer driver
setting and check the check box of Duplex
Module. (See NOTE on page 2-5.)
When using 11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 13, A3 or
B4 paper, the bypass tray extension must be
extended.
Set paper within the allowable range.
Set the paper guides properly to the paper size.
When using non-standard size paper or special
paper, be sure to set the paper size and type.
(See pages 1-17 to 1-19.)
Set paper within the allowable range.
Set the paper guides properly to the paper size.
Problem
The printer will not
print duplex prints.
Printed images
onto paper from
the bypass tray are
skewed.
A paper misfeed
occurs in the
bypass tray.
Check
Message indicating the paper type cannot
be used for two-sided printing displayed?
Message indicating the paper size cannot
be used for two-sided printing displayed?
Two-sided printing cannot be set in printing
on the printer driver?
Bypass tray extension not extended?
Does the number of sheets exceed the
limit?
Paper guides properly set?
Paper size and type set properly?
Does the number of sheets exceed the
limit?
Paper guides properly set?
5-6
MAIL-BIN STACKER
The mail-bin stacker has 7 mail bins which can each be designated to receive printed output from a user or a group of
users .
Output paper in the copy mode and the fax mode will be delivered to the top tray of the stacker separated from printed
output. (Printed output can also be delivered to the top tray.)
Part names
Front cover
Open for misfeed removal.
Top cover
Open for misfeed removal.
Top tray
Output paper from the printer,
copier, and facsimile features
can be delivered here.
Mail bins
Each bin can be designated
to receive printed output for
assigned users. These bins
cannot be used for copier or
facsimile output.
NOTES
●
Do not put pressure on the mail-bin stacker, particularly on the top tray and mail bins.
●
Do not place anything on the top cover. Doing so will interfere with the machine’s paper handling during duplex
printing.
●
The top tray and each mail bin are extendable. To print onto large paper (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13",
A3 or B4), extend the tray.
●
The mail-bin stacker requires the installation of other peripheral devices in order to be functional and cannot be
installed together with some other devices. The table on page 6-4 shows the configurations which are compatible.
Specifications
Name Mail-bin stacker
Number of trays 8 (Top tray and seven mail bins)
Paper output Print face down
Tray type Top tray: normal tray, Mail bins: mail bin tray
Tray capacity Top tray: 250 sheets (8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size, 20 lbs. or 80 g/m
2
)
Mail bins: 100 sheets each (8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size, 20 lbs. or 80 g/m
2
)
Paper sizes Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit
Mail bins: 11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 13, 8-1/2 x 11, 8-1/2 x 11R, 7-1/4 x 10-1/2,
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R
Paper weight Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit
Mail bins: 15 to 34 lbs. or 60 to 105 g/m
2
Paper types Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit
Mail bins: plain paper only
Tray full detection Provided in both the top tray and the mail bins
Power supply Requires the installation of an optional power supply unit (See page 1-8.)
Dimensions 18-5/16" (W) x 20-7/8" (D) x 20" (H) (465 mm (W) x 530 mm (D) x 508 mm (H))
Weight Approx. 41.9 lbs. (19 kg)
Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.
5-7
5
MAIL-BIN STACKER
Specifying mail bins to receive printed output
Printed output can be specified in the printer driver to be delivered to an assigned mail bin or to the top tray. Assigning
mail bins to individual users or groups of users reduces the mixing of print jobs simplifying the retrieval of printed
output. When separation of output is not required, the top tray can be selected for delivery.
■■
■■
■ Using the mail-bin stacker
The illustration below shows the screen for a PCL printer
driver in the Windows 98 environment as an example.
Setting in the printer driver
Select “Properties” in the printer driver setting screen and proceed as below.
■■
■■
■ Specifying a mail bin
Open the “Paper” tab and select a mail bin for delivery
under “Output”.
NOTES
●
The settings screens to the right will appear only if
the devices have been set properly in the printer
driver configuration (see NOTE on page 2-5).
●
The combination of paper selection and other
functions may not be compatible. For instance, if
heavy paper, envelopes, label stock, etc. are
selected, it will not be possible to select duplex,
offset tray, saddle stitch, etc. For details, see printer
driver help.
1
Assign users to mail bins.
It is recommended that the network administrator
assign bins by individual or by department. For
example, the Product Planning department can be
assigned to mail bin 1 and the Engineering
department assigned to mail bin 2 etc.
2
Select the mail bin for receiving prints in
the printer driver.
For the setting in the printer driver, see the
description below.
Top tray
Mail bin 1 ..... Product Planning department
Mail bin 2 ..... Engineering department
Mail bin 3
Mail bin 4
Mail bin 5
Mail bin 6
Mail bin 7 ..... Business department
5-8
Misfeed in the mail-bin stacker
If a misfeed has occurred in the mail-bin stacker during printing, remove the misfed paper following the procedure
below.
6
Remove the misfed paper.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
7
Close the paper guide.
Close the paper guide
securely.
8
Close the front cover.
1
Open the top cover.
Top cover
Move the release lever in
the direction of the arrow
in the illustration to open
the top cover.
2
Remove the misfed paper.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
After removing the paper,
press down on the top
cover to close it.
3
If the misfed paper is not found in step 2,
open the front cover.
4
Turn the roller rotating knob in the direction
of the arrow to remove the misfed paper.
5
Open the paper guide.
Unlatch the paper guide
and open it in the direction
of the arrow.
MAIL-BIN STACKER
5-9
5
FINISHER
The finisher can deliver collated sets either stapled or unstapled. Unstapled sets can be offset stacked from the
previous set for easy separation of the sets.
Part names
NOTES
●
Do not put pressure on the finisher (particularly each tray).
●
Do not place anything on the top cover. Doing so will interfere with the machine’s paper handling during duplex
printing.
●
The tray moves up and down during operation. Be careful not to impede its movement.
●
The finisher requires the installation of other peripheral devices in order to be functional and cannot be installed
together with some other devices. The table on page 6-4 shows the configurations which are compatible.
Supplies
AR-SC1 staple cartridges must be used for this finisher. The cartridge
package contains three cartridges approx. 3000 staples each.
Latch
Release the latch to open the
finisher for misfeed removal.
Top cover
Open for misfeed
removal.
Staple box
Pull the box out to
replace the staple
cartridge or to
remove jammed
staples.
Top tray
Printer, copier and fax
output can be delivered
here.
To print onto large
paper (11" x 17",
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x
13", A3 or B4), extend
the tray.
Offset tray
Stapled sets or sets to be
offset will be delivered here.
Specifications
Name Finisher
Number of trays 2
Paper output Print face down
Tray type Top tray: normal tray, Lower tray: offset tray
Tray capacity Top tray: 500 sheets (8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size, 20 lbs. or 80 g/m
2
)
Lower tray: 750 sheets (8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size, 20 lbs. or 80 g/m
2
)
Paper sizes Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit
Lower tray: Max. 8-1/2" x 11" or A4, Min. B5
Paper weight Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit
Lower tray: 16 to 34 lbs. or 60 to 128 g/m
2
Paper types Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit
Lower tray: plain paper only
Tray full detection Provided in both the top tray and the lower tray
Offset function Provided for the lower tray only. The offset amount is approx. 1 inch (25 mm)
Paper sizes for stapling 8-1/2" x 11", A4, and B5
Stapling capacity 30 sheets* (8-1/2" x 11" or A4 or smaller 20 lbs. or 80 g/m
2
)
*Up two sheets of cover stock (34 lbs. or 128 g/m
2
) can be included.
Staples Single staple can be placed in the top left or lower left corners or two staples can
be centered on the left side
Power supply Requires the installation of an optional power supply unit (See page 1-8.)
Dimensions 18-1/8" (W) x 20-7/8" (D) x 20" (H) (460 mm (W) x 530 mm (D) x 508 mm (H))
Weight Approx. 46.3 lbs. (21 kg)
Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.
5-10
Finisher functions
■■
■■
■ Sort mode
Sorted sets will be delivered.
PrintoutsOriginal
■■
■■
■ Group mode
Groups of prints or copies of the same page will be
delivered.
PrintoutsOriginal
Sets will move from side to side so that each set or
group will be offset from the previous set or group
for easy separation.
Offset will function for non-stapled printer or copier
output, Non-offset can only be selected for copier
output.
Stapled sets will not be offset.
■■
■■
■ Staple sort mode
Collated sets will be stapled and delivered to the offset tray. The stapling positions, orientation, paper size for
stapling, and stapling capacity are shown below.
Stapling positions
Top left corner of
printouts
Center left two
positions of printouts
Lower left corner
of printouts
Portrait orientation
Landscape orientation
Available paper sizes: 8-1/2"
x 11", A4 and B5
Stapling capacity: Up to 30
sheets for any available sizes
Same as above
Same as above
Stapling cannot be made.
FINISHER
■■
■■
■ Offset mode
Offset mode Non-offset mode
5-11
5
Using the finisher functions
■■
■■
■ Selecting the stapling function from a printer driver.
■■
■■
■ Using the finisher functions in the copy mode
When the [OUTPUT] key on the copy mode basic screen is touched, a screen for selecting the sort/group/staple
sort functions and selecting an exit tray will appear. As a selection is made, the touch key for the selection will be
highlighted.
Select “Properties” on the printer driver setting screen
and open the “Main” tab. Select “Left”, “Right” or “Top
“ under “Binding Edge” and then select “1 Staple” or
“2 Staples” under “Staple”.
NOTES
●
The settings screens to the right will appear only
if the devices have been set properly in the
printer driver configuration (see NOTE on page
2-5).
●
The combination of paper selection and other
functions may not be compatible. For instance,
if heavy paper, envelopes, label stock, etc. are
selected, it will not be possible to select duplex,
offset tray, saddle stitch, etc. For details, see
printer driver help.
[GROUP] key (See page 5-10.)
When Group is selected, all copies of the same
original will be grouped.
[STAPLE SORT] key (See page 5-10.)
When Staple Sort is selected, sorted sets will be
stapled and delivered to the offset tray. (They will
not be not offset stacked.)
[SORT] key (See page 5-10.)
When Sort is selected, sets of copies will be
sequentially delivered.
Icon display
An icon representing a selected function (sort, staple
sort or group) is displayed.
[OFFSET] key (See page 5-9.)
If Offset is checked, offset is enabled. If not checked,
offset will not function. If staple sort is selected, the
check mark of offset will be automatically canceled.
[OFFSET TRAY] key (See page 5-9.)
When the offset tray is selected, copies will be
delivered to the offset tray. When staple sort is
selected, the offset tray will be automatically
selected.
[TOP TRAY] key
When top tray is selected, copies will be delivered
to the top tray.
[OK] key
Press to close the output screen and to return to the
basic screen.
FINISHER
OK
STAPLE
SORT
OUTPUT
GROUP
SORT
OFFSET
TRAY
TOP TRAY
OFFSET
The illustration below shows the screen for a PCL printer
driver in the Windows 98 environment as an example.
5-12
Staple cartridge replacement
When the staple cartridge becomes empty, the message “Add staples.” will appear in the message display of the
operation panel.
Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge.
1
Open the front cover.
2
Turn the staple unit to face up.
3
Pull the release lever for the staple box and
remove the box.
4
Remove the empty staple cartridge from the
staple box.
5
Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple
box aligning the arrow of the staple
cartridge with that of the staple box.
NOTES
●
Do not remove the tape from the cartridge before
inserting the staple cartridge into the box.
●
When reinstalling the staple box, push it in until
it clicks into place.
6
Remove the tape from the staple cartridge
by pulling it straight.
7
Reinstall the staple box.
Push the staple box in
until it clicks into place.
8
While pushing the staple unit release lever
to the left, rotate the staple unit to face
down.
9
Close the front cover.
NOTE
Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode
to ensure that stapling is performed properly.
FINISHER
5-13
5
■■
■■
■ Checking the staple unit
If the message “CHECK THE STAPLER UNIT” or “CHECK STAPLER POSITION OR STAPLER JAM” appears, follow
the procedure below.
FINISHER
7
Raise the lever at the end of the staple box.
Remove the top staple if
it is bent. If bent staples
remain, a staple jam will
occur again.
8
Return the lever to its original position.
9
Reinstall the staple box.
Push the staple box in
until it clicks into place.
10
While pushing the staple unit release lever
to the left, rotate the staple unit to face
down.
11
Close the front cover.
NOTE
Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode
to ensure that stapling is performed properly.
1
Open the finisher compiler.
Release the latch to open
the finisher compiler.
2
Remove the misfed paper from the stapler
compiler.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
3
Close the finisher compiler.
4
Open the finisher front cover.
5
Turn the staple unit to face up.
6
Pull the release lever for the staple box and
remove the box.
5-14
Misfeed in the finisher
When a misfeed occurs in the finisher, remove the misfed paper following the procedure below.
1
Remove the misfed paper from the output
area.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
2
Open the finisher top cover.
Top cover
Move the tab in the
direction of the arrow as
shown in the illustration to
open the top cover.
3
Remove the misfed paper.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
After removing the paper,
press down on the top
cover to close it.
4
Open the finisher compiler.
Release the latch to open
the finisher compiler.
5
Raise the paper guide and remove the
misfed paper.
Paper
guide
Do not remove paper from
the stapler compiler.
6
Close the finisher compiler.
FINISHER
5-15
5
Troubleshooting finisher problems
Check the list below before calling for service.
FINISHER
Problem
Stapling position is
not correct.
The finisher does
not operate.
Stapling cannot be
performed.
Stapled sets are not
stacked correctly or
some sheets in a set
are not stapled.
Check
Stapling position not set correctly?
Are any finisher covers open?
Message indicating need to remove paper
from the stapler compiler displayed?
Is a “CHECK THE STAPLER UNIT” or
“CHECK STAPLER POSITION OR
STAPLER JAM” message displayed?
Is a message “ADD STAPLES”
displayed?
Different size paper included?
Paper heavily curled?
Solution or cause
Check the stapling position setting. (See page
5-16.)
Close all covers.
Open the finisher as
described in step 4 on page
5-14 and remove all paper
from the stapler compiler.
Check the staple unit. (See page 5-13.)
Replace the staple cartridge. (See page 5-12.)
Stapling cannot be performed onto different size
paper.
Paper may be curled heavily depending on the paper
type and quality. Remove paper from the paper tray
or the bypass tray, turn it upside down, and load it
again.
5-16
Stapling position quick reference guide for duplex output
The orientation of the copy paper, original, scanned original data, and binding position selection are all interrelated. The
table below shows these relationships.
NOTES
●
Stapling can only be done when the offset tray has been selected.
●
If mixed paper sizes are selected for stapling jobs, stapling will be automatically canceled.
NOTE
Transparency film, labels , envelopes and postcards cannot be stapled.
Orientation of original or original data
Output result
Page 1 Page 2
Page 1 & Page 2
Duplexed
Portrait orientation printing
Left binding Top binding Right binding Left binding Top binding Right binding
One-position stapling Two-position stapling
One-position stapling Two-position stapling
One-position stapling
Landscape orientation printing
Two-position staplingOne-position stapling
One-position stapling
One-position stapling
Two-position
stapling with left
binding cannot be
made.
Two-position
stapling with right
binding cannot be
made.
Two-position
stapling with top
binding cannot be
made.
FINISHER
5-17
5
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
The saddle stitch finisher can automatically place two staples for centerline binding of prints or copies and fold them
along the centerline.
An optional hole punching unit is available for installation into the finisher.
Part names
NOTES
● Do not press on the saddle stitch finisher (particularly the offset tray).
● Be careful about the offset tray during printing because the tray moves up and down.
● The saddle stitch finisher requires the installation of other peripheral devices in order to be functional and
cannot be installed together with some other devices. The table on page 6-4 shows the configurations which are
compatible.
Offset tray
Output which is stapled or offset
will be delivered to this tray.
Saddle stitch tray
Saddle stitched output is
delivered here.
Top cover
Open for misfeed removal.
Front cover
Open the front cover and pull out this
section for staple cartridge replacement
or to remove jammed staples.
Stapler section
Open the front cover and pull
out this section to replace the
staple cartridge or to remove
jammed staples.
Stapler compiler
Paper to be stapled is stacked
temporarily.
(Continued on next page)
Specifications
Name Saddle stitch finisher
Number of trays 2
Paper output Print face down
Tray system Upper tray: offset tray, Lower tray: saddle stitch tray
Tray capacity Upper tray:
Non-stapling: Max. 1,000 sheets for 8-1/2 x 11 or A4 or smaller sizes (20 lbs. or
80 g/m
2
), max. 500 sheets for 8-1/2 x 13 or B4 or larger sizes (20 lbs. or 80 g/m
2
)
Stapling: Max. 30 stapled sets and max. 1,000 sheets for 8-1/2 x 11 or A4 or
smaller sizes (20 lbs. or 80 g/m
2
), max. 30 stapled sets and max. 500 sheets
for 8-1/2 x 13 or B4 or larger sizes (20 lbs. or 80 g/m
2
)
Lower tray: Stapled print capacity is (6 - 10) sheets x 10 sets or (1 - 5) sheets x
20 sets.
Paper size Upper tray: 11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 13, 8-1/2 x 11, 8-1/2 x 11R, 7-1/4 x 10-1/
2, 5-1/2 x 8-1/2R, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R
Lower tray: max. 11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 11R, A3, B4, A4R
Paper weight Upper tray: 16 to 54 lbs. or 60 to 205 g/m
2
Lower tray: 17 to 34 lbs. or 64 to 80 g/m
2
Paper types Upper tray: plain paper, thick paper
Lower tray: plain paper only
Tray full detection Provided in both trays
Offset function Upper tray only
Paper sizes for stapling Upper tray:11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, A3,
B4, A4, A4R, B5, and B5R
Lower tray:11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, A3, B4, and A4R
5-18
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
Saddle stitch finisher functions
■ Sort mode
Sorted sets will be delivered.
PrintoutsOriginal
■ Group mode
Groups of copies of the same page will be delivered.
PrintoutsOriginal
Sets will move from side to side so that each set or
group will be offset from the previous set or group
for easy separation.
Offset will function for non-stapled printer or copier
output, Non-offset can only be selected for copier
output.
Stapled sets will not be offset.
■ Offset mode
Offset mode Non-offset mode
Supplies
AR-SC2 staple cartridges must be used for this finisher. The cartridge package
contains three cartridges approx. 5000 staples each.
Stapling capacity 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 or smaller size: 50 sheets*(20 lbs. or 80 g/m
2
)
8-1/2" x 14" or B4 or larger size: 25 sheets*(20 lbs. or 80 g/m
2
)
*Up to two sheets of 34 lbs. or 128 g/m
2
paper can be included as covers.
Staples Upper tray: Single staple can be placed in the top left or lower left corners or two
staples can be centered on the left side.
Lower tray: 4-47/64" (120 mm) pitch from the center of paper
Power supply Requires the installation of an optional power supply unit (See page 1-8.)
Dimensions 28-9/32" (W) x 23-3/4" (D) x 39-3/8" (H) (718 mm (W) x 603 mm (D) x 1000 mm
(H))
Weight Approx. 86 lbs. (39 kg)
Name Punch module
Paper sizes for hole 3 holes: 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11", A3, B4
punching 2 holes: 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"R
Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.
5-19
5
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
■ Staple sort mode
Collated sets of prints or copies will be stapled and delivered to the offset tray. When saddle stitching is selected,
the prints or copies will be stapled at the center and delivered to the saddle stitch tray. The stapling positions,
orientation, paper size for stapling, and stapling capacity are shown below.
Stapling positions
Top left corner of
printouts
Center left two
positions of
printouts
Lower left corner
of printouts
Portrait orientation
Landscape orientation
Available paper sizes: 8-1/2"
x 11", A4 and B5
Stapling capacity: Up to 50
sheets for any sizes
Same as above
Same as above
Available paper sizes: 11" x 17",
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2"
x 11" R, A3, B4, A4R, and B5R
Stapling capacity: Up to 50
sheets for 8-1/2" x 11"R, A4R
and B5R, and up to 25 sheets
for other sizes
Same as above
Same as above
Saddle stitch on
centerfold line.
Paper in the portrait direction
cannot be saddle stitched.
Available paper sizes: 11" x
17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, A3, B4,
and A4R
Stapling capacity: Up to 10
sheets for any sizes
■ Hole punching (only if a punch module is
installed)
If the saddle stitch finisher is equipped with a hole
punch module, printed paper can be hole punched
and delivered to the offset tray. Saddle stitching and
hole punching cannot be selected at the same time.
The automatic image rotation will not function when
the hole punching function is used.
Two or three holes can be punched depending on
the paper size. (See paper sizes for hole punching
on page 5-18.)
<Example>
{Original 1} {Punch positions}
{Original 2} {Punch positions}
■ Saddle stitch function
The saddle stitch finisher can automatically place two staples for centerline binding of prints or copies and fold
them along the centerline.
<Example>
5-20
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
Using the saddle stitch finisher
■ Selecting staple or saddle stitch from the printer driver.
OUTPUT
OFFSET
OK
SADDLE
STITCH
PUNCH
OFFSET
TRAY
CENTER
TRAY
STAPLE
SORT
SORT
GROUP
The illustration below shows the screen for a PCL printer
driver in the Windows 98 environment as an example.
Select “Properties” on the printer driver setting
screen and open the “Main” tab shown in the
illustration to the right. For normal edge or corner
stapling, select “Left”, “Right” or “Top” under Binding
Edge and “1 Staple” or “2 Staples” under “Staple”.
For saddle stitch selection, check the radio button
of “Pamphlet Style” under the Document Style
heading, then select “Tiled Pamphlet” or “2-Up
pamphlet”. Then select “2 Staples” in the “Staple”
drop down under the “Finishing” heading.
■ Selecting hole punching
Open the “Main” tab and check “Punch” under the
“Finishing” heading.
NOTES
●The settings screens above will appear only if the devices have been set properly in the printer driver configuration
(see NOTE on page 2-5).
● The combination of paper selection and other functions may not be compatible. For instance, if heavy paper,
envelopes, label stock, etc. are selected, it will not be possible to select duplex, offset tray, saddle stitch, etc. For
details, see printer driver help.
■ Using the finisher functions in the copy mode
When [OUTPUT] is selected on the copy mode basic screen, a screen for making selections for sort, group,
staple, punch and exit tray will appear.
[GROUP] key (See page 5-18.)
When Group is selected, all copies of the same
original will be grouped.
[STAPLE SORT] key (See page 5-19.)
When Staple Sort is selected, sorted sets will be
stapled and delivered to the offset tray. (They will
not be not offset stacked.)
[SORT] key (See page 5-18.)
When Sort is selected, sets of copies will be
sequentially delivered.
Icon display
An icon representing a selected function (sort, staple
sort or group) is displayed.
[OFFSET TRAY] key (See page 5-17.)
If Offset is checked, the offset will be enabled. If not
checked, the offset will not function. If the staple sort
is selected, the check mark of offset will be
automatically canceled.
[CENTER TRAY] key
If the center tray is selected, output paper will be
delivered to the exit tray located above the main unit.
5-21
5
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
[OK] key
Press to close the [OUTPUT] screen and to return
to the basic screen.
[OFFSET] key (See page 5-18.)
When the offset tray is selected, copies will be
delivered to the offset tray. When staple sort is
selected, the offset tray will be automatically
selected.
[SADDLE STITCH] key (See page 5-19.)
When saddle stitching is selected, the copies will be
stapled at the center and delivered to the saddle stitch
tray.
[PUNCH] key (See page 5-19.)
If the saddle stitch finisher is equipped with a hole
punch module, printed paper can be hole punched
and delivered to the offset tray.
Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal
When the staple cartridge becomes empty or staples become jammed, a message will appear in the message display
of the operation panel.
Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge or remove jammed staples.
■ Staple cartridge replacement
1
Open the front cover.
2
Pull out the stapler section.
3
Turn roller rotating knob A in the direction
of the arrow to move the staple unit to the
front.
Roller rotating knob A
Staple unit
Turn the roller rotating
knob until the triangle
mark is aligned with the
index.
4
Remove the empty staple box.
5
Remove the empty staple cartridge.
Press the lock button to
unlock the staple box
cover and remove the
staple cartridge.
NOTE
If staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be
removed.
6
Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple
box.
After inserting the staple
cartridge, press down on
the staple box cover to
lock the cartridge in place.
NOTES
●
Do not remove the tape from the cartridge before
inserting the staple cartridge into the box.
●
When reinstalling the staple box, push it in until it
clicks into place.
7
Remove the tape from the staple cartridge
by pulling it straight.
5-22
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
8
Insert the staple box.
Push the staple box in
until it clicks into place.
9
Push the stapler section back into the
finisher.
■■
■■
■ Staple jam removal
1
Unlatch the saddle stitch finisher and slide
it away from the printer.
2
Open the front cover.
3
Turn roller rotating knob C as shown in the
illustration until the blue indication is seen.
4
Remove the paper from the stapler
compiler.
5
If saddle stitch was selected, open the
saddle stitch section cover.
6
Remove the misfed paper.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
7
Close the saddle stitch section cover.
8
Open the front cover and pull out the
stapler unit.
Blue
Roller rotating
knob C
10
Close the front cover.
NOTE
Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to
ensure that stapling is performed properly.
5-23
5
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
9
Turn roller rotating knob A in the direction
of the arrow to move the staple unit to the
front.
Turn the roller rotating
knob until the triangle
mark is aligned with the
index.
10
Remove the staple box.
11
Raise the lever at the end of the staple box.
Remove the top staple if
it is bent. If bent staples
remain, a staple jam will
occur again.
12
Return the lever to its original position.
13
Reinstall the staple box.
Push the staple box in
until it clicks into place.
14
Push the stapler section back into the
finisher.
15
Close the front cover.
16
Push the saddle stitch finisher back against
the printer.
NOTE
Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to
ensure that stapling is performed properly.
■ Disposal of hole punch scrap
3
Return the punch scrap collecting
container to its original position.
4
Push the saddle stitch finisher back against
the printer.
Roller rotating knob A
Staple unit
1
Unlatch the saddle stitch finisher and slide
it away from the printer.
2
Pull out the punch scrap collecting
container and empty it.
5-24
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
Misfeed in the saddle stitch finisher
When a misfeed occurs in the saddle stitch finisher, remove the misfed paper following the procedure below.
1
Unlatch the saddle stitch finisher and slide
it away from the printer.
2
Remove the misfed paper from the main
unit.
After removing the misfed
paper, open and close
the duplex module to
reset the jam indicator.
(step 1 or 5 on page 4-4)
3
If misfed paper is not found in step 1, open
the top cover.
4
While pulling and turning roller rotating
knob B, remove the misfed paper.
If the misfed paper is
released by turning roller
rotating knob B, remove
it taking care not to tear
the paper.
5
Close the top cover.
6
If saddle stitch was selected, open the front
cover.
7
Remove the misfed paper from the stapler
compiler.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
8
Open the saddle stitch section cover.
9
Remove the misfed paper.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
Roller rotating
knob B
5-25
5
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
10
Turn roller rotating knob in the direction of
the arrow.
11
Remove any misted paper from the saddle
stitch tray.
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
12
Close the saddle stitch section cover.
13
Close the front cover.
14
Push the saddle stitch finisher back against
the printer.
5-26
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
Troubleshooting (concerning the saddle stitch finisher)
Check the list below before calling for service.
Problem
Stapling position
is not correct
(including saddle
stitch).
The saddle stitch
finisher does not
operate.
Stapling cannot
be performed
(including saddle
stitch).
Stapled sets are
not stacked
correctly or some
sheets in a set
are not stapled.
Cannot be
punched.*
Check
Solution or cause
Check the stapling position setting. (See pages
5-27 and 5-28.)
Close all covers. (See page 5-17.)
Remove all remaining paper from the stapler
compiler referring to step 4 on page 5-22.
Remove jammed staples. (See page 5-22.)
Replace the staple cartridge. (See page 5-21.)
Check that a staple cartridge has been installed.
(See page 5-22.)
Stapling cannot be performed onto different size
paper.
Paper may be curled heavily depending on the
paper type and quality. Remove paper from the
paper tray or the bypass tray, turn it upside down,
and load it again.
Dispose of punch scraps. (See page 5-23.)
Stapling position not set properly?
Are any saddle stitch finisher covers
open?
Message indicating need to remove
paper from the stapler compiler
displayed?
Message requesting check for the staple
unit displayed?
Message requesting adding staples
displayed?
Different size paper included?
Paper heavily curled?
Message requesting check for punch
module displayed?
* When a hole punch module is installed
5-27
5
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
Stapling position quick reference guide for duplex output
The orientation of the copy paper, original, scanned original data, and binding position selection are all interrelated.
The table below shows these relationships.
Orientation of original or original data
Output result
Page 1 Page 2
Page 1 & Page 2
Duplexed
One-position stapling Two-position stapling
One-position stapling Two-position stapling
One-position stapling Two-position stapling
Two-position staplingOne-position stapling
One-position stapling
One-position stapling
Left binding with two-position
stapling cannot be made.
Right binding with two-
position stapling cannot be
made.
Top binding with two-position
stapling cannot be made.
Two-position stapling along
the shorter edge cannot be
made.
Two-position stapling along
the shorter edge cannot be
made.
Two-position stapling along
the shorter edge cannot be
made.
Right binding
Right binding
Top binding
Top binding
Left binding
Left binding
Portrait orientation printing
Landscape orientation printing
5-28
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
Relation between print image and saddle stitch
The orientation of the copy paper, original, scanned original data, and binding position selection are all interrelated.
The table below shows these relationships.
Same as above
Orientation of original or original data
Output result
Page 1
Page 3
Page 2
Page 4
Page 1 & Page 2
Duplexed
Page 3 & Page 4
Duplexed
Right bindingLeft binding
Portrait orientation printing
Landscape orientation printing
Page 1
Page 3
Page 2
Page 4
Page 1 & Page 2
Duplexed
Page 3 & Page 4
Duplexed
NOTES
●
Transparency film, labels , envelopes and postcards cannot be stapled.
●
If mixed paper sizes are selected for stapling jobs, stapling will be automatically canceled.
6-1
CHAPTER 6
APPENDIX
Page
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
● List of principal printer driver functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
LIST OF COMBINATION OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
NOTICE PAGE PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
PRINT AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-2
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
Type Desktop (can be upgraded to console type if an optional stand is installed.)
Print system Electrophotographic system
Exposure system Semiconductor laser diode system
Developer system Magnetic brush development
Paper feed system Paper trays
Fusing system Heat roller
CPU 64 bit RISC, 200 MHz
Memory capacity (standard) 32 MB/(64 MB for models with a multi-function controller board)
DIMM slots for additional memory One (64 MB to 256 MB memory can be mounted.)
Page description language PCL6, PCL5e, PS3 emulation*
Resident font Outline font: 46 (including Line printer font)
PostScript compatible font: 136*
*An optional PS3 expansion kit is needed.
Parallel interface IEEE-1284 compatible parallel interface (P1284B connector)
Network interface 10 Base T/100 Base TX (To extend this product to include network features,
an optional Print Server Card is needed.)
Warm up time Approx. 80 seconds
Continuous print speed 35 ppm type: 35 pages/min., 45 ppm type: 45 pages/min.
(8-1/2" x 11" or A4 paper)
Resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Print color Black
Printing orientation Portrait/landscape
Power supply USA: AC120V, 60Hz, 12A
Other countries: Local voltage ± 10% (For power supply requirements, see
the name plate of the main unit.)
Power consumption Max. 1,450 W
Operating environments Temperature: 59°F to 86°F (15°C to 30°C),
Humidity: 20% to 80%
16-55/64"
(428 mm)
25-3/4"
(654 mm)
22-21/64"
(567 mm)
23-23/64"
(593 mm)
Acoustic Noise Emission (measurement according to ISO7779)
Printing mode
6.7 B
53 dB(A)
Standby mode
4.8 B
33 dB(A)
Sound power level L
wA
Bystander positions
Sound pressure
level L
pA
Emission Concentration (measurement according to RAL UZ62)
0.02 mg/m
3
or less
0.075 mg/m
3
or less
0.07 mg/m
3
or less
Ozone
Dust
Styrene
Weight: Approx. 111lbs. (50kg) (including a multi purpose drawer)
Dimensions:
6-3
6
List of principal printer driver functions
Output tray selection
Mail bin
Staple
Offset
Punch
Resident font
Download font
Watermark*
7
Overlay
Job retention*
1
Account control
Custom settings
Automatic configuration
*
2
Job end notification
Paper size
Custom paper size
Source selection
Different first page
Transparency inserts
Resolution
Halftone
Graphic mode
Smoothing
Toner save
Photo enhancement
Negative image
Mirror image
Zoom
Fit to page
PCL5e/PCL6
1 - 999
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Left/top/right
2/4/6/8
Fixed
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
46 fonts
Bitmap TrueType, Graphic
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 size
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
600/300 dpi
N/A
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Yes*
8
N/A
N/A
N/A
Ye s
PS
1 - 999
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Left/top/right
2/4/6/8
Fixed
Ye s
136 fonts
Bitmap Type1 TrueType
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 size
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
600 dpi
Ye s
N/A
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Horizontal/vertical
N/A
Ye s
PPD (Windows)
1 - 999
Ye s
Ye s
N/A
Long/short
2/4*
3
*
4
Fixed
Yes (always)
136 fonts*
6
Bitmap Type1 TrueType
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
3 sizes*
3
*
5
Ye s
N/A
N/A
600 dpi
Ye s
N/A
Ye s
Ye s
N/A
Ye s
Horizontal
Ye s
N/A
PPD (Macintosh)
1 - 999
Ye s
Ye s
N/A
Long/short
2/4/6/9/16
Selectable
Ye s
35 fonts
N/A
Ye s
N/A
Ye s
Ye s
N/A
Ye s
N/A
Ye s
N/A
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
600 dpi
N/A
N/A
Ye s
Ye s
N/A
Ye s
Horizontal/vertical
Ye s
N/A
*
1
. . . In the models without a hard disk drive, an optional hard disk drive must be installed .
*
2
. . . Functions when peripheral devices are installed.
*
3
. . . Not supported in the Windows NT 4.0 environment.
*
4
. . . 2/4/6/9/16 is supported in the Windows 2000 environment.
*
5
. . . Only one size is supported in the Windows 2000 environment.
*
6
. . . Only 35 fonts are supported in the Windows NT 4.0 environment.
*
7
. . . This function is limited for PPD.
*
8
. . . PCL6 only
Driver selections
Copies
Orientation
Duplex print
Saddle stitch
Binding edge
N-up
N-up direction
N-up border line
When an optional PS3 expansion kit is installed
General Paper Paper output FontGraphic Others
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
6-4
LIST OF COMBINATION OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES
The table below shows the possible system configurations. Some devices require the installation of others (
B
) to be
functional and some cannot be installed together (
A
).
Related to scanner feature
Related to paper feed unit
B/W scanner module/DSPF
Scanner rack
Scanner rack
Multi purpose drawer
Stand/3 x 500 sheet
paper drawer
Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet
paper drawer
Saddle stitch finisher
Finisher
Mail-bin stacker
Exit tray
Punch unit
PS3 expansion kit
Facsimile expansion kit
Print server card
Hard disk drive
Power supply unit
Duplex module/bypass tray*
2
Duplex module
*
2
Multi purpose drawer
Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer
Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet
Duplex module/bypass tray
Duplex module
Upper exit tray extension
Multi-function controller
board
Fax memory (8 MB)
B/W scanner module/DSPF
Saddle stitch finisher
Finisher
Mail-bin stacker
Exit tray
Punch unit
PS3 expansion kit
Facsimile expansion kit
Print server card
Hard disk drive
Power supply unit
Upper exit tray extension
Multi-function controller board
Fax memory (8 MB)
Network scanner
expansion kit
Network scanner expansion kit
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
Output units
Related to extension of
functions and others
= ( ) and ( ) must be installed together.
= ( ) requires installation of one of the ( ) units.
= Cannot be installed together.
*
2
If the multi purpose drawer is installed, the power supply unit is not needed.
A
B
A
A
B
B
6-5
6
NOTICE PAGE PRINTING
A notice page will be printed when the current print job cannot be done due to a system limitation and an explanation
of the limitation is too lengthy to be shown in the message display. A notice page will describe the limitation and
other possibilities to run the job.
A notice page will be printed in the following cases.
●
When sufficient memory is not available to store the print data. This may happen even if the amount of data for
the job is not large when the memory becomes full with data of other jobs.
●
When a print job is sent to the printer and the number of print hold jobs has reached the maximum of 100 jobs.
●
When different paper sizes have been selected for printing within a print job and one or more of the sizes cannot
be delivered to the selected exit tray or to the stapler compiler. In these cases printed paper will be delivered
partly to the specified destination (tray or compiler) and partly to another exit tray.
●
When a function has been selected for printing but has been disabled by a key operator program. (Duplex module
is disabled, stapler is disabled, punch is disabled, specified exit tray is disabled, etc.)
●
An invalid account number is entered when the auditing mode has been set.
Disabling of notice page printing
Notice page printing can be disabled using a key operator program. See “Disable notice page printing” on page 11 of
the Key Operator’s Guide.
6-6
PRINT AREA
The print area of this product is shown below.
C
C
E
E
B
D
A
Paper size
Printable area
If a printer driver for Windows or Macintosh is used for
printing, the printable area will be smaller. The actual
printable area depends on the printer driver to be used.
Dimension in mm
Paper size A B C D E
A3 297 420 4 289 4
B4 257 364 4 242 4
A4 210 297 4 202 4
B5 182 257 4 168 4
A5 148 210 4 140 4
Japanese postcard 100 148 4 92 4
Ledger 279 432 4 271 4
Legal 216 356 4 208 4
Foolscap 216 330 4 208 4
Letter 216 279 4 208 4
Executive 184 267 4 183 4
Invoice 140 216 4 132 4
Com-10 (envelope) 105 241 4 97 4
C5 (envelope) 162 229 4 154 4
Monarch (envelope) 98 191 4 90 4
DL (envelope) 110 220 4 102 4
ISO B5 (envelope) 176 250 4 168 4
6 ISO 6 ASCII
1 Roman-8
2 ISO 8859-1 Latin 1
4 PC-8 Danish/Norwegian
3 PC-8
5 PC-850
7 Legal
8
ISO 21 German
9
ISO 17 Spanish
11 ISO 15 Italian
12 ISO 60 Norwegian v1
13 ISO 4
United Kingdom
14 ISO 11
Swedish :
15 PC1004 (OS/2)
16 DeskTop
17 PS Text
18 Microsoft Publishing
19 Math-8
20 PS Math
10
ISO 69 French
symbol setNo.
25 PC-852
26 PC-775
symbol setNo.
33 Windows 3.0 Latin 1
28 MC Text
29 Windows 3.1 Latin 1
31 Windows 3.1 Latin 5
30 Windows 3.1 Latin 2
32 Windows Baltic (not 3.1)
34 Symbol
35 Wingdings
27 PC Turkish
21 Pi Font
22 ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
23 ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
24 ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
PCL symbol set
●
These symbol sets are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
PRINT IN CHINA
Operation manual
for printer operation and general information
2001 KS1
TINSE2057FCZZ
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-2135.
SHARP CORPORATION
P350,P450,3500,3501
P3551,4500,4501,4551
LASER PRINTER
Operation Manual
(Read this document before installing the product.)
Model
DM-3551/DM-4551
Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to gain
the maximum benefit from the product.
Before installing this product, be sure to read the installation
requirements and cautions sections of the "Operation manual for
printer operation and general information".
Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference
including this manual, the "Operation manual for printer
operation and general information" and operation manuals for
any optional equipment which has been installed.
WARNING:
FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the operation
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct
the interference at his own expense.
1
PRODUCT CONFIGURATION
This manual applies to the following models.
(As of April 2004)
Model name Product configuration
DM-3551 35 page/minute network printer including a multi-function controller board*
1
and a print
server card*
2
DM-4551 45 page/minute network printer including a multi-function controller board*
1
and a print
server card*
2
Although peripheral devices are basically optional, some devices may be provided as standard components depending
on the model.
*1 A multi-function controller board is required to extend the function of the product to include copier, facsimile and
network scanning features.
*2 A print server card is required to extend the function of the product to include network printing.
OPERATION MANUALS FOR THIS PRODUCT
Several operation manuals are provided for this product. Read all manuals that apply to the configuration of the model
you purchased .
●
Operation manual (Read this document before installing the product.)
●
Operation manual (for printer operation and general information)
Describes the basic printer operation, operation of optional devices and basic procedures for loading paper,
misfeed removal, and user maintenance.
●
Operation manual (for copier)
This manual describes all copier functions for models equipped (either as standard or with optional devices) to
include copier functions. The manual is included with models configured with a multi-function controller board and
a scanner module.
●
Operation manual (for network scanner)
This manual describes all network scanning functions for models equipped with an optional network scanner
expansion kit. This manual is supplied with models equipped with a multi-function controller board.
●
Operation manual (for facsimile)
This manual describes all facsimile functions for models equipped with an optional facsimile expansion kit.
The manual is included with the kit.
●
Key Operator’s Guide
Describes the use of key operator programs for customizing printer and copier functions.
2
SOFTWARE LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE. BY USING THE SOFTWARE,
YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE.
1. License. The application, demonstration, system and other software accompanying this License, whether on
disk, in read only memory, or on any other media (the “Software”) and related documentation are licensed to you by
SHARP. You own the disk on which the Software is recorded but SHARP and/or SHARP’s Licensors retain title to the
Software and related documentation. This License allows you to use the Software on one or more computers connected
to a single printer and make one copy of the Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes only. You must
reproduce on such copy the SHARP copyright notice, the copyright notice of SHARP’s Licensors and any other
proprietary legends of SHARP and/or its Licensors that were on the original copy of the Software. You may also
transfer all your license rights in the Software, the backup copy of the Software, the related documentation and a copy
of this License to another party, provided the other party reads and agrees to the terms and conditions of this License.
2. Restrictions. The Software contains copyrighted material, trade secrets and other proprietary material which is
owned by SHARP and/or its Licensors and in order to protect them you may not decompile, reverse engineer,
disassemble or otherwise reduce the Software to a human-perceivable form. You may not modify, network, rent, lease,
loan, distribute or create derivative works based upon the Software in whole or in part. You may not electronically
transmit the Software from one computer to another or over a network.
3. Termination. This license is effective until terminated. You may terminate this License at any time by destroying
the Software and related documentation and all copies thereof. This License will terminate immediately without notice
from SHARP and/or SHARP’s Licensors if you fail to comply with any provision of this License. Upon termination you
must destroy the Software and related documentation and all copies thereof.
4. Export Law Assurances. You agree and certify that neither the Software nor any other technical data received
from SHARP, nor the direct product thereof, will be exported outside the United States except as authorized and as
permitted by the laws and regulations of the United States. If the Software has been rightfully obtained by you outside
of the United States, you agree that you will not re-export the Software nor any other technical data received from
SHARP, nor the direct product thereof, except as permitted by the laws and regulations of the United states and the
laws and the regulation of the jurisdiction in which you obtained the Software.
5. Government End Users. If you are acquiring the Software on behalf of any unit or agency of the United States
Government, the following provisions apply. The Government agrees:
(i) if the Software is supplied to the Department of Defense (DoD), the Software is classified as “Commercial Computer
Software” and the Government is acquiring only “restricted rights” in the Software and its documentation as that
term is defined in Clause 252.227-7013 (c)(1)(Oct. 1988) of the DFARS; and
(ii) if the Software is supplied to any unit or agency of the United States Government other than DoD, the Government's
rights in the Software and its documentation will be as defined in Clause 52.227-19 (c)(2) of the FAR or, in the
case of NASA, in Clause 18-52.227-86 (d) of the NASA Supplement to the FAR.
6. Limited Warranty on Media. SHARP warrants the disks on which the Software is recorded to be free from
defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of purchase as
evidenced by a copy of the receipt. The entire liability of SHARP and/or its Licensors and your exclusive remedy will
be replacement of the disk which fails to meet the limited warranty provided by this Clause 6. A disk will be replaced
when it is returned to SHARP or a SHARP authorized representative with a copy of the receipt. SHARP will have no
responsibility to replace a disk damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication.
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE DISKS, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO NINETY (90) DAYS FROM THE
DATE OF DELIVERY. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE
OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty on Software. You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the Software is at your
sole risk. The Software and related documentation are provided “AS IS” and without warranty of any kind and SHARP
and SHARP’s Licensor(s) (for the purpose of provisions 7 and 8, SHARP and SHARP's Licensor(s) shall be collectively
referred to as “SHARP”) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. SHARP DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-
FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. FURTHERMORE, SHARP DOES NOT
WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE
SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION IN TERMS OF THEIR CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY,
OR OTHERWISE. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SHARP OR A SHARP
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF
THIS WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND NOT SHARP OR A SHARP
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION, SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE
ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
8. Limitation of Liability. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SHARP BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM THE USE OR INABILITY
TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF SHARP OR A SHARP AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS
DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
In no event shall SHARP’s total liability to you for all damages, losses, and causes of action (whether in contract, tort
(including negligence) or otherwise) exceed the amount paid by you for the Software.
9. Controlling Law and Severability. For a portion of the Software related with Apple Macintosh and Microsoft
Windows, this license shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the state of California and
Washington, respectively. For a portion of the Software and/or the documentation relating thereto which has been
licensed to SHARP by Software 2000 International Limited, this license shall be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of England. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision of this
License, or portion thereof, to be unenforceable, that provision of the License shall be enforced to the maximum extent
permissible so as to effect the intent of the parties, and the remainder of this License shall continue in full force and
effect.
10. Complete Agreement. This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the
use of the Software and related documentation, and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or
agreements, written or oral, regarding such subject matter. No amendment to or modification of this License will be
binding unless in writing and signed by a duly authorized representative of SHARP.
3
4
1
Open the front cover.
2
Lower the cartridge lock lever.
3
Pull out the duplex module.
Unlatch the unit and gently
move a module away from
the machine.
If the machine is not
equipped with a duplex
module, open the side
cover similarly.
4
While depressing the lock release button, pull
out the drum/toner cartridge and remove it.
5
Remove a new drum/toner cartridge from its bag
and remove the protective material A.
A
6
Shake the new cartridge horizontally five or six
times.
ADDING TONER
When the drum/toner cartridge becomes empty of toner, a message indicating
the need to replace the drum/toner cartridge will appear on the display. Replace
the drum/toner cartridge following the procedure below.
The machine as shipped does not have a cartridge installed. Follow steps 5
and 6 below for installing the first cartridge.
NOTE
●
The drum/toner cartridge contains toner and a photoconductive drum. The photoconductor on the drum can deteriorate
by exposure to light for an extended period of time.
●
Do not remove the cartridge from its protective package until it is to be installed into the machine.
5
7
Insert the new drum/toner cartridge.
Push the cartridge in until it
locks securely into place.
8
Gently remove the sealing tape from the
cartridge.
9
Remove the drum protective sheet from the
drum/toner cartridge.
Photoconductive drum
Do not touch or damage the
surface of the
photoconductive drum.
10
Close the duplex module.
If the machine is not
equipped with a duplex
module, close the side
cover.
11
Return the cartridge lock lever
and close the front
cover.
NOTE
Do not shake the drum/toner cartridge after the sealing tape has been removed. If the cartridge is shaken after the tape
is removed, some toner will come out of the cartridge.
6
DEVELOPER CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT
When replacement of the developer cartridge is needed, a message indicating the need to replace it will appear in the
display. Follow the procedure below to replace the developer cartridge.
The machine as shipped from the factory does not have a cartridge installed. Follow the same procedure below to
install the first cartridge but omit step 3.
1
Open the front cover.
2
Lower the cartridge lock lever.
3
Remove the developer cartridge.
Push the lock release
button and pull out the
developer cartridge until
it stops.
Push the lock button at
the rear side and remove
the developer cartridge.
4
Remove a new developer cartridge from the bag
and remove protective materials A and B.
A
Remove the tape and
protective material A.
B
Remove the tape and
protective material B.
5
Shake the new developer cartridge horizontally 5
or 6 times.
6
Insert the new developer cartridge.
7
7
Push the cartridge in until it locks securely into
place.
8
Gently remove the sealing tape from the
cartridge.
9
Return the cartridge lock lever.
10
Close the front cover.
The machine will become
ready after about two
minutes.
NOTE
Do not shake the developer cartridge after the sealing tape has been removed. If the cartridge is shaken after the tape is
removed, some developer will come out of the cartridge.
8
SUPPLY LIST
Be sure to use the supply cartridges specified by SHARP.
For storage of supplies, see page 1-25 of the operation manual for printer operation and general information.
CAUTION
●
If a cartridge is to be discarded, dispose of it according to local requirements.
●
Store drum/toner cartridges and developer cartridges out of the reach of children.
NOTE
For recycling of used drum/toner cartridges and developer cartridges, see the information included with the
cartridges.
Supply Part number
Drum/toner cartridge (black) DM-350DT
Developer cartridge (black) DM-350DV
2001D KS1
TINSE2182FCZZ
SHARP CORPORATION
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-2135.
PRINTED IN CHINA
